UC-NRLF r^^>^^^.'(?.S^X\W^^^ Digitized by tine Internet Arciiive in 2007 witii funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation littp://www.arcliive.org/details/firstliebrewbookOOarnoricli ^ I THE ! FIRST HEBREW BOOK. 5 BY THE REV, TEOlViAS KEECHEYEE AEXOLD, M.A. RECTOR OF LYNDON, AND LATE FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. LONDON: FRANCIS & JOHN RIVINGTON, ST. Paul's church yard, and Waterloo place. 1851. LONDON : j GILBERT AND RIVINGTON, PRINTERS, | ST. JOHN'S SQUARE. *-^7 PREFACE The plan of the following Work is the same as that which I have pursued in my other '^ First Books.''' I have principally followed Gesenius ; and the later chapters of the Work, especially those which treat of the ^Irregular' or 'Weak' conjugations, are an abridged translation of that author's Grammar. These portions contain more information than will be at first necessary for the pupil; indeed, it will not be absolutely necessary that he should do more than commit to memory the ' Short Paradigm ' pre- fixed to each chapter, and the accompanying Table oi ' Normal Forms,' before he proceeds to translate the Exercise, with which the chapter concludes. When he meets with any variation from the forms he has committed to memory, he must refer to the fuller account of the conjugation that follows the Paradigm. Through a considerable portion of the Work the Hebrew Exercises are printed both in Hebrew and English characters ; for I am convinced that the a3 251093 IV PREFACE. difficulty of learning to read with correctness and fluency the first oriental language that a person attacks, is very far greater than the editors of our elementary Hebrew works would appear to suppose. Wishing, therefore, to tempt many persons to teach themselves the language in which the Scriptures of the Old Testament were composed, I have felt it necessary to smooth the path to the accomplishment of the first and most irksome portion of the labour. T. K. A. Lymlou, May 5, 1851. LIST OF CONTRACTIONS. G. ■= Gesenius. E. - Ewald. L. z= Lee. ERRATA. Page 23, ']{\a,for English rxui Hebrew. — 35, 103, /or affirmatives ?Ya(^ aflormativcs. 105, last line, /or prefixes ?va(^ suffixes. — 107. In 308, /ov to be pure, for TO^; kanah, read rr^\ nakali. — 184,6 9, /'or treasures ?v«(/ treasuries. CONTENTS. Introduction II. III. IV CHAP. I. Reading and Orthography § 1. The Letters 2. Division of the Consonants 3. Long Vowels. Quiescent Letters. Syllables 4. Begadchephath Letters. Dagesh. Short Vowels 5. Sh'va 6. The Semi-vowels ..... 7. On Syllables 8. On distinguishing Kamets Khatuph from Kamets, and Long Khirek fx'om Short Khirek 9. Further Remarks on the Vowels. Diphthongs 10. On Verbal Roots, and on the Derivation of Nouns 11. On the Derivation of Nouns 12. The Accents § I. The definite Article 2. The Perfect and Imperfect of Kal § 1. Gender of Substantives. Adjectives 2. Formation of the Plural .... 3. Participles of Kal with their feminine and plural forms ....... 4. The Dual Number 5. The Construct State (Status constructus) . § 1. Suffixes denoting Possession 2. Prepositions denoting the Relations of Case 3. Other prepositional Prefixes. Vav PAGE vii 2 ib. 3 5 8 10 13 14 IG 17 20 24 27 33 34 38 46 48 60 53 60 65 V. Modes of expressing the Comparative and Superlative A3 67 VI CONTENTS. CHAP. VI. § 1. Numerals, 1. The ten first Cardinal Numbers 2. The Cardinals continued. Ordinals . VII. The Pronouns 1. Personal Pronouns .... 2. Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns, monstrative Pronouns 3. Relative Pronoun .... VI IT. The Regular Verb §1. Derivation of Verbs. The Conjugations 2. On the ground-form (or Conjugation) Kal 3. Niphal 4. Piel and (its passive) Pual 5. Hiphil and (its passive) Hophal G. Hithpael . IX. Verbs with Gutturals . § 1. Verbs with Pe guttural 2. Verbs Ayin Guttural . 3. Verbs Lamed Guttural X. Use of the Accents as Stops . XI. § 1. Verbs Double Ayin . 2. Verbs Pe Nun . 3. Verbs Pe Aleph. Feeble centia) . 4. Verbs Pe Yod. First Clf Pe Vav . 5. Verbs Pe Yod (continued) Verbs properly Pe Yod 6. Verbs Ayin Vav 7. Verbs Ayin Yod 8. Verbs Lamed Aleph . 9. Verbs Lamed He ass, or Verbs orig XII. Suffixes of the Verb Differences of Idiom, «Scc. . Index I. Hebrew and English II. English and Hebrew Appendix A. Tabic of Declensions ]l. Tabk- of Irregular Nouns „ C. Shorter I'ara(lii,'ins of the Regular Verb „ D. Geiioral Puradi.,Mns of the Regular Verb „ E. Paradigms of tile Irregular Verbs Verbs (Verba Second Class, or De quies nally INTRODUCTION. (^Abridged from Gesenius. ) § 1 . Of the Semitic Languages in general. The Hebrew tongue is one member of a large family of languages, which was native in Palestine, Phoenicia, Syria, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, and Arabia. This family spread itself in early antiquity from Arabia over Ethiopia, and by means of Phoenician colonies^ over many islands and shores of the Mediterranean, but especially over the whole Carthaginian coast. For want of a name, sanctioned by long usage, for the nations and languages united in this family, the term Shemites^ Semitic languages (most of the nations using these tongues being descended from Shem) is generally received at present. The Semitic languages may be divided into three principal divisions : a) The Arabic, to which the jEthiopichQ[oi\g?> as a branch of the southern Arabic (Himyaritic). b) The Aramcean in the north and north-east. It is called Syriac, as it appears in the Christian Aramaean literature, but Chaldee, as it exists in the Aramaean writings of Jews. To this division belong some later portions of the Old Tes- tament, viz., Ezra iv. 8 — vi. 18 and vii. 12 — 26; Dan. ii. 4 — vii. 28. To the Chaldee is closely allied the Samaritan, both exhibiting a frequent admixture VIU INTRODUCTION. of Hebrew forms. The Aramaean of the Natsorceans (John's disciples, Sabii *) is a very degenerate dialect, but the vernacular Syriac of the present day is still more corrupt, c) The Hebreiv, with which the Ca~ naanitish and Phoenician (Punic) stands in close con- nexion. These languages are now either wholly extinct, as the Phoenician, or exist only in a degenerate form, as the Aramaean among the Syrian Christians in Mesopotamia and Kurdistan, the ^Ethiopic in the newer Abyssinian dialects (Tigre, Amharic), and also the Hebrew among a portion of the Jews (although these in their writings especially study the repro- duction of the Old Testament language). The Arabic is the only one that has not only kept to this day its original abode, Arabia Proper, but also spread itself on all sides into the districts of other tongues. The Semitic family of languages was bordered on the east and north by another still more widely ex- tended, which spread itself under most diverse forms, from India to the west of Europe, and which is called the Indo- Germanic, as embracing the Indian (Sanskrit), ancient and modern Persian, Greek, Latin, Slavic, and Gothic, together with the other German languages. In very early times, the Semitic came into contact, in various ways, with the ancient Egyptian, from which the Coptic is derived. Both have ac- cordingly much in common, but the relation between them is not yet accurately defined. The Chinese, the Japanese, the Tartar, and otiicr languages have a fundamentally diticrcnt character. The grammatical structure of the Semitic languages has many peculiarities, which, taken together, con- stitute its special character, although many of them are found by themselves in other tongues. These peculiarities are : a) Among the consonants (which always form the body of these languages) are many * ISo called from 1^2"!^ as being jSaTrrtaTai. INTRODUCTION. IX gutturals of several grades ; the vowels, having their origin in the three primary sounds («, i, u), subserve more subordinate distinctions, b) Most of the ra- dical words consist oi three consonants, c) The verb has only two tenses, but great regularity and analogy prevail in the formation of verbals, d) The noun has only tivo genders and a more simple indication of case, e) In the pronoun all oblique cases are in- dicated by appended forms [svffixa). f) Scarcely any compounds appear in verbs or nouns (except proper names), g) In the syntax is found a simple combination of sentences, without much artificial subordination of members. As to the words themselves, the Semitic tongues vary essentially from the Indo- Germanic ; yet they appear to have more in common here than in the grammar. A great number of stems and roots re- semble in sound those of the Indo-Germanic class. But if we exclude terms that were obviously borrowed, we shall reduce the actual similarity, partly to words which imitate sounds {pnomatopoetica), and partly to those in which the same or similar sense follows from the nature of the same sound, according to a universal law of human speech. Neither of which can establish a historical affinity, which cannot be proved without agreement also in grammatical structure. The Setnitic writing had from the beginning this striking imperfection, that only the consonants (on which the meaning of the word always depends) we7'e given in the line as real letters. Of the vowels only the longer ones, and even these not always, were represented by certain consonants used as vowel-letters. It was not till a later period, that all the vowels were indicated by means of small signs attached to the letters (points or strokes above and below the line), but which were wholly omitted for more practised readers. These languages are wTitten always from right to left. The ^thiopic is the only exception, but its deviation from the Semitic usage X INTRODUCTION. was probably introduced by the first missionaries who introduced Christianity into that country. How- ever dissimilar the Semitic written characters may now appear, they have undoubtedly all come, by various modifications, from one and the same original alphabet (of which the truest copy now extant is the Phcenician), from which also the ancient Greek, and through it all other European, characters were de- rived. In regard to the relative age of these languages, the oldest written works are found in Hebrew ; the Aramcean begins about the time of Cyrus (in the book of Ezra) ; the Arabic not till the earliest cen- turies after Christ (Himyaritic inscriptions) ; the ^thiopic version of the Bible in the fourth century; and the northern Arabic literature since the sixth century. But the Arabic was the longest to maintain the natural fulness of its form, being preserved quiet and undisturbed among the secluded tribes of the desert, till the Mahomedan revolutions, when it suf- fered considerable decay. § 2. History of the Hebreiv as a Living Language, This language was the mother tongue of the He- brew or Israelitish people, during the period of their independence. The name, Hebreiv language'^, does not occur in the Old Testament, and appears rather to have been the name in use among those who were not Israelites. It is called by Isaiah language of Canaan (from the country in which it was spoken). In 2 Kings xviii. 26 (comp. Is. xxxvi. 11, 13), Neh. xiii. 24, and elsewhere, persons are said to speak Jinin^ [Judaice), in the Jews^ language^ in accordance with the later usajre which arose after the removal of ♦ Jl"''i;iJ/ ]Wb, y'> Hand 1 D Cciph c(ch) n? The hand bent b Lamed 1 ^9^^ Ox-goad D D Mem m °? W^ater 1 J Nun n li") Fish D Sam^ch s ' V T Prop V A'ytn V vi Eye ^ £3 Pe p(ph) ^? Mouth V V TsddS' ts ''I? Fish-hook P Koph k n^p Back of the head n Resh r ^^"?. Head Shin 1 Stn J sh 1 s 1 ' Tooth n Tdv t(th) T Cross a) Observe that Shin and Sin are distinguished by the posi- tion of the (iistinctirc point above them. h) '\\) (Ustin^^niish Samech from Sin, in Roman characters, it wih be represented by an Italic s amongst Roman letters, and by a Roman s amongst ItaUcs : so Teth will be t in Romans, t in Italics. Reading and Ortliographij, 3 The Hebrew characters were originally representations of the 2 objects which their names denote, as set down in the sixth column. The names and order of the letters should be learnt by heart, 3 since these must be perfectly known, before a Hebrew Lexicon can be used with facility. They may be arranged in triplets, thus : — A'leph Beth Gi'mel K n :i Daleth He Vav T n 1 Za'yin Kheth Teth T n ? Yod Caph Lamed > 3 b Mem Niin Sa'mech D : D A'yin Pe Tsade V S3 i: Koph Resh Shin; Sin P -1 t:^ w Tav n Chap. I. § 2. Division of the Consonants. 1) Gutturals, A'leph, He, Kheth, A'yin. 4 i^ r^ n y 2) Palatals, Gi'mel, Yod, Caph, Koph. :i > D p 3) Linguals, Daleth, Teth, Tciv. 4) Sibilants, Za'yin, ^d'mech, Tsade, Shin, Sin* r D )^ t "^ 5) Labials, Beth, Vdv, Mem, Pe. The liquids may also be considered a separate 5 class. They are, — La'm'ed, Mem, Nun, Resh. a) ^ is the lightest of the gutturals, a scarcely 6 B 2 4 Reading and Orthography, [ch. i. (6) audible breathing from the lungs, [b) ^ is nearly re- lated to it, and is " a sound peculiar to the organs of the Senaitic race^^ (G). It had sometimes a com- paratively hard sound, which the Greek interpreters expressed by y (in Gomorrha, &c.) : in other words it was a gentle breathing, not expressed in other languages [Eli, Amalek^). It is now usual to pass it over in reading the language, and often in writing it in Roman characters. The Portuguese Jews pro- nounce it as gn at the beginning of a syllable, as ng at the end of one. c) Resh (")) was pronounced with a hoarse gut- tural sound, and partakes of the peculiarities that, as we shall see, belong to the gutturals. 7 The consonants are also divided into, — a) Servile letters. b) Radical letters. Servile letters are those which are used in the grammatical inflexions, and in the syllables that mark derivative words. Servile letters are, however, some- times radical ; though radical ones are never servile, , The servile letters are contained in the memorial words Mosheh, Eythan, Vecalebh (Moses, Ethan, and Caleb, n'^^i ^/i^j^ r^^^)- Exercise 1. a) Write down, in English letters, the names of the following consonants. 12 3 4 5 6 1. r 1 *? t^ "1 K 2. : D :) 1 "T 3. D n D 1 ^ 1 5. n n :) p 1 ':' 6. ;:t j^ r D "1 :i * "HXj, '^^^. 'x^akkK, yht2)J- Ewald indicates its presence by the aspirated hreathiug ('), but says that its sound maybe best represented by gh : and in his Alphabet he prints GAain. §3.] Long Vowels. 5 b) Write down the Hebrew letters corresponding (7) to, 12 3 4 1. y kh h z 2. 1 a k V 3. g n d ts 4. r c m b Chap. I. § 3. Long Vowels, Quiescent Letters. Syllables. As long as the Hebrew was a spoken language, 8 no vowels were written, except so far as 1 ^ i»^ were vowel letters. (See the Introduction.) The vowels, as now found in Hebrew Bibles *, are marks placed sometimes above the consonants, but more commonly below them. In the case of u (^) the mark is inserted in the middle of one of them [Vav). Hebrew words are written, and must be read, 9 from right to left ; not, as with us, from left to right. Long Vowels.'] 1) Long a and e are denoted re- 10 spectively by the marks t and •• , placed under the consonant after which they are to be sounded. Id md nd le me ne a) Long a is the true guttural a sound, as in father. h) Long e is the sound of a \nfate, or e in there. 2) Long i (that is, the English e in 7ne) is a dot 11 written under the consonant after which it is to be sounded, and followed generally by Yod, which is then said to be quiescent, that is, not sounded. U mi ni (the i pronounced like e in 77ie.) See the Introduction. B 3 6 Reading and Orthography. [ch. i. 12 3) Long is a dot usually placed over Vav, which is then quiescent (11). 16 mo no 13 4) Long u (like oo in tool) is a dot placed in Vav, which is then quiescent, lil mu nil 14 Long i and o are sometimes found without the Yod and Vav. They are then said to be written defectively. When lo7ig o is written defectively, it is indicated by a dot placed over the left extremity of its consonant (or a little in advance of it to the left) ; as '^, "I, 2, 1, i h, 'b—') = o, '•)=ro*. — A defectively written u is identical in form with u (r) t« ^ee 26. 15 Every syllable (with the exception of 1, u, =i and) begins with a consonant ; for the consonant Aleph (an unaspirated guttural breathing [6]) was pronounced before an initial a, e, i, o, or u: that is to say, every word that, if written in Roman letters, would begin with a vowel, begins in Hebrew with the con- sonant ^/t^/^ ; which, however, does not affect the 16 pronunciation in any way that our organs can make perceptible. ^< K ^^^ ii^ ihi a e i 6 u 17 The distinctive point of Shin (1, a) may serve also for the defectively written 6 of the preceding conso- nant (14) : nt^/D mo-sheh. 13 So the distinctive point of Sin is allowed to note a * *) may 1) = ot?, the dot representing a preceding Kholem (14, 19). . rrb (lo-veh). 2) = vo, ]']y {X^a-von). 3) = 0, li: {nod). ■f \ was prohal)ly written, whenever the old language did not employ ") to express u. (E.) § 3.] Lo77g Vowels. 7 defectively written 5, to be pronounced after the Sin : (is) 'i^iV so-ne. a) We have seen (11 sqq.) that Vav is quiescent^ after long o and u : and Yod after long i. b) Yod ( ^ ) is also quiescent after long e ( •• ). c) Aleph (K ) is quiescent after any long vowel. T ... SO hi tse hu In writing Hebrew words in Roman characters, i, 6, 4 will be used for long i, o, u, written fully : I, 5, u for the same long vowels written defectively (14): e will be written for *'- (that is, for e followed by *>) ; a for ^— (that is, for a followed by H^). On the defective writing of ^, 6, u, see 14. The names of the long vowels [See note on 65] are, — 19 Long a, Kamets (^). Long i, Khi'rek ( t). Long e, Tse're (..). Long o, Kho'lem (*)). Long u, Shu'rek (-1 ). a) Observe that the vowel it stands for, occurs in the first syllable of each name. b) The quiescent letters (i. e. those letters which are sometimes quiescent) are contained in the memorial word Ehevi OlHi^). a) A simple (or open) syllable ends in a vowel or 20 quiescent consonant. b) A compound (or closed) syllable ends in a con- sonant. Examples and Reading Lesson. Open Monosyllables.'] -^2 -12 K^ 1 I 1 15. 2 ra. 3 tsa. 21 T T Closed Monosyllables.'] 1 eth. 2 shem. 3 hot. ]£^b 3 Di;; 2 /l^J 1 \2 6 DV 5 -)i^ 4 \yb 9 ]^b 8 Yj; 7 4 i)6r. 5 yom, 6 chen. 7 i^ets. 8 lun. 9 lu^. ]>ii 12 'pb 11 IDiD 10 10 mo^. 11 sol. 12tsin. * It would be more correct to say, that the vowel-sign (or point) indicates that the following Yod or Vav is a vowel-letter, not a consonant. Reading and Orthography. [CH. 1. (21) Dissyllables.'] IV^ 2 n:it:^ i T T 1 sha-nah. 2 tsa-yon. 3 ka-mim. ' 5 Sa-rah. 4 kara. 6 yo-nah. ]:p 12 ••^p 11 7 va-rai^. 9 me-^ets. 11 ko-li. 8 ma-kom. 10 ha-yah. 12 ma-gen. , Exercise 2. 22 a) Write in English characters (with the dissyl- lables divided into syllables) — i"? 7 ?)^ 6 liij 5 ^ A -m^ y 2 y I p 14 > 13 ;i 12 IT 11 '?i:i 10 D^iJ 9 ^p 8 -iVi:^ 20 ^ip 19 [5 18 nYi:^ IT p^ 16 ^^ 15 '?^^ 26 -lihi 25 DV 24 m 23 li:) 22 ID 21 Dii^ 31 trT\ 30 ];2n 29 DH 23 ^^:^ij 27 uht 35 nvii 34 n:;D 33 t: 32 T T T T ^) Write in Hebrew characters — 1 ts6. 2 tsi. 3 tsu. 4 tsa. 5 tse. 6 tsa. 7 «a-nah. 8 sar. 9 i^ets. 10 i?a-ts B, D. Tliis mark is usually found in these letters at the beginning of words and syllables, when there is no vowel immediately preceding. § 4.] Short Voivels. 9 The letters which receive this Dagesh are contained in the (23) technical memorial word Begadchephath. The aspiration can hardly be made perceptible by English organs in d and g. In England, ^ (bh) is usually pronounced v : the Spanish Jews, however (and so Ewald and Hunvitz), pronounce it b. I shall print g, d for ;|, 1, except when the Hebrew equivalents of Roman letters are to be written by the pupil. But w^hen a dot {Dagesh) stands in a consonant 24 that terminates a syllable, it indicates that the conso- nant in which it is placed is to be pronounced double (and, if a Begadchephath letter, without aspiration) ; as "lll'l dib-ber. The Dagesh that hardens the pronunciation of an 25 initial begadchephath letter (23) is called light Dagesh : that which doubles a consonant, hard or strong Dagesh [Dagesh lene, Dagesh forte). [Short Vowels.) 26 The short vowels are, — a - Pa'thakh. e " Segol (but ••• is sometimes an obtuse a sound, as e in mere: especially in an accented penult followed by " ). 1 • Khi'rek Parvum. o T Ka'mets Khatuph'. u \ Kibbuts' (but \ is sometimes a defectively written Shiirek' [14J). a) It is a great imperfection in the notation of these vowels, that the sign for Kamets Khatuph (o) is the same as that for Kamets (a). The rules for distinguishing the two cannot be given, till the nature of Sh'va has been explained. Examples and Readiyig Lesson. o) 3il 3 'pi 2 pn 1 [ 1 khuk. 2 bal. 3 gabh. riK 6 ]2 5 D^ 4 ^t 9 Dj:) 8 ]|) 7 27 4 dam. 5 ben. C eth. 7 pen. 8 kiim. 9 shiiph. 10 tur. 11 mits. 12 yam. 10 Reading and Orthography. [ch, i. (27) b) tk^ nrn i [25). 1 ha-zeh. 2 mg'-lech (=me-lgch, t^l 4 nn^ 3 3 i?e'.rgbh. 4 ne'-phSsh. f xik ^ J^"].! ^ 5 ze'-rai>. 6 e'-rgts. D19 8 •n^n 7 7 khay-yath. 8 ^g'-rem. "^1^ ^^ IV} 9 9 na-i>ar. 10 ne'-dSr. (Mix 3 yiJ ed.) 2 bb^ 1 1 tsa-lal. 2 tsits. 3 a-ahara. nVa^ 5 V4^ 4 4 sha-bhats. 5 shib-bo-lgth. ■^^piZ ^ ^^12 6 6 ka^ial. 7 ka^fer. n^^ 9 1^^ 8 8 i?ur. 9 i^uph. ^nh? 11 inbip 10 10 i?6-Ia-th6. 11 cat-t5-hii. pnrr 13 IB] 12 12 yim-mad. 13 kha-rak. Exercise 3. a) Write in English letters — 28 j^K r '^B ^ 5]i^ 5 0-3 4 'py 3 D^i 2 nr i •jj'is 13 b^\2 m2 11 'pip 10 riNt 9 riNt s D''sk 19 Dm 18 y"in; ir ^^^* le '•d^ i5 nnr u • T ' VV • T • - TT nnD 25 pD 24 ^n 23 uir^ 22 n^^^^D 21 iD^^ 20 - T '- T • T T- •13T 31 D^i:^ 30 -^-liD 29 "ppD 28 JlDn 27 DipD 26 b) Write in Hebrew letters — 1 ten 2 pakh 3 pen 4 ben 5 pash 6 par 7 pum 8 na-ham 9 na-ghakh 10 pe-tht 11 co-pher 12 na-ghai) 13 ^a-phadh 14 )^a-lara 15 sha-kal 16 ts(?-bheth 17 gul-lfih 18 mats-tsah. Chap. I. § 5. Sh'vd. 29 Besides the full vowels (19, 26), the Hebrew has § 5.] Sh'va. 11 also a series of very slight vowel sounds, which may (29) be called half-vowels. The shortest, slightest, and most indistinct of these sounds is the simple Sk'va ( : ), resembling an obscure half e (G). A consonant followed by this Sh'va is usually not considered to constitute a syl- lable *. It will be indicated by ( ^ ) when the Hebrew words are written in English characters. This Sh^va is called vocal (or initial) Sh'va, to dis- 30 tinguish it from silent (or final) Sh^va, which marks the close of a syllable. It is also called simple Sh'va, to distinguish it from the Khdtephs, or ' composite Sh'vas: See 36. a) The place of vocal Sh'va is under the initial ^l consonant of a syllable, b) Sh'va is final — 1 ) At the end of words, as r^K, at. 2) When preceded by a short vowel not having Metheg (48), as pD"}J>^, ar-mo V. 3) When preceded by a long vowel having a prin- cipal accent, as H^Il^^, sho'bh'-nah. (But there are many exceptions to the two last rules.) K^Q!3 m'mal-le. O^^'-ipfP =) ^^Zpj^ ki^nu. n^Dip ko-flah. !)b'?nt ha-l'lu'. T : ' : |- ^•^rpp; yik.^'lAt. «^^Qn ha-m'shel§. ^bp k'tol. OS":) ma-l'che|l. * Gesenius calls a consonant with Sh'va a half syllable. t For y;hr\ {hal-Vlu). X Here the first is silent Sh'va. § The interrogative H (which has Metheg) forms a syllable of itself. II If this word were to be divided thus, mal-che, the caph would take the Dagesh. " In these last examples the Sh'va sound is especially slight, on account of the extreme shortness of the preceding syllable." (G.) 12 Reading and Orthography. [CH. 1, 32 If a word ends in two consonants, each of them takes a silent Sh'va, as 1")^, nerd. 33 A final "] or D [dageshed] always takes a silent Sh'va, as '^'jyi, r\i^' With these exceptions, Sh'va is not placed under the final consonant of a word. 34 Examples and Reading Lesson. rob^^ 2 in^m 1 1 v'h6-red. 2 yish-p6/. y'lB 4 ^^P] 3 3 yim-l5ch. 4 b'dil. r^yib 6 ''jiiDin 5 5 bhin-<6-thi. 6 rbha-nah. yriy} s nnSn r 7 har-kbebh. 8 hir-khibh. TjBpb 10 ni^i"' 9 9 yo-l'dah. 10 cas-p'cha. rsxiv 12 np^n 11 11 khel-k'cba. 12 )?6bb-rath. Vir^ini 14 j?i?V 13 13 i^a-bhar-ta. 14 pith-ga-ma. ^nj^ip 16 ^'vii 15 15 tsad-d'ko. 16 kin-n'nab. D^pb-1 18 nbp 17 17 k'neh. 18 r'cha-sim. mn^'t^ 20 ]rh^^ 19 19 shul-khan. 20 sh'lakh-nah nbn 22 Tj'^pn 21 21 tim-shoch. 22 tiiiii-math. ercise 4. 35 a) Write in English letters and divide into syl- lables the following Hebrew words — DD3^Q nt^N^ DppiD ]yiy\v l^p? '?! n3 nsp p?: ^"1^1? '?)^ T}?^^ >r\t '?^'^ V^ V?^ ''r\')Op b) Write in Hebrew letters — 1 mash-iniin. 2 m'sbam-motb. 3 nt'i.*-dar. 4 nTi)h-gai^. 5 niph-tal. 6 p'kad-ta. 7 yu5-6ad. 8 kosh^ 9 hTch-tabht. § 6.] Semi-vowels. 13 Chap. I. § 6. The Semi-vowels. A semi-vowel, or composite Sh'va, is formed by pre- 36 fixing a Sh'va to one of the three short vowels^ a, e, 0. Hence we get, -: Khateph' Pathakh. ••: Khateph' Seo^ol. t: Khateph' Ka'mets. These semi-vowels will he denoted by a, e, o above the line of letters, when English characters are used. A semi-vowel is sometimes called concisely * a Khateph.' "liDH kh^mor {ass). lbj»^ ^mor {to say). ^^ri kh**!! (sickness). The composite Sh^as stand principally, Khateph 37 Segol ( v: ) exclusively, under the gutturals. Khateph PathaJch stands for a simple vocal Sh'va 38 (30), but without any fixed law : especially, a) Under a letter doubled by Dagesh (for the doubling causes a distincter utterance of the Sh'va. See 39, b). b) After a long vowel. (G.) Khateph Kamets is less exclusively connected with 39 the gutturals, than the other two semi-vowels. a) It stands for simple vocal Sh'va, when the syl- lable had an original o sound, which is to be partly preserved. b) It is also used (as is also -.•) when a strong Dagesh has fallen away. (G.) Examples and Reading Lesson. 40 hrjiii 4 irin 3 b^'iv^ 8 '^pt^ 7 Tin 16 u'bn 9 I ba-i''^/a-rah. 2 he-^zin. 3 kV-thar. 4 ''hah. 5 "dh5-ni-kam. 6 *h6-den-nu- 7 ^hi. 8 "ra-phel. 9 khMom. 10 kh^zir. II he-^rich. 12 ha-'^ri-chi. C 14 Reading and Orthography. [cii. l. Exercise 5. 41 a) Write in English characters — : T ' T • -f. -. .. . , _ . n^: 16 D'':nm 15 n\2;y^ 14 b) Write in Hebrew characters — 1 nid-dah. 2 niz-har. 3 hiz-i^'^kii. 4 til-mid. 5 sir-pad. 6 ar-mon. 7 ta-kh*Ieph. 8 'slier. Chap. I. § 7. On Syllables, Furtive Pathakh, Mappik, Makkeph. Metheg. 42 The general rule (20) is, that every syllable which has a long vowel, is an open syllable ; every one that has a short vowel is a closed syllable *. Hence a Sh^va is usually vocal after a long vowel, and final (i. e. stands as a mere syllable-divider under the final consonant of a syllable) after a short vowel. 43 But a tonic accent enables a short vowel to stand in an open syllable ; a long vowel in a closed one. So that, when the syllable is the tone-syllable of the word, a following Sh'va may be vocal after a short vowel, and filial after a long one. 44 AVhen a final guttural is H. ^, or H (with Mappik, 46), this guttural has often a Pathakh under it, called Furtive Pathakh, because it steals in, as it were, before the consonant it stands under, as r\^'^'i2, Md-shT-akh (Messiah). 45 X furtive Pathakh may also stand under one of the gutturals just enumerated, when such guttural is fol- * When a voivelless consonant (which, as such, has Sk'va) closes a syllable, but runs on naturally with the J'oilowinc/ con- sonant, Ewald calls the Sh'va, *' Sli'va viedium,'' and the (former) syllable "a half -closed syllable." Thus, ^"7T» not quite yaUde; not ya-Vde; but, as it were, yaVdv. § 7.] Mappik, Makkeph, ^c, 15 lowed by a dageshed consonant with Sk'va, as P^^l}^^, (is) pd-sha-a'Jt. Mappik' is a point placed in the middle of a final H, 4G when it is not quiescent. (H will be represented by hh.) Makkeph is a hyphen, which unites words so closely, 47 that a word followed by it loses its accent ; words united by this mark being considered as one word. Tsere and Kholem are often changed by a following Makkeph into Segol and Kamets Khatuph respectively : as "ps-jiK for b':^ nK D"T^5-^^ for D^^^ b^- TV •• T T T T T Metheg (or Bridle) is a small perpendicular line 48 ( I ) to the left of a vowel ; it is used to show that the vowel sound is to be extended. Metheg stands (G.), a) Before a vocal Sh'va, which, without that mark, would be taken for^waZ Sh'va: as ^"IDJ^, a-m'ru (not am-ru). : |T h) Before a Khateph (36) when immediately preceded by a vowel without a following dagesh : as n"in^» ye-kh^reh. c) In polysyllables, one or two syllables before the tone- syllable. , If the last syllable has the tone, the antepenultima, whether long or short, has Metheg. In speaking of the antepenultima here, we consider a (simple or composite) Sh^va to form a syllable. t:it D^^5-^2 1 T T T ••)K"!^\ 4 nnor 3 T : '|T r\rh^ 8 T :|T D"TKn 7 njin3 10 T-:|T T \ : 1- liHjT 11 ' : IT Ji'iat^ijn 12 T |- n"iDT 14 T ; |T n-lOT 13 n:i^DS 16 •TO^ 15 : I- Examples and Reading Lesson, I colsa-dam. 2 za-ch'ra. 3 zoch-rah. 4 yi-r'u. 5 yi-r'u, 6 ka-flah. 7 ha-a-dam'. 8 ga-l'thah'. 9 ha-m'khul-lal. 10 ca-hnhah'. II ya-th'hon. 12 ha-n5-sha-bh6th. 13 sha-m'rah'. 14 za-ch'rah'. 15 yi'Sh'nu. 16 I'mi-nahh. c 2 49 16 Reading and Ortliographij, [ch. i 50 Exercise 6. a) Write in English letters — T V 1 T • • : 1 T T T T T 2 n''S)^ 1 h) Write in Hebrew letters *— 1 hemmah. 4 harakmi\ 7 tha>n5d". 2 ronni. 5 bath = tsiy yon. 8 tharlim. 3 6 9 I'mi'nehem". v'im = e'n'cha". :i?al = ta'vath. 10 i?*navim. Chap. I. § 8. On distinguishing Kamets Khatuphfrom Kamets, and Long Khirekfrom Short Khirek. 51 Till the pupil is acquainted with the derivation of words, the following rules will assist him in distin- guishing Kamets Khatuph from Kamets ; both of which are indicated by the same mark ( ^ ). 52 I.) T is in a closed (42), unaccented syllable. Such syllables are : — a) An unaccented syllable in which the •«• is without Metheg, and followed by simple Sh'va. b) An unaccented syllable in which the t js followed by a letter with strong Dac/esh. An T = may have Metheg with it, if the syllable is the second syllable before the tone (i. e. ]jrincipal accent). See 53. c) When Makkeph (47) follows. d) When the unaccented closed syllable is fnal. (G.) 53 II.) ■»• is d in open syllables. a) When followed by Khateph Kamets. h) When followed hy Kamets Khatuph. c) In the two anomalous words D^'^"Tp (f^o-dd-shim), D^'^Tvi^ • T '|T 'TIT (shu-rd-shhn.) In these cases ^ is followed by Metheg, since Metheg always stands in the second syllable before the tone. (G.) * In this Exercise (') marks the place of Metheg; (") the tone-syllable; (;) marks a Makkeph. §. 8.] Kamets Khatuph, 17 In the same way Metheg is of use in enabling 54 us to distinguish a defectively written long Khirek from short Khirek : for Khirek is long^ when it forms either an open syllable (whether accented or not) or a closed accented syllable (42) . Now a Metheg follow- ing Khirek often shows that the syllable is an oj)en one, the Sh'va that follows it being initial, not final. JTiannQ i tt; t "ii") 3 HQjn 2 •• T T : T V •• I T . T ; T : : ' T ■•■tit; ^nDi 9 n^^p 8 : |T : T ninrnn u ?TD-i:ii 10 :nnr^ 13 n^n'-^n 12 ••t: T T T : T Examples and Reading Lesson. 1 m6-kh°-ra-bh6th. 55 2 khoch-mah. 3 ron-ne. 4 c'dobh-ram. 5 bot-te-chem. 6 c'd6r-la-i?o-mer, 7 kobh-ro. 8 kod-kod. 9 ra-ch'bhA. lOtsor-ce-cha. 11 hor-kho-bhoth. 1 2 hor-kha-bhah 1 3 h6-kh°-rebh 14 hog-lath. 15 ribh. Exercise 7. a) Write in English letters — 56 \Tr^ 5 D^? 4 t'^pi 3 n)n^>\ 2 ?j^^jp> 1 annt^^D 8 nin-inb" 7 r]T)rh 6 T T : T T-;- T : T : b) Write in Hebrew letters — 1 y'komi^ara. 2 m'shor-to. 3 n5v. 4 nCibh. sho 5 ^.''ozbhech. 6 i?*m6dclia. Chap. I. § 9. Further Remarks on the Voivels. (G.) Diphthongs. The primary vowel sounds are A, I, U. 57 E is properly the diphthong AI contracted. O is properly the diphthong AU contracted. c3 18 Reading and Orthography, [ch. i. 58 A more useful division of the vowels than that into long and short (or perfect and imperfect) vowels, is this (G.) :— First Class. A sound. 59 For the A sound the Hebrew has three vowel marks (t), ( ~ )j ( • ) ; all of which are written below the consonant with and after which they are to be sounded. a) T b) - c) V Kamets. Pathakh. Segol. e or a •-• is here an obtuse e- sound, like e in the French mere . our there. in CO d) e) f) 9) Second Class. I and E sounds. and Long Khirek. Short Khirek. Tserc, with and without Yod. Segol. Obtuse e. When accented. 61 Third Class, U and O sounds. h) ^ u Shurek. i) 7 u,u Kibbuts. (1) u, a simple shortening of Shurek. (2) u. k) '') and '_ 6, 6 Kholem. i) ~ o Kamets Kliatuph. Also obtuse e ( " ) may be considered to belong to this class, as far as it springs from u or o. 62 When vowels are lengthened or shortened (for reasons to be explained hereafter), the chan^^e is usually confined to vowels of the same class. Thus a may be shortened into a or a (or e; that is, obtuse Segol) ; e into e or / ; d into o or //. G3 The only diphthongs that occur in Hebrew are, ai (V), oi {>i), ui C^). C4 In y- the Yod is usually considered quiescent, so that this combination is pronounced dv or dw; not aiv. ^ 9.] The Voivels, 19 ExamjjJes and Reading Lesson. r\3. b) Dp 2 1M a) A a) 1 yad. 2 kam. b) bath. 6: f^P, 1 ^) c) 1 me-lech (or m'dlech). nj'^^ 3 TT/2 2 ya-de'-cha. 3 g'le-nah. ia^ie) Q'RT^ ^) d) tsaddi-kim. e) im-mo. D'^2 nu 1 /) /) 1 beth. 2 shem. V^2 nsD 1 9) g) 1 se'pher. 2 shen. n-iD/^) nTn3 3 kho-zeh. h) muth. T \ I) 1 mu-thi. 2 gul-lah. T bspij) j) 1 kol. 2 robh. k) khok=. 0^2 ■jiK* 1 1) 1 eth-. 2 at=tein. nii 2 nr\B 1 B 1 Pa-thakhf. 2Tse'-ra. D'?in4 PT^3 3 Khi'-rek. 4 Kho'-lem. Y-^::ip 6 PT^^ 5 Shu -rek. 6 Kib'-buts. V?I3 7 7 Ka'-mets. •pi:):) 9 sivton vrop s T ' V ' T 8 Ka'-mets Kha -^uph. 9 Se'-gol. * From rt^t^- t The names of the vowels are almost all taken from the form and action of the mouth in uttering the sounds. Thus nJlD signifies opening, t"!^ bursting (of the mouth), pTVn gnashing, D7in fulness, from its full tone, p'lV^ properly av- picTfxog, Y"l3,p closing (of the mouth). This last meaning belongs also to Y'Op ; and the reason why long a and short o (5]^^n Ypp Kamets correptum) have the same sign and name is that the Rabbins gave to Kamets the impure sound of o, like tiie Swedish a. Only Segol (^'iJjD [/i^D, E.'] cluster of grapes) appears to be named after its form. The names were, moreover, so formed that the sound of each vowel was heard in the first syllable : and in conformity to this, some write ^dghol, Komets-chatiiph, Kubbuts. (G.) 20 Reading and Orthography. [CH. 1. (65) >^bp ''i:i2 'rj'^l^^l c 1 Vlo-nai. 2 goi. 3 ga-lui. v^ys T •• 4 e-lav. 5 i^a-lav. r\to 7 i^jr 6 6 s6-ne(a). 7 Mo-shgh. ^3-|> 9 np'^ 8 8 sho-mer. 9 yir-pos. p:^2 n5>i D 1 lo-veh. 2 i?a.von. D^-^2 'pipi E 1 kol. 2 kum. DR/ ri'pps 3 ko-loth. 4 kum. IP T F 1 vav. 2 gev. ''i:i4 •'na 3 khai. 4 goi. rin'T 5 5 d'bha-rhav. Exercise 8. 06 «) Write in English letters (dividing th^ syl- lables) — •inns 5 ':5i 4 i'?^* 3 w^^i 2 o'^n 1 : I T •• • • • T T \ niD^ppD 10 ^t^iD 9 m;i s on 7 ijp^ 6 Z*) Write in Hebrew letters — 1 i-Tim. 2 tamim. 3 meakh. 4 )-Mmok. 5 i?*mukim. ^ orakh. 7 cathobh. 8 t'mim. 9 rbhabhim. 10 i)*mrikke. 11 tammah. CiiAP. I. §10. On Ve7^hal Roots and on the derivation of Nouns. 07 The roots or stem-ivords of the Hebrew language nearly always consist of three consonants, on which the meaning essentially depends. 08 a) A strong root is one that contains three firm, permanent consonants; a weak root is a root that contains at least one weak letter {AIq)h, He, Vav, or Yod). b) Verbs whose first consonant is Nun, or whose § 10.] Derivation of Nouns. 21 second and third consonants are the same letter, are (68) contracted in some forms by the omission or assimi- lation * of one consonant, and are sometimes called contracted verbs. But these may, like the former, be called iveak roots, since they cannot maintain their full form throughout. The various modifications of the primary meaning 69 of a root are expressed by the radical consonants with changed vowels, and sometimes with added conso- nants also ; which are sometimes prefixed, sometimes post-fixed. a) A stem-w^ord may be either a noun or a verb ; 70 and usually the language exhibits both together (see 1, a, d in the following examples) : but it is cus- tomary and of practical utility for the beginner, to consider the third perso7i singular of the Perfect in the simplest conjugation (called Kal) as the root or stem- word, and the other verbal forms, nouns, and ^mr ticks, as derived from it. (G.) b) Somefimes no corresponding noun is found in the extant language : and sometimes a noun exists without a corresponding verb. The spoken language probably bad, at least at some period, the missing forms, which are often found in the kindred dialects (e.g. in Arabic). (G.) The verbal root, as just defined, generally has for 71 its vowels Kamets in the first, and Pathakh in the second, syllable. The verb that the old Grammarians used as their example of conjugating was 74^3 {pai;dl); and hence the fi7'st cotisonant of a verb was called its Pe ; the second its Ayin ; the third its Lamed. Verbs whose ^r^^ radical (their Pe) is Nun, Aleph, 72 or Yod, have, from the weakness of those consonants, certain peculiarities of conjugation ; as have (for the same reason) verbs whose second radical (their Ayin) is either Yod or identical with their third radical; * A consonant is assimilated to a following one, when the %ame consonant that follows is substituted for the preceding one : e. g. when np becomes pp. 22 Reading and Orthography. [ch. i. (72) and verbs whose third radical (their Lamed) is He or Aleph. The presence of any other guttural in the root also necessitates some change in several of the usual forms. 73 A verb whose ^rs/ radical is Nun is called concisely 'a verb Pe Nun:^ one whose third radical is Aleph, * a verb Lamed Aleph:* and so on. I shall designate (and indicate) those that have and have not such peculiarities thus : — B. (Verbs with gutturals). (us 1. Verbs first guttural ually indicat thus) K*- ) ed (g') Verbs second guttural (g^) Verbs third guttural («^ C. Weak {contracted) Verbs. ff Verbs Pe Nun vv fn) Verbs Double Ayin (d) D. {Other weak Verbs). Verbs Lamed Aleph ^b (a^) Verbs PeYod ^3 (y) Verbs Ayin Vav iy (V) Verbs Lamed He nb If N3 (h) Verbs Pe Aleph (a') 75 Examples and Reading Lesson, ~ T V V T ^bp 2 TjSp a 1 ^Sp' "< 3 A I A 1 bagad, 2 boged, he was deceitful. deceitfully. 3 biigod, 4 be'ged, fo 6e deceitful. deceit. 1 malach, 2 molcch, he reigned. he that reigns. 3 yTmldch, he will reign. § 10.] Classes of Verbs. 23 (ai) [Pe AlepK] ^Dh^i a^) 1 achal *, to eat. (75) S^DNtl - T 2 abhad, 3 a^aph, to perish. to collect. {g^) [Pe guttural] ir2^ B B {g^) i^amad, to stand; to stay. (^2) [Ayin guttural] — T (g^ shakha^, to kill (animals). (g^ [Lamed gutturaf — T (^3) shalakh, to send. (n) [Pe Nun] t^^ 2 m: 1 c - T C {n) 1 nagas, 2 nagash, to exact. to approach. in:3 4 m^s 3 nadar, 4 nahar, ~ ''' -T to vow. to flow. (d) [Double Ayin] ^5? (d) sabhabh, to go about. (a3) [Lamed Aleph] ^^^D D D (0) matsa, to find. (3/) [PeFod] -7^2 (3/) 1 yashabh, 2 yalad, to sit. to beget. P)P;4 "7D''3 - T 3 yasad, 4 yasaph, to found. to add. vrs 5 yai-^ats, to counsel. {v) [Ayin Vav] op (v) kum, to rise. ih) [Lamed He] TT Exe ih) galah, to reveal. rcise 9. c) Write in Ea^ish letters, and desaibe (both in 76-^"^' ivords and by the proper conventional letters [74]) the following verbal roots — tsud, to be hunted; to hunt. zarah, to disperse. khalal, to be wounded. hagah, to meditate. mug, to melt. nazal, to flow, yakash, to lay snares. b) Write in English letters, and descinbe (both in * I shall follow the usual practice of giving the English in- finitive as the radical form; though the pupil must remember that the Hebrew word is really the third singular m. of the Perfect. 24 Reading and Orthography, [ch. i. (76) ivords and by the proper conventional letters) the following verbal roots — 1D> to instruct. 7'21 to fall; to wither. - T "T)X to curse. ~ T TpDD to cover. ni7 to borrow. 773, to mingle. - T 'y\''^ to return. Chap. I. § 11. On the derivation of Nouns, 77 Nouns are either primitive (i. e. themselves roots) or derivative. Derivative nouns are mostly verbals, that is, de- rived from verbs : some, however, are denominatives *, that is, derived from another noun. Many of the old grammarians acknowledged none but verbal roots, and considered all nouns as verbals. 78 a) Of verbal nouns some are strong, being formed from strong roots, and retaining all the consonants of the root, with (usually) a change of the vowel points. b) Others are iveak, being formed from weak roots, and usually by throwing away one of the radical letters. c) Both strong and iveak verbal nouns may be nn- augmented or augmented. In the nnaugmented nouns no addition is made to the verbal root. The aug- mented nouns are made by the addition of one or more of the servile letters ^ /l J D K n to a verbal root. These serviles being contained in the technical word He-e- mnn-ti, augmented nouns are called Heemantic nouns. Of these additional letters, }^ is always at the beginning; H generally at the end ; > and ^ sometimes at the end ; Jl either at the be- ginning or end of the word so augmented. 79 a) xV noun augmented at the begiiming may be denoted by a, at the end by w ; at both by aw. * That is, derived de nomine (from a noun). §11.] Derivation of Nouns. 25 b) A noun derived from a verb Pe Nun, Pe Yod, &c., (79) will be designated by n, y, d, v, a, h, according to the letters given in 76, as denoting those conjuga- tions or forms. c) If a noun is derived from a strong root, or is a root itself, or consists only of radical letters, it may be designated by r. d) I shall include in nouns designated by r feminines in ah, derived from verbs Lamed He, though the h is in this case pro- perly servile : as T\1Vy shanah (a year) from ilJti^. Examples and Reading Lesson, T ; T me'lech (r) (a king) mishpaf (a) {judgement) khochmah (w) {wisdom) deai^ (y) {knowledge) moshabh (ay) {seat) i?etsah' {(0 y) {counsel) torn {d) {perfeetness) magen (a d) {a shield) zimmah (w d) {wickedness) A verbal noun, mented. T n^Sjri t'phillah (aw^) "^ * • {prayer) A verbal noun, aug- J^SJ^ mented at the begin- ( ~ t ning. j A verbal noun, aug- Q^H mented at the end. i ~ t A verbal noun, from a J^^> {weak) verb Pe Yod. A verbal noun, aug- ^Iti^'' mented at the begin- ning, from a {loeak) verb Pe Yod. A verbal noun, aug- Vl?^ mented at the end, ""^ from a {weak) verb Pe Yod. A verbal noun, derived QQJ^ from a contracted verb double Ayin. A verbal noim, aug- mented at the begin- ning, from a contracted verb double Ayin. A verbal noun, aug- mented at the end, from a contracted verb double Ayin. A verbal noun, aug- mented at both begin- ning and end, from a contracted verb double Ayin. m DDt ~ T malach {to reign) shapha^ {to judge) khacham {to be wise) yadai? {to know) yashabh {to sit) yai?ats {to counsel) tamam {to complete) ganan {to cover, pro- tect) zamam {to devise) 80 pillel {to judge) ; [in Hithpael/ /^^/^ ^. J to pray] ' 26 Beading and Orthography. [CH. 1. (so) -li) ger (v) " {stranger) OpQ makom (av) ■^ (place) ]S'^b la-ts6n (w v) ■*■ (scorn) T1^)2D t'bhunah(awv ^ • (understanding) n3 P'ri (h) • • (fruit) inD mattan (an) -- (a gift*) TwBJ2 mappalaht(awn) ■^ "^ ~ (a ruin) aug- end, verb aug- A verbal noun, from a {weak) verb At/in Vav. A verbal noun, aug- mented at the begin- ning, from a (xveuk) verb Ayin Vav. A verbal noun, mented at the from a (weak) Ayin Vav. A verbal noun, mented at both begii ning and end, from a (weak) verb Ayin Vav. A verbal noun, from a (tceak) werhLamed He. A verbal noun, aug- mented at the begin- ning, from a (contract- ed) verb Fe Nun. A verbal noun, aug- mented both at the be- ginning and the end, from a {contracted) verb Pe Nun. {to sojourn) (to rise) '^^b luts (to scorn) P2 bAn (to understand) niD parah ■•^ (to be fruitful) ]D^ nathan ~ "^ (to give) 73^ naphal ■" (.to fall) Exercise 10. a) Write the following words in English letters, and describe their derivation according to the Table just given — 3n") street. nn'^S division (of priests). -I'ipQ a well. ' T tl^p^ possession (especially ■•• • • cattle). "jH grace, favour. ^n^^^ love. T ~: - * For mantan. 2n*1 to be broad. ~ T ;i73 to divide. - T 'y\p to dig (for water). il2p to get; to buy. t't ]^n to be gracious (to). - T ;^nj^ to love. l^IOn to slip, to go astray. T T 'I' For munpalah. § 12.] The Accents. 27 '^'^ companion, friend, \ T}'^'^ to take delight in. (ai) •^''ii hunter. ITl to lie in wait: to hunt. 'PDi^Q food. b2'i^ to eat. nDljn slumber. D^^ to slumber. b) Write the following words in Hebrew letters, and account for them as before — shenah, sleep. yaShen, to sleep. caph, the hollow of the hand. caphaph, to bend. makhsor, want. khaser, to want, to lack. )>ed, a witness. }?udh, to testify. torah, instruction. rausar, admonition, correction. kalon, shame, disgrace. yarah, to teach (in Hiphil *). yasar, to admonish. kalah, to be lightly esteemed (in Niphal *). Chap. I. § 12. The Accents. a) The tone (or accent) of Hebrew words is on one 82 of the two last syllables. b) As the tone-syllable is usually the last, it is suf- ficient for the pupil to know what classes of words have the accent on the penult (i. e. the last syllable but one). c) Words with the accent on the final syllable are called Milra' i^wD) i those with the accent on the penult, Milel' (The following list will be useful for reference, though at 83 present several of the terms will convey no meaning to the pupil.) The tone-syllable is the penult in, — d) All dissyllable nouns whose last vowel is a Segol or Pathakh. b) Words whose final consonant has 2i furtive Pathakh. * A conjugation so called. D 2 -i- 28 ReadiJig and Orthography. [ch. i. (83) c) Words with the dual ending a-yim (Q^ ), d) Verbs of the Perfect tense with the personal endings ti, td, nu 0^, r), >PI). T e) Regular verbs of the Hiphil conjugation ; and the con- jugations Kal, Niphal, and Hiphil of verbs Ayin Vav and Double Ayin. f) The demonstrative pronouns el'-leh (these), hem'-mdh, hen'-ndh. g) Verbs that have the Vav conversive of the Perfect. h) The accusative suffixes -ah, -hu, -nu, -ni, -Ted, never have the tone. 84 Beside the accents that mark the tone-syllable of a word, there are others which serve the purpose of punctuation, by indicating that a word is or is not to be taken in close connexion with what follows. Such accents t are either separative or connective. Their names and shapes are J : — 85 Separative (or Distinctive) Accents {Domini) . Name. Figure. Name. Figure. 1. (Imperatorbs.) II. (Reges ) 1 Siimk K It Segolta ... A 2 Athnakh ^J 2 Zakeph Katon ji 3 * Mercha with Mahpach >^3 3 Zakeph Gadol l< 4 Tiphkhu K t These tables and remarks are placed here that the pupil who proceeds immediately from this work to any portion of a printed Bible may have some notion what is meant by the numerous marks with which the text is crowded. In the earlier part of the present work the tone-syllable, when it is thought ne- cessary to mark it, will be indicated by > ; as POi^p {kd-inl'-ta). \ Those marked with * are peculiar to the poetical books. Those marked with f are prepositive. Those marked with I are postpositive. § 12.] The Accents, Name. Figure. III. (Duces.) 1 R'bhi'a 2^ 2 X Zarka S 3 I Pashta K 29 Name. Figure. (85) IV. (Comixes.) P 1 Pazer K HP 2 Karne Pharah i^ P 3 t Great T'lisha ,. , K 4 T'bhir K ^ i ' 5tY'thibh K I 4 Geresh K i 1 6 * Shalshe'leth K ^ Double Geresh K 7 t Tiphkha initial K 6 P*sik (between the words) ^^| Connective Accents {Servi), Name. Figure. 1 Munakh K ji 2 Mahpach K < 3 Kadma ji 4 Darga J^ s 5 Little T'lisha K Name. Figure. 6 Mercha ..^..-. ^ t 7 Double Mercha ^^ // 8 Ye'rakh ben-yomo .... ^ V 9 Tiphkha final K V 10 * Mercha with Zarka. . _2i 11 * Mahpach with Zarka _J^ a) Silluk occurs only at the end of a verse before (♦ ) Soph- 86 pasuk, which separates verses. Athnakh (= respiration) usually stands only in the middle of a verse. •» > b) Observe that Pashta (J^) and Kadma (J^) have the same form : they are distinguished by their position, for Pashta (as a separative accent) always stands on the last syllable, whether the tone-syllable is the last or last but one. If the accent is on % % \ the penult, then two Pashtas occur together, ^D3(l- Kadma always stands on the Jirst consonant of a word. c) Y'thibh (i^) and Mahpach (J^) are also distinguished by position only : the former standing always before the first letter of the word, the latter under its vowel. D 3 30 Reading and Orthography. [ch. i. (s^) d) Segolta (^i), Zarka (i^), and the connective T'lisha K'tannah {i^) always stand over the last letter of a word. (Remarks on the Accents. G.) I. As Signs of the Tone. 87 Words that are otherwise identical, are often dis- tinguished by the accent, e.g. ^22 ba-nti {they built), ^^21 bdiiu {in us) ; HDp kdmd {she stood up), 1^21^ kamd {standing up, fern.). So in English to contrast', a contrast : in Greek tl/mi, I am ; elfxi, I shall go. 88 As a rule, the accents accompany the initial conso- nant of the tone-syllable. Some, however, stand only on the first letters of a word {prepositive) ; others only on the last letters (postpositive). The tone- syllable is therefore not discoverable by these. 11. As serving the purpose of punctuation. 89 Every verse is regarded in the figurative language of the Hebrew grammarians as a realm (ditio), go- verned by the gr,eat distinctive, or virtual /w// stop, at the end (imjjerator). According as the empire (i.e. verse) is large or small, varies the number of domini of different grades, which form the larger and smaller divisions. 90 Connectives (Servi) unite only such words as are closely connected in sense, as a noun with an adjec- tive, or with another noun in the genitive, &c. But two connectives cannot be employed together. If several words should be connected, Makkeph is used. 91 In very short verses few connectives are used ; sometimes none : for a small distinctive, in the vici- nity of a greater, has a connective power (servit domino majori). In very long V(;rses, on the con- trary, connectives arc used for the smaller distinc- tives (fnint legati doniinornm). 92 The choice of this or that connective depends on very subtle laws of consecution, with which the 12.] The Accents* 31 learner need not trouble himself at present. It is (9?) sufficient for him to know the greater distinctives, which answer to our period, colon, and comma; though they often stand where even a half comma would scarcely be admissible. They are most im- portant in the poetical books for dividing a verse into its members. Reading Lesson, [In the following Reading Lesson " the names of the different 93 accents contained in it will be found by turning to the Table (85), with which the learner will do well to make himself familiar: otherwise, he will occasionally confound them with the vowels, and, in many instances, be unable to determine whether Shi'va begins or ends a syllable, or whether the mark ( t ) be Kameis or Kamets Khatuph : and for this purpose we shall subjoin a passage in which the greater part of them is found." — Lee.} A. 2 Kings i. 6. nbV 1 t:^'^^ V':t^^ nQJ^'^UJ Vai-yo-m'ru e-lav,ish).^a-lah' ^aTT a- T •• • •" I h'bi^ ^m^^ ^Oiii^lp'? lik-ra-the'-nu, vay-yS'^mer e- UDm ^^^■'^^^? rt3 rbi^ Dmn-n le-nu', I'chu' shu-bhu' el-ham- me'-lech ^sher-sha-lakh' eth- chem',v'dib-bar-tem' e-lav,c6h' 'h^r^n n\r\'^ "IDK I a-mar' Y'h6-vah', h^-mib-b'li' <•: • -:i T : j- t by23. '^''iib nb't ]'2^ tnr)v ^1':'^^ n^nr '••T ' a': ■'• J" •••: v: en-^lo-him' b'is-ra-el' at-tah' sho-leakh lid-rosh' b'bha'-i^al z'bhubh' ^l6-he' i>ek-r6n' ? la- chen' ham-mi^-^ah' *sher-i^a- TVV • • mD/n JliQ"''3 men-nah ci-moth ta-muth Dli^ i li'-tha sham' lo-the-red' mim- 32 Reading and Orthography, [ch. i. § 12. (93) B. ^V^^. T T • •• ; ^'^} •;- T - JiNt ' •••|TT "^^9") ; T Dinri ';!?"^A? '^?'^A! V > V - : Q'«7^?:? xrrhu • IT- ^yi • •:r • : niro-''? T T ]^5 D^^':'^? ^7?-^ ^vm \'^y\ B're-shith' ba-ra "^l5-him' eth hash-sha-ma'-yim v'eth ha- a'-rets: v'ha-a-rets ha-y'tha" th5-hiiva-bh6-hu v'kho'-shech i^al-p'ne' th'hom v'ru'-akh *16- him' m'ra-khe'-pheth i^al-p'ne' ham-ma-yim: vay-y5'-mer ^15- him y'hi or, va-y'hi-6r' : vay- yar" <^l6-him 6th-ha-6r ci-/6bh vay-yabh-del '"lo-hini ben ha-6r u-bhen hii-kho'-shech. Exercise 11. 94 a) Write in English letters the following extract, and mark the tone-syllables — ^Dikb '^^lost^D "'^ 'ivb ^D^p vivb ^^^^-D^<: h'^:^n 'ch ' ••:iv -T : • J' A- : -»• ' <■: t ; \; . - ^..r ''S^ linn ^i h:^i U7];hv iitb iDbbr^o ^::apj? Dfin : V•^^^^■'7^ b'^^rs >r)x:p t^:i o ' VITT T VT|" • T ;'• J" J •< h) AVrite in Hebrew characters the following ex- tract — Vhannakhfish hayah'i?arum mic-col khayyath hassadt5h 'shSr i^asah Y'liuvfih 'lohim : vayyornrr (T'l-haishshah aph ci-amar 'lohim lo" thochl'ii mic-col i^cts haggan ? CH. 2. § 1.] The Definite Article. Chap. II. § 1. The Definite Article, The definite article is H ; its vowel is Pathakh 95 [-^, a) ; and the following consonant receives Dagesh. But since the gutturals and Resh cannot receive 96 Dagesh, a compensation is usually made for its omission by lengthening the vowel of the article into Kamets {^, a) or Long Segol (•• [e —] e or cl). 1) KM.. 2) Hd, ^d, when not tone-syllables. 1) Ud, i)a, when tone-syllahles. 2) Any guttural or Resh, except in the cases already enumerated. Exception'] . If, however, the vowel that follows is 97 not T or t:, words beginning with He or Kheth gene- rally take n for their article : that is, make no com- pensation for the omitted Dagesh. n is used before n is used before a^J 2 ]£}^i^ 4 b]^ 6 • T T Dnn 12 • T :in 14 T nohh 16 i^S)^1 18 Reading Lesson and Vocabulary mt 1 Di^ 3 '?i3!^N^ 7 'pD^n 9 T "in 11 T py 13 nin 15 on 17 1 she'-mesh, <^«e sun. 3 em, mother. 5 re'-gel, foot. 7 esh-col, 2 abh, father. 4 ish, wan (vir). 6 ^al, dew. 8 ba-nim, (in pause) d':';^, d':'^ 19 hunch-of -grapes, sons. 9 he-chal, 10 i^am, temple. people. 11 har, 12 ha-rim, mountain. mountains. 13 i?a-von, 14 khag, guilt. religious feast. 15kh6-akh, 16 kho-the'-meth, thistle. signet. 17 riim, 18 rophe", height. physician. 1 9 i^e'-lem ; i"'a-lem (in pause) , lad. 34 The Perfect and Imperfect of Kal. [ch. 2. Exercise 12. 99 a) Write down the following words^ with their meaning, in English letters — Lhvr\ 11 hJBnn 10 onn 9 V T T •• T T 5) Write down in Hebrew letters — 1 the mother. 2 the father. 3 the dew. 4 the foot. 5 the mountain. 6 the mountains. 7 the guilt. & the people. 9 the man. Chap. II. §2. TJie Perfect and Imperfect of ¥ja\., 100 To enable the pupil to form complete sentences, j I shall here give the two principal tenses of the re- | gular verb in its simplest conjugation; Kal (active). 101 The third singular of the Perfect of Kal is one of ^ the simplest forms of the verb, and is usually con- sidered its root, or stem-form. j Perfect and Imperfect of the verb bll^p, ka-Zal, to kill. \ 102 "Periect (actio perfecta), \ Imperfect {actio in/ecla). (Sin^r.) 1. ^Phm ka-/al'-ti I masc. phlDp ka-Zal'-ta ~| ^" I fem. nb^p ka-/alt' ( j majic. b^p *ka-/ar ^ ^- ] fem. nblDp ka-^lah' ( ' '(Sin^O : bbpi^ gk-/6l' bhpr\ tTk-/ol' (m.) >^ippri tTk-ni' (/•) Vtop^ yTk-/ol (m.) bbppi tik-/6r (/•) § 2.] The Perfect and Imperfect of KaL 35 (Plural.) urbw 2. fern. ]Phl^\> : 'it (Plural.) (102) mk-toY tik-^'lu (m.) ' mbiopn i tik-/ol'-nah (/.) I ^b'\i^\>\ yik-^'iu (m.) 1 m^tOpn i tik-t5l'-nah (/) f Observe that in the Perfect the persons are formed 103 by adding certain suffixes, or affirmatives {ti, tct, &c.) o to the third person or root. a) These suffixes are fragments of the personal 104 pronouns ; ti, td, t, mi are added without any change in the vowels of the root (kdtdl-ii, -ta, -t^ nu). b) Before the suffixes te?n\ ten (both accented), the first vowel of the root [Kamets) is changed into Sh^va {kHdl-iem, -ten'). Before dh, u, the second vowel {Pathakh) is changed into Sh'va, the Kamets being retained. The Imperfect (or, as many Grammarians call it, 105 the Future) is formed hj prefixing certain fragments of the personal pronouns to the radical letters, which are then pointed with Sh^va, and Kholem, nearly always written defectively {k^tdl, bb\)). The prefixes are for the singular (1) e- [K]^ (2) f-, (3) y'-, masc; f-, fem. For the plural, (1) n'-, (2) f-, (3) ?/'-, masc; f-, fem. And the second sing, fern., both second per- sons plural, and the third plural fem. have also a suffix: I (V) for thoii, fem.; u (-1) for ye and they, masc. ; ndh ipl) for ye and they, fem. For the forms ^ that have the vJr^xes i, u, bh\) is shortened into b^p; /**^^ The prefixes of the Imperfect (except NJ) properly io6 take Sh'va; but as two consonants standing together cannot both take vocal Sh^va, the Sh'va of the prefix is changed into Khirek. Aleph properly takes Khateph Segol (i^) ; this is changed into SegoL 36 The Perfect and Imperfect of Kal. [ch. 2. 107 The meaning of the tenses will be explained when we con- sider the verb more regularly. At present the pupil is to ob- serve, that — a) I'he Hebrew Perfect denotes a completed action, and is usually translated by our Perfect, or Perfect definite, or Plu- perfect : made, did make : have made; had made. h) The Imperfect denotes an unfinished action, and is usually translated by the Future; sometimes, especially in general as- sertions, by the Present. Exercise 13. 108 a) Write down in English letters the two following tenses of If^D pakad, to visit (with the English of each person). Perfect (or Preterite), i Imperfect (or Future*). (Sing.) • :'-T ; : T ■7p9 '-T nipD (Plural.) •i:)ipD •npD I thou (ra.) thou (f.) he we ye (m.) ye (f.) they (Sing.) I 7p3n npsri thou (m.) thou (f.) ■^P?! he Tpsn she (Plural.) "fp?? we •nps)n ye (m.) n:ips)ji ye (f.) they (m.) n:iip3n they (f.) b) Write down in Hebrew and English letters the Perfect and Imperfect of ")pti^ shamar, to keep; and ^jn3 cathabh, to irriie. * Gesenius, after the old Grammarians, called it the Future. Dr. Lee calls it the Present ; Ewald and Ilodiger, the Imperfect. §2.] Tlie Perfect arid Imperfect of Kal. 37 Vocabulary. To he angry, 5]^p, ka-tsaph'. To keep, to guard, to watch, ID"^, sha-mar. ~ T To lie down, ^3'^, sha-chabh'. — T A ling, TpU, me'-lech. To reign, "^12, ma-lach'. To cease, to abate, pril^, sha- thak'. To dwell with, p^i^, sha-chan'. To mix, to mingle, TJDD, nia- 5ach'. To pour out, to anoint, "JJDi* na-sach'. To cut off or down, JT13, ca- rath'. To spread, iiTlQ, pa-ras'. To rage (tumultuously), ]1}X^, ra-gash'. Pharaoh, rij^'^B, Par-^^oh. Discretion, counsel (in a bad sense, contrivance), nDTD> T • J m'zim-mah (awd, za-mam, to devise). Over-thee, "TT^W, ^a-le-cha. 109 ' V T Strife, contention, plQ(av), ma-don (dtin, to plead). Wisdom, nODrr M, khSch- mah (kha-cham, to be wise). Cunning, prudence, nD"^J^ (<^), J?or-mah (i^a-ram, to be subtle). Wine, ]'»'', ya-yin. Upon, ^j;, i^al. Zion, y\^:^, Tsiy-yon. Twigs, DvT7t. zal-zal-lira. A fool, bV2, c'sil. Fo%, Jlb^i^, iv-ve'-leth. A covenant, /1*'12> b'ritb. Why? Tit^h, lam'-mah? T X Nations, Gentiles, Ci^, go- yim. Jin^, J1"13> ^fi wa^_ (Aramaean for H- : chiefly in later writers). T T g) 11- (weakened from H-) : — very rare. T h) H-* (unaccented). «) nJI- (in poetry). The names of countries and /ozi^ws are also usually 1 1 4 feminine, and the names of those members that are in pairs (as the hands, eyes, ears, &c.). Proper names are not distinguished by any peculiar 115 endings to mark the sex. Some feminines are formed from the corresponding masculines by appending a feminine termination ; but in the case of animals, the two sexes often have a peculiar name (as bull, cow in English) ; and many names of animals denote both sexes, as /'Dil camel, &c. Even some names of ani- ' T T ^ mals with feminine terminations denote the male as well as the female : e. g. H^i^ (yonah), dove. The adjective, when used attributively, follows its 116 substantive. If the substantive has the article, so has the attributive adjective. An adjective without the article following a substantive with one, is the predicate, the copida [is, ivas, &c.) being omitted. So in Greek — 7} yvvt) r) KaXr], the beautiful woman. 117 rj yvvri Koki], the woman is beautiful. Feminine nouns, both such substantives as have lis corresponding feminine forms, and adjectives, are usually formed by adding H-^ sometimes D_i, to the masculine. a) Masculines in H- form their feminine by chang- 119 ing H- into H-. tl^\ H^") (ro-j/eh, ro-i^ah). e2 " 40 Gender of Substantives. Adjectives, [ch. 3. (119) b) Those that end in Kheth or Ayin take the fern, in ri-l (instead of /l--^). 120 The changes made in the vocalisation by appending the terminations cannot be explained at present: only observe — 1) a in the penult is changed into Sh'va when pf- is added : bnD, rhl^ (gadol, g'dolah). 2) The fern, from a noun with the vowels e'-e, takes a-a, ^'^D. r\'7hl2 (me'-lech, mal-cah) : the reason is, that the original form of (e. g.) ^]^p was 'piOp (with Pathakh). Vocabulary. 121 King, Tjjpp, me'-lech. Small, pp, ka-^an'. TOtOp, k'2, ma-shal. - T A youth, lad, 1^*J, na'-)?ar. Good, 2^tO, ^obh. Father, 2i^, abh. T Man, t^^y ish. Brother, ^^<, akh. T Strong, "I'lBil. gib-bor. Sharp, in khad. niT], khad-dah (/.). Diligent, ynil*, kha-ruts. n:inn, kh»r{i-zah (/.). ■•■ ~: Sincere, honest, QJ^ (i?), tam. ^ {bright) spot on the skin, rr\13., ba-he'-rgth. 01^ Dp? ut^-'^^ White, ]2b, la-ban. H^nb, I'ba-nahV-). ■Boy, lb\ ye'-led; GiW, n"lb\ yal-dah (ya-lad, fo beget). Red, Dili*. Dlhi, a-dom. T T Korse, D^D. *iis ; Mare, HDID) 5u-sah. T r]^3''^, sac-cin. A knif€\ rhhm (« oj), ma- 1 L "che'-leth. To cut, 1]^, ga-zar. -T I To grow, '?lil, ga-drd. I "-^ : Scholar, Tt^bni"), trd-mid. nTDbr>, tVd-mi-dah (/.). To slaughter, 1011'*^, sha-kha^ Properly sharpened, fr. Y"l^- §2.] Formation of the Plural, (Eng.) The boy is good. .TT u X j(0 The boy he good, (neD.j|^.2) The boy good. He K?in, hu". She KM, hi^ Exercise 15. 41 122 ")i2^ Kin ni!^r\ 4 : ]pr T T ""T ' T 't V V T T : nib;^ 11 OTT in r?^ 10 1 hay-ye'-led hu" ka-tan. 2 han-na-i^ar hu" tbhh. 3 ha-abh hu" zaken. 4 ha-akh hu" gib-bor. 5 ha-ish tam. 6 hab-ba-he'-reth Tba-nah. 7 ye'-led ka-^an. 8 hay-ye'-led hak-ka-/an. 9 hay-ye'-led ka-^an. 10 sac-cin khad yig-z5r. 11 yal-dah k'/an-nah tig-dal. 12 tal-mi-dah kh»ru- tsah til-mad. 13 raa-'^che'-leth khad-dah tish-kha^. 123 b) 1. The little girl will mix wine. 2. The red wine. 3. The wine is red. 4. The knife is sharp. 5. They grew. 6. Ye {pi) will grow. 7. The diligent scholar. 8. The scholar is diligent. Chap. III. § 2. Formation of the Plural. A. Masculine nouns form their plural by adding D^-^ 124 {tm') to the singular f. a) Nouns in H- [eh) throw away this termina- tion before the D^- is appended. * The Imperfect of an intransitive verb has usually Pathakh for its second vowel, instead of Kholem, in its dissyllabic forms. t The plural termination is sometimes written defectively, as in Gen i. 21 : □J'^JFI {tan-ni-nim). E 3 42 Formation of the Plural. [cii. 3. 125 B. Feminine nouns form their plural by adding JIT {6th) to the singular. a) If the singular ends in dth, eth, ah (Jl- Jl_, H-), these terminations are changed into n') {oil). h) If the singular ends in ith {D\), the plural ends in iy-yoth {TS^\), c) If the singular ends in lith (Dl), the plural ends in uy-yoth (JlV-). 12G Singular. I Plural, a) rm^\ D"'^l^Q Examples. Meaning. |' Singular. /1"I^J^ nr\m r\^2b^ niobrj horse double, second well hymn (of praise) letter ring Hebrewess s\:is mish-neh b'er t'hillah ig-ge'-reth ^ab-ba-i^ath Plural. sus-im mish-nim b'e-roth t'hil-loth ig-g'roth /ab-ba-i^6th ;i>ibh-rlth Iribh-riy-yoth kingdom { mal-chiith mal-chuy- yoth 127 The addition of the plural terminations causes cer- tain changes of such vowels as are mutable; of which the following principal changes will be sufficient for the pupil at present. a) a or e oi the penult (whether long or short [t, -, ", or v]) is usually changed into simple Sh\'a, or, after a guttural, into Khateph Pathakh (-:), when the word becomes a trisyllable. This arises from the transfer of the accent to the final sylhible, which causes the antepenult to be pronounced short. §2.] Formation of the Plural, 43 b) a or e [- ov •••) in the final syllable of a word is (i27) changed into d (t). He„ce(by„,.)wehave{l:??S,.|;;;|}j- (Nouns of these forms are of very frequent occurrence. Observe that their plurals are alike.) c) So nouns ending in ''-, from verbs Lamed He, change Khirek into Kamets, and end in d-yim [pHiypHd-yim). d) Feminines with e short {-) in the penult, change it into d (t) in the plural. (In other respects the feminine undergoes little change in the formation of the plural, because the necessary vowel changes have already been made on appending the femi- nine termination.) e) Nouns in d'-veth, a-yith [Pi}-, J^y, contract these syllables into (Jn% Dy 6th, eth, before appending the plural termination im. f) Nouns defective from verbs with double Ayin, dagesh the final consonant before im is added, and shorten the preceding vowel ; changing d, e, into a, e, u respectively. 1^^ g) Vowels that have their homogeneous vowel-letter quiescent, are amongst those that are immutable, and therefore remain in the plural : e. g. a, e, i, 6, it Examples. Masculine. ingular . 1 Plural. Meaning. Singular. Plural. lyi Dnn^ word 1 da-bhar d'bharim uhn D^DDn 1 wise kha-cham kh*cha-mim pi; D^JDu!^ neighbour sha-chen sh'che-nim '^^ Uh'^V sluggard i^a-tsel i^nse-lim ^i^. ! 2'?^^?. a cluster of j grapes re-nabh i^^na-bhim 128 44 Formation of the Plural. [cil. .3. (128) Singular. Plural. Meaning. king Singular. mg'-l6ch Plural, m'la-china '^y) Dny^ lad na-;Dar n'))a-rim r)'2 • T house ba-yith ba-tim Ai D^ri\r olive za'-yith ze-thim r)bD*{ay) w^^^bD inn ma-16n m'16-nim ' • T shield tooth ma-gen shen ma-gin- nim** shin-na'-yim rycd) DMy goat rez i?iz-zim n^ (h) D''n3 a kid g'di g'da-yim ... . . Q''?^? double, second Feminine. mish-nSh mish-nim justice handmaid ts'da-khah shiph-khah ts'da-koth (righteous acts) sh'pha-khoth n^TII(c^y) ri^^i; i counsel l>e-tsah :i^e-ts6th -n^i^;^. 1 crown V^-te-T^th. i?«- ga-nan, to cover. H li^ll), sha-ar, to remain. §2.] Formation of the Plural. ii\i^ \ father abh ^^^m) name shetn ni^ip voice kol D^^p word mil-lah U'^V \ dove yo-nah 45 a-bhoth 130 she-moth ko-loth mil-lim yo-nim Some nouns have both a masculine and feminine 131 termination in the plural, as — J1J[^ I U^r}V, n\P\V II i^^^ II ^eth irit-tim, i^it-toth. In adjectives and participles the plural endings im and Sth are 132 confined to the masculine and feminine genders respectively. D^JliD <6-bhim (boni), good (masc.) : JlOilO ^6-bh6th (bonge), good (fem.). So in substantives from the same stem, when the terminations 133 denote the different sexes: D**^^ ba-mm^ sons; JliJ3, ba-noth, • T T daughters. Exercise 16. Write down in Hebrew and English letters, the plural (with and without the definite article) of the folloAvino; nouns — A way. r]h de'-rech. A fool, bV3 c'-sil. 134 A child. ^: ye'-led. A tongue, ]Wb la-shon. A lie, nti ca-zabh. A garment, tibrpv sim-lah. A fool. b2i T T na-bhal. A lamb. "^?? ce'-bhes. A vineyard, A part, ce'-rem. khe'-lek. People, \ nation, J D:;(d) ram. A proverb, A cluster \ of grapes, / T T T •* ma-shal. re-nabh. A thresh- "i old, step \ before a door. S]P(d) saph. A hypocrite. p]:rT kha-neph. A bear. n^(d) dobh. ^5'°7 \ -):^]l} she--char. drink, j 'fir ,, I a cell A nest, X ^-,^(j^ ^^^^ 46 Participles of KaL [ch. 3. Chap. III. § 3. Participles of Kal with iheir femi- nine and. plural forms, 135 The verb in Kal has two participles : one active, in o-e ; another passive, in d-u-. as ko-ttl, kCi-tuL 136 Their forms for gender and number are (to take the participles of kd-tdl as examples) — Active. Sing. b:gp rhhp (or nb:!;ip) ^o-m ko-^r-Mh Plur. U^bigp JI'i^ZOp ko-flim ko-/'i6th Passive. Sing. ^!):OiJ nb^tDp ka-
    sho-phe^ Light, luminary, 'liXDt ma-or, T pl niKD, m'o-roth. To surround, ^^D (d), 5a- bbabh. Garden, ]21 (d), gan. b^^D or b^i2, mo-shcl, ruling; ruler. § 3.] Participles of Kal. Exercise 16. D^D^Dn 2 :^b?> i2'^r\ i T - : • • T - . - . - ^ _ "inijn 12 :ibp "i^h^^rr n T T - 't T - D^st^ 15 :nDS;'D^^-nn D^^^j 16 :nTT Dnri 47 1 ham-me'-lech yim-l5ch. 140 2 hara-m'la-chim. 3 ham- mal-cah thim-loch. 4 ham- mo-shel yim-shol. 5 ham-mo- she'-leth tim-shol. 6 hara- mo-sh'lim yim-sh'lu. 7 hash- sho-ph'/im yish-ph'^u. 8 hal- la-bhi" yi/-r6ph. 9 ham-ma-6r' >^ hag-ga-dol'. 10 hara-m'o-roth' hag-g'do-lim. 11 ham-ma-6r' ka-^on'. 1 2 han-na-har' lia5- s5-bhebh hag-gan'. 13 y'la- dim k^an-nim yig-d'lu. 14 tal-mi-dim Jdi^-mts-tsim yil-m'du. 15 sac-ci-nim khad- dirii yig-z'ru. 16 na-shim tam-moth. , /*w-,/i^- a) 1. Write down the plural of — "1p3, ba-kar, herd; oxen. ^\^}^ she'-kel, shekel. 141 "inj na-har, river: pi. both ■^ ■*■ im and 6th. ]| gan (d), a garden. b) Translate into Hebrew (using both Hebrew and English letters) — 1. The sharp knives will cut. 2. The gardens are small. 3. The small gardens. 4. The shields are large. 4. The knife is sharp. 5. The knives are sharp. 6. The rulers. c) Write down the Perfect, Imperfect, and the two participles with /em. s. and /*/?^t^n8 ':^n^^ D^^j-n7 ^ {;!«"! •^''^'Jff?;. •-• - t: .- : -t 8 hashshinnayim co^bhoth. imJD\) D;D?n9 :ni3^,i3 9 haccappayim k7ann6tb. D"'9Kn"ll :Jli^"l D''T^n"lO 10 haO^enayim ra)^6th. "^ ^ ' .\^. j ] 1 haappa yim g'doloth. O^^^P?'!? ^2 :Jni7l21 I 12 hammichnasayim sh'kho- DTO^DH 13 :nnnii^ ^^^^- 13 bammelkakhayim ■~ ■^:" " . -L. • I g'doloth. 14 ha^hshamayim 6) 1. The knees. 2. The evil eyes. 3. The evil eye. 4. The eyes are evil. 5. Black breeches. 6. Weak hands. * For C)^^^ fr. ?)ihJ. t From r\pb, to take hold of. 50 The Comtruct State. [ch. 3. Chap. III. §5. The Construct State {Status constructus). 149 When one substantive modifies another without being in apposition to it, it is placed in the relation of a genitive case. In Hebrew, the genitive case of a substantive is like the nominative, but the substantive it modifies (the governing substantive, as we should call it in most other languages) undergoes some change of its mutable vowels. 150 ^^W The governing substantive is said to be in construction, or in the construct state. 151 The general rules for the change of vocalization produced by the construct state are these : — A. In the singular. 152 a) Kamets [a) in the penultima is changed into SUva ; in the ultima, mostly into Pathakh. b) Tsere (e) in the jjenultima is mostly changed into Sh'^va when the ultima has Kamets [a). In the ultima it is generally changed into Pathakh, but usually retained after -, and in monosyllables. c) The feminine termination PT- [ah) is changed into D- [citJi) : the other feminine terminations r\-, n^-, Jll, Jli [eth, ith, uth, 6th) are immutable. B. In the plural and dual. d) D^-, D^- (im,ayim) are changed into ''- (e). 153 There is often a further vowel-change in the con- struct state of the plural, and a contraction of a semi-syllable (with Sh'va) with the following syllable. 154 Two very common forms of verbal derivatives re- quire particular attention : those in -^^-^ (da-bliar), and [segolates) in ^ _*_ (mo'-lOch). Their chani^es are given in the following Table : — §3-] The Construct State. 51 Singular. Absolute. T T dabhar # me'lech Construct. d'bhar me'lech Plural. (154) Absolute. Dnnn d'bharim • T : m'lachim Construct. dibhre malche Dissyllable feminines in H- which have a mutable 155 Kamefs or Tsere in the penult, change that vowel into Sh'va by the general rule (153), and take the termi- nation dth {r\-). In trisyllables of this kind with initial Sh'va, there is a contraction of 1 a into one syllable in z; as ts'dd-kdh, construct tsid-kath : pi. ts^dd-koth, construct tsid-koth *. The complement ■\ of an adjective or participle also 156 causes the governing ^Ld^eciiwQ or participle to assume the construct state. Thus, in such combinations as would express in Hebrew, ' the pure in hearty ' void of understanding ^ ^fearing the Lord.^ lD^r2 («y) T Tn\r\ to-rah T 121 dabhar T T JlJpS pe'-leg i;^l de'rech 1}; )?ed (V) T ; — ■■■" l'?")1 med ^meth ma- veth brooks of waters. {the) way ] ^f ways |^^«^^- awitness of truth. * Compare this with tt'itttu), yiyvonai, which arise from irs- TTS-TU}, yt-yk-vojiai. t i. e. a substantive that is connected with it objectively, to complete its notion. X D^D only in plural from obsol. ''?2- In constr. '»Q. f2 52 The Construct State. [CH. 3. 157) gEden, py, i>e'den. Flute, organ, 2^')]^, X^ugabh. Jubal, b2V, Y^bhra. T Wilderness, *)21"ID ("), niTd- bar. Judah, rmn\ Y'hudah. Hair, -)^';ir, se^ar. Esau, 'i]^^^, ))esav. Palace, temple, /DTI, hechal. Sanctuary, ti^lpQ (a), mik- dash. Brother, Pli^. akh. T Side, "JTT, yarech (Ht. thigh). Altar, n3.\0li»), mTzbeakh. Shoulder, Pl/lS (constr. P)ri3), catheph. Vocabulary. i Blessing, H3*13, (w), b'rachah. T T ; A dish, rn\;p{i»), k'rarah. Silver, P)D3. ce'seph. Cave, nn^-^p* («wv), m';i?arah. Machpelah,' rhiHyZ, Mach- pelah. Corpse, n73Jt(w), n'bhelah. Fear, n"li-3^ («<^)> m'gorah. T FFtcA-ec?, _j;t^n, rashal?. T T Jeremiah, ^r\'^'Q'y, Yirm'yahii. T ; ;• Old, ]pT, zaken. 1 The elders, D"'JpT, z'kenim. j City, -)>;i;, rir. House, /1^2l. bayith(cs/r.Jl>3,). Court, 12in. khatser. t bll nabhiil, to fall oj. §5.] The Consbmct State. 53 Exercise 18. n3")n 12 :b"Tjj Jiippn"^'! 1 n'har i^eden. 2 d'bhar IGO Y*hovah. 3 musar Y'hovah. 4 rugabh Yubhal^ 5 mid- bar Y'hudab. 6 I'bhabh ish. 7 s'i^ar i-^esav. 8 hechal hammikdash. 9 esheth heakh. 10 ye'rech hammiz- beakh. 11 khochmath adam. 12 bircath Y'hovah. 13 ka- i^^rath ce'seph. 14 m'i^arath hammachpelah. 15 nibhlath ish. 16 tsidkath adam. 17 dibhre Yirm'yahu. 18 Eah^re i^e'den. 19 mu- sare heabhoth. 20 zikne hal^ir. 21 sh'chene habbayith *. 22 kh^tsere hammikdash. 23 birce haish. h) 1. Rivers. 2. Rivers of the earth. 3. Words. 4. The words of the king. 5. The law of Jehovah. 6. The knees of a man. 7. The eyes of Esau. Chap. IV. § 1. Suffixes denoting Possession. The Hebrew language possesses a very peculiar ]6i way of denoting the possessive pronoun^ which is this : — a) Short suffixes (which are abridged forms of the personal pronouns) are attached to nouns in their construct state, with which they cohere so firmly, that the noun with its suffix forms a single word. h) From the frequent occurrence of these forms, and the changes of vocahzation which they sometimes occasion, they may be considered as belonging to the declension of Hebrew * a for a, from the effect (to be explained hereafter) oi pause. f3 54 Suffixes denoting Possession. [ch. 4. 162 The possessive suffixes in their most usual form are : — I. For Singular Nouns. m. f. I ^ i — cha ech ahh II. For Plural Nouns. My m. /. Thy ny ^T. His-her i T My •». Thy T7 '^:- His-her V- T T V /. /. Our :i:j na Your DD P chem ch?n Their D_ ]_ am an ai e-cha ayich av e-ha; Our IT I e-nd Your DD**- p'^-'e-chSme-chSn Their U'r\''- ]n"'-e-hem e-hen 163 The suffixes are divided into grave (or accented) suffixes (chem, chen\ hem , hen) ; and light (or un- accented) suffixes. 164 Masculine Noun. Singular. D^D sviS, a horse. >D^D s\\.-s\, my horse. TTp?]^ 5u-5'cha, thy horse. thy (f.) horse. 'iDID st-so, his horse. tlV^V sH-sahh, her horse. T > •l^D^D sii-se-nu, our horse. DDD^D «ii-«'chem', ■•■ • your horse. IpDID *D1D svL-ssd, my horses. > ^"^D^D 5U-se-cha, thy ' '!J^D1D su-5a-yich, thy (f.) horses. VD^D su.-sa.v, his horses. T :> rT'p-lD 5u-se-ha, "^ '■' her horses. > •')^''D1D su-se'-nu, our horses. DD^D-ID su-se-chem', " ■* your horses. ]yV^D «u-5e-chen', "■" " your (f.) horses. DrT'D^D su-5e-hem', " " their horses. jn'^D^D su-se-hen', ■' " their (f.) horses. Plural. JliD^D su-s6th, mares. Tl^D^D su-56-thai, my mares. > ^"'JliDID su-56-the-cha, thy mares. > ^"•/liD-ID 5u-s6-tha'-yich, thy (f.) mares. V^]^D^D 5u-s6-tliav, "^ his mares. HTliD^D su-s6-the-ha, "^ *■* her mares. ^Tr\')D)D sn-so'ihe'-nu, our mares. Uyiy\D)D su-56-the-chem', " " your mares. ]yr)mv su-56-the-chen', " " your (f.) mares. UT^'^J1^D^D ^u-^o-the-hem', " " their mares. ]n''JniD^D 5u-56-the-hen', ' " their (f.) mares. 165 The changes in the form of the plural suflEixes arise from the 166 blending of >- (e), the termination of the construct state, with the proper suffixes. a) Nouns in eh (H-) throw away eh, and for 6, 167 his, have e-hu pil-) : as jra-le-hu, his leaf (IH^^^). b) Nouns in i with Yod quiescent (^-), from verbs in ah (Lamed He), sound the Fo^ before a suffix with initial vowel : as HD, p'ri^ fruit ; V"]9, pir-yo, his fruit. c) The plural termination 6th [li)) takes e (y after it to support its suffixes. 56 Suffixes denoting Possession. [ch. 4. [Additional Remarks on the Suffixes [G.] *). 168 I. pers. d'nu- Oi_) is sometimes found (for e-nw) in pause. T II. pers. -chdh is found, rarely, and chiefly with short words, for 'chd (HD- for ?T_). (fern, sing.) dch sometimes, but only in pause, for ech q_for^_). e-cheh for ech (Nah. 2, 14), (HD- for •?[_). e'-cAe is found now and then, but only in later writers (e. g. Ps. cxxxvii. 0), 02— for "iJ). III. pers. 1) sine/, m. ho (sometimes), e-hu (rarely), for 6 (n, ^n_ for i). 2) /em. 5m^. H- for H- (sometimes) : i.e. h loses its T T guttural pronunciation f . , 3) pZwr. a'^am;^ for dm (On_ for D_). * - r T d'-wio, only in poetry, for am§ (iQ_ for D_). T T /em.) 'Aera' but rarely, with a consonant preceding, and the tone (e. g. Gen. xxi. 28, Vbhdd-d'hl^n in^a"?). 'jv :-: a-h'ndh antique (n^H—) for an. a'-k'nah, e-ndh, both a few times for an dlJil— , H^-)- T : I - T I V * These are only placed here for future reference. t In later writers even written K— , T I In pause cul-ld'-hdm (Qil'^B), 2 Sam. xxiii. 6. § Occasionally in very small words (as prepositions) for (his) : e. g. )r2b for Sb- '•] Suffixes denoting Possession. 57 T T T T T T rmi T T Examples. TTQ^ da-m'cha, /% (m.) blood. r '''nii'^ d'bha-ri, wiy word. I "'"^H'l d'bha-rai, my words. ^bv^''^ shu-i\a-16, his fox. T f ^Jpt z'ke-nech, thy (f.) oZc? man. ' ^^Jpf z'ke-ne-cha, ^/(y (m.) oZc? men. ! ^^^JpT z'ke-ne-nu, o? ^, ,^ , , , . b) dissyllables with e ^7!2, me -lech (penacute). (It will be sufficient to give one example of a grave and one 171 of a light suffix.) 58 (in) a) Sing. Plur. h) Sing. Plur. a) Sing. Plur. b) Sing. Plur. Suffixes denoting Possession. Light suffix. — T ; d'bhfiri d'bharai malchi m'lachai Absolute. Construct. ^yi ^^1 nn-^T *? ilk 'ii'^ da'bhar d'bhar d'bharim dibhre me'lech * me'lech m'lachim malche [CH. 4. Grave suffix. °?'?^'? d'bharchem' dTbhrechSm' malc'chem' malcech^m' Vocabulary. 172 Way, ^y], de'rech. Pleasantness, Q^j, noi)am. Thou, nnj*, attah. T ~ Glory, "Tins? cabhod. T Back, 2^ 0'), gabh (cv Lat. gibbusF). Palace, 1 Temple,p?V' ^^^^^^l' Each {one),j ^^^^ A sack, nnryOi^, amta- khath. Commandment, TlTjit2 {a), imts- T ; • vah. Statute, npn, khukkah. Law, n")iD («), torah. To Aree;?, "ID'yir, shamar. ~ T A rite, "^f^l^l^ («)> mishmar. T ; • To open, nJlD. pathakh. - T To plough, ^"IHj kharash. Mountain, ")n, bar. T Silver, 1 ^ Tongue, ]Wb, lashon. Dog, n/3» ce'lebh. Weight, bptt2 («), mishkal. Song, "T*^, shir. To put on (fl dress) or 6e clothed ivith, ]^2b, labbash (/«^ - T yilbasb) . Priest, ^riS, cohen. Testimony, 111^. i'edah. * The S' (^) to be pronounced with the obtuse a sound of e in m^rc, or e in i^ere. §1-J Suffixes denoting Possession. 59 Exercise 19. - ,. . _ ^ „ ^ . "iDi:^'' 6 - ' \ - : • 1 darco shamarti. 2 d'racheha 173 darche-noi?ara. 3 attah Y'ho- vah c'bhodi. 4 hechal kod- sh'cha. 5 path'khii ish amtakhto. 6 yishmor mish- marti, mitsvothai, khukkothai, •••'/inri'l ! v'tliorothai. 7 i*al-gabbi kha- * D^^"ir7 I r'shu khor'shim. 8 coh^necha yilb'shu tse'dek. 9 yishm'ru bhanecha bh'rithi. 1 gam- b'nehem yishmfru i^edothi. b) 1. Write down in Roman characters, and give the English of — nO"1^ 15 nS-Tl 14 QOni 13 >3-|n 12 D3T^ 11 Tv:- t;- 't: •;- t;- 2. Translate into Hebrew — 1. The mountain of his holiness. 2. Thy ("»•) ways have we kept. 3. We will keep the ways of Jehovah. 4. Our sacks. 5. Your (m.) money. 6. Its {m.) weight. 7. Our money. 8. The tongue of thy dogs. 9. Your (m.) songs. My silver. His silver. Their silver. Your (m.) silver. Thy (/.) silver. Their (m.) silver. Our silver. Dogs. The king's dogs. My dog. My dogs. Their dogs. Your (/.) dogs. His dog. Her dosfs. Proverbs. The pro- verbs of Solomon f. Her proverb. His proverb. My proverb. My proverbs. Their proverbs. Your (/.) proverbs. * ^lin, kho-resh (partcp. act. of kha-rash=), one who ploughs, a plougher. 60- Relations of Case. [ch. 4. Chap. IV. § 2. Prepositions denoting the Relations of Case. 174 Dative] a) The relation of the dative case is expressed by the preposition 7 prefixed to a noun, and co- hering with it. b) Sometimes the preposition 1^, el (of which 7 is an abbreviation), is used : D'lll^^ 7i<, (el- Abhram). 175 Accusative] The accusative is either — a) like the nominative, and therefore to be known (as in English) only by the structure of the sentence ; b) denoted by (J^^J or "JIN^) eth or eth- (with Makkeph) : before suffixes also jniK, 6th. These prepositions are not used before the ace, unless the noun is defined either (1) by the article, (2) or by being in construct state, or (3j by a suffix, or (4) from being a proper name. c) The ace. of the place towards which motion is directed, has often its original termination 11- (which sometimes denotes the place lohere). The preposition 1 is also sometimes prefixed to it. d) The accusative alone sometimes denotes in Hebrew both the place whither, and the place where. e) The person to whom motion is directed has usually the preposition b"^ [cl) prefixed, as the place ivhither sometimes has. /) Both the time when and the time how long are also denoted by the accusative ; which also denotes relations of space (how wide, how deep^ &c.) and other adverbial relations : e. g. such § 2.] Relations of Case. 61 as are expressed in English by as to; in respect (i75) of; according to ; in. (See remarks on the use of 3 in the next §.) Ablative Relation] 176 a) The ablative relation is generally denoted by ]D, from [of — some of; ex], which, however, is usually abridged, either into D with a compen- sating DagesTi in the initial consonant of the word ; or, if this is incapable of receiving T>a- gesh (i. e. is a guttural or Resh), into D? *^^^- But Q may stand before H = as ]^T\t2 (Gen. xiv. 23). h) The ]Q is seldom written at length as a separate word, except before the article. c) The relations denoted by in, at, ivith, are also expressed by the prepositional prefix 2. Expression of genitive relations by ?]. The relations 177 of belonging to or being possessed by, proceeding from, and the like, are sometimes expressed by the pre- positional prefix (of the dative) 7. This occurs par- ticularly 1) after an indefinite governing noun, when its indefiniteness is to be marked ; 2) after a noun in the construct state which has already one dependent genitive ; 3) when the governing noun has an adjective with it; 4) after specifications of number. The p denoting possession is also sometimes pre- 178 ceded by the relative pronoun ■^^^5, which. Thus : ^''^^^7 '^^^^ "[i^^i^^n, hatstson *sher I'abhiah \_grex qui patri ejus: sc. erat'], (lit. the flock which [was] to her father =) her father's flock. With respect to the pointing of b', V, a) Their regular Sh'va is changed into Khirek, when 179 the initial consonant of the vowel to which they are prefixed has Sh'va. G 62 Relations of Case, [ch. 4. (179) b) Before an initial vowel with a Khateph, they take the vowel with which the Khateph is com- pounded. c) Before monosyllables or penacute * dissyllables they (as Vav also does) often take Kamets. d) Before the article, they usually displace it, and take its pointing. e) Before D^'i/^^ they take Tsere (the J^ becoming quiescent); and before TV\TV, Pa/AaM; because the Jews did not pronounce this sacred name, but that of ^^I'J^ instead ; to indicate which they grave to its prefixes the Pathakh which the prefix of Adonai would have. 180 Rule c does not always hold (rood. These prefixes take Kamets (1) before infinitives of the above-mentioned form (except before the genitive) ; (2) before many pronominal forms, and (3) when the word is so closely connected with what precedes, as to be disconnected from what follows. 181 T V T T T T Examples. I'da-vid, to David. eth ha-a-rets, the earth. eth=ha-ra-ki'-a^, the expanse. ne-tse" has-sa-deh, let us go out into the field. beth a-bhi-cha, in the house of thy father. ba-bhe'-lah, to Babylon (some-1 times : in Babylon). I T^ localis ha-ha-rah, to the mountain. f (local He). be-thah yo-seph, into Joseph'' s house (where obs. that it follows a noun in Stat, constr.). it-sh'o'-lah, to Sheol. hay-yom, {the =) this day : to-day. i^c'-rcbh, at evening. *■ i. e. those that are Milel; i. e. have the accent on the penult. §2.] ' V T T ' V T T Relatio7is of Case. 63 she'-sheth ya-mim, {during) six days. hac-cis-se", in respect of the throne, peh e-khad, with one mouth. min ha-a'-rets, from the earth, mits-ts'bha, out of the host. me-kha-zak, from the powerful. ben I'yi-shai, a son of Jesse's. khel-kath has-sa-deh Tbho-i^az, a portion of the field of Boaz. ben e-khad la-*khime'-lech, one of the sons of Ahimelech. ba-kh^mish-shah la-kho-desh, on the fifth of the month. bam-mish-pa^, in the judgement (=b'ham- mish-paO- lam-me'-lech, to the king. la-a-rets, to the earth. ba-a -rets, in the earth. (iSl Vocabulary. To create, N'lB, bara *. TT Heavens, D''D*i^j sharaa'yimf. • - T To love, ^^^^, ahabh. - T Dainty meats, \ D^tOD(«),nia^ T^ • -• ( i^am, a, (ta- Dainties, j ^^^^ to taste.) Stone, ]2i^, e'bhen. Place, DipQ (av), makom. Master,! 182 Lord, Jli-'?(-).ad6nt. To collect, gather, D^3> canas. Camel, te^), (but pLW^^^t^-i), gamal. No, X>i^, en. Men (pi), D>^Ji^, "nashim. There, Qti^, sham. Grave, 13p, ke'bher. * Verbs that end in a (^) take t for their second vowel, t A noun of the dual form : no singular in use. X Dun, to govern : others say, aden, a base. g2 64 Relatioiis of Case. [CH (182) Simple, ^JlB, pethi, /jZ. DtTUD or D''^^DD. p'thayim or p'tha-im. Garlandyl Crown, J ri- ■' Grace, "j Head, lf}i^n, rosh. Mother, QJ^, em. Eternity, nb''^y, r6lam*. T ' T : • T •• Mercy, 1Dr7> khS'sed. > _ Par^, piece, ITU, gS'zSr (ga- zar, to cut). To cut, to divide, "1121, gazar. 'Sea, □•», yam. yam-s^ph: of Inheritance, rwH^^ nakh'lah" T-:i- (nakhal, to acquire, Sfc). Rebecca. Jacob. {Sea, □>, yam. Red Sea, V^^O'D^ = sea of weed. 183 a) Exercise 20. bara eth hash- shamayim (jo). 2 Yitskhak ahabh eth i.>esav. 3 Ribhkah nath'nah eth-hamma/i"*am- mim. 4 Ya:?*kobh lakakh meabhne hammakom. >^D5D np':' \\V'b^ 5 i 5 ^^^^^'^'^^ 1^^^^^ migg^malle •• - : ' ""^ ■•■ ■•• ■ ■•■•• "donav. 6 en ish mean'she ^?^?^? ^^^ r>? 6 =V5^^^ ; ^^.,^,^,^, ^,.^^^ , ^-,-, D'^?^. ^.^'^^ ^ • °^ '^^'^'i? I ■'bhanim I'kibhro. 8 nathan D^'i^JlD'p 10^ ^ • "^"^^P^ i ITphthfiim rSrmah. 9 torath ?[DN^ '/Tlin 9 : HD")!^ I imm'cha livyath khen I'ro- §J)-f)n 10 :'?Jl^i^")'7 ]n mb ' shecha(j9). 1 hodii layhovah, * L'i^o-lam =in SiTCula steculorum {for ever). t 'lohini takes a singular verb. X For D^?3l^n, froni its being in pause (i. e. at the close of the sentence), the effects of which will be explained in the chapter on the regular verb. It will be indicated by {p). § Give ye thanks (an Imperative). >J 2.] Relations of Case, 65 d7^)h ^3 *nVtD""'3 T^'iT^'h \ cUohh, ci l'i>61am khasdo. (i83) 11 hodu Pgozer yam*uph ITgzarim. 12 nathan artsam i'nach^lah. 6) The heavens of Jehovah. 2. From the heavens of Je- hovah. 3. For thy (m.) dog. 4. For thy dogs. 5. I loved Rebecca. 6. From the place. 7. For the place. 8. For the camels. 9. Stones. 10. The stones. 11. He took stones of the field. 12. He took stones of thy field. 13. He took of the stones of my field. Chap. IV. §3. Other prepositional Prefixes. Vav. 1. C (3) is a prepositional prefix meaning like, 184 as, according to f. (The rules for its pointing are the same as for ^, ^, 179). V 0) is and; its usual pointing is Sh'va, 185 But v' («) becomes u (-1) before labials (Beth, Pe, 186 Vav, Mem) and words whose initial consonant has Sh'va. b) Before monosyllables^ penacutes, Elohim, and Y'hovah, v' follows the same rule as l\ b' (b, 21), 179. When two events are connected, the second, which 187 denotes the further continuation and progress of the events narrated, is usually expressed by the Im- perfect with Vav, then called Vav consecutive. This Imperfect will be construed by the English Peyfect, when the preceding Perfect is so construed. (See more under the account of the Tenses.) Sometimes, when there is a connexion with an 188 earlier event, the narrative, or a section of it, begins with an Imperfect with Vav consecutive : this is very * Supply the copula, 'it is.' f From ]3. 66 Other Prepositional Prefixes. Vav. [ch. 4. (l8s) commonly the case with "•iljl, va-y^hi (/cai lyiv^ro), and it was {so) ; and it came to pass. 189 Vav consecutive takes Pathakh with strong Dagesh in the next consonant. Before h^ (which is incapable of receiving the Dagesh) Kamets is used. 190 A Perfect that follows an Imperfect (in the sense of a Future) is also changed by a Vav prefixed into the meaning of a Future, and must be construed by that tense in EngUsh. This Vav conversive is pointed like the simple copulative Vav. (See 185^ 186.) Vocabulary. 191 Brother, Hi^? akh (irreg. with i Dainty meat, DyZD(2> ma/J?am. T i T ; - suffixes TFJ^)- I Also, DD. gam. Choice thmgs,^^^:^^^^^ mig- ! ^read, Dn9. IS'khem. FaMZ.., /dan6th*. | S^^V^^^, .%^ard . ':,^i;r. i>a- eshetb, constr.). Under- garment, Garment, D2'r\3; cutto'neth (absoL). rJlJDS, c'thoneth (nearly ahvay s con- struct). Gleaning, I0p7» le'kS/. Distressed,') Needy, f •< Stranger, "l^ (v), ger (-j^H). To ^'fye, ]J1^, nathan. To hide, ]QD, 6r. 3 hal- le'kei lePani A'-^agger. 4 Ribhkah nath'nah eth-ham- ma^i^ammim v'gam eth-hal- le'khera. 5 iaman i^atsel yado bhatstsallakhath. 6 Y'hovah i?asah eth-hay- yareakh v'chochabhim. 7 hin- neh-i^abh k'^annah ch'chaph- ish )?olah miyyam. 8 vay- yichtobh Mosheh eth col- dibhre Y'hovah. 9 ush'mar- tem eth-hammatsoth. b) Translate — ]. Like a dog. 2. And I killed [after a Perfect]. 3. And I will kill [after an Imperfect]. 4. Isaac and Eliezer. 5. David and Solomon. 6. Like the mountain of my holiness. 7- Like a thick cloud. 8. And the thick cloud. 9. And they shall keep my statutes [after an Imperfect = Future]. Chap. V. Modes of expressing the Comparative and Superlative. The comparative is expressed by prefixing the 193 particle ]'0 (min), or D {mi) with following Dagesh (D before gutturals), to the object or objects wdth » Active partcp. of Kal from rhV'- i^ l^as this form -zf-'- in the construct state. t Suppose a Perfect to have preceded. X Suppose an Imperfect (= Future) or Imperative to have pre- ceded. 68 The Comparative and Superlative. [ch. (193) which the thing in question is compared. The ad- jective remains in the positive : Dyn"73D nbil' ga-bho-ahh raTc-colsha-i-^am, taller than any T T T • - T of the people. 194 This ]D (= ^a:) denotes distinction or removal from (or se- lection out of) the mass of objects with which the comparison is made. — Compare the Latin ablative with the comparative, and the adjectives ex-imius, e-gregiusj also Homer's U TravTOJv fid- Xi(TTa. (G.) 195 The superlative is usually denoted by the definite aj'ticle with the positive, which thus marks out the object in question as pre-eminently the possessor of the quality. The objects follow with ]p CO, D) or II- 196 The superlative of eminence (i. e. answering to our very with the positive), "Tto (m^od). It is sometimes denoted by a repetition of the positive : ' Good, good it is,' &c. ; ' very good it is,' &c. 197 A sort of superlative is sometimes formed by the construct state of the positive before a plural genitive : D^ti^"Fp. ti^Tp, ko-desh k°da-shim {the holy of holy things), the "holiest of all. 198 A comparison of equality is made by 3 (or 3^ 3) = as, like, 199 If the 3 is expressed before each member of the comparison, it indicates a reciprocal similarity : just as in English, " like master like man" z=. the man is like the master, and the master like the man. Vocabulary. 200 Sweet, p^DO, mathok. Honey, 1^21. d'bhash. Precious, "IpV yakar. 1 Pearls, D''JOB. p'ninim (al. 'tt • • ; Profit, ^^<13n(«^), fbh^ah. ' red-corals, E. B. rubies). T : _ I Excellent, in2J. mbhkhar 1 Gold, V^IIH, kharuts. T : • ' T {partcp. Niphal of bha- | Pure gold, TD, pJiz. khar). ' Floor, threshing -floor, ]li|, , gorCn. i Chamher, room, Tin, khc'd^r. Little, young, 1''^^, tsai'ir. -] The Comparative and Supey-latwe, 69 Handsome y fair, beautiful, nB**, VT yapheh. Always, TD-H, tamid (lit. ' T perpetuity). Dry, ti^^">, yabbesh. Potsherd, t^^n, khe'res. Moon, rf:i2b, I'bhanah (lit. (200) the white one, f. of ]'2.7y white). Sun, nDHj khammah. T — Pure, -II (/. nil), bar. - TT I^ifc, D^'Tfj khayyim {pi.) Exercise 22. a) n-^j)] 2 : t^nrjjp piri^ i . T : T • ' T •• • : • Dyn '^-ins t^n^ 7 • n.^ns n-j2 rr^n^^ nsi^ lo •;- •• ' :: - 6) 1. Wisdom is very good. 2. Wisdom is better than silver. 3. My rooms are better than yours. 4. Your room is very good. Imathok midd'bhash. 2 y'ka- 201 rah khochmah mipp'ninim. 3 fobh piryi mekharuts umip- paz, ^th'bh^athi micce'seph nibhkhar. 4 lo tohh anochi me^bhothai. 5 anochi hats- tsai^ir b'bheth abhi. 6 chith- bhuath goren. 7 yabhesh cakhe'res, 8 hai>am caccohen. • 9 cai^am caccohen. 10 ya- phah chall'bhanah barah ca- khammah. 11 /obh khasd'cha mekhayyim. Chap. VI. § 1. Numerals. 1. The ten first Cardinal Numbers. 1. The Cardinal Numbers from 2 to 10 are sub- 202; stantives with an abstract meaning (like triad, decad, TTEi'rac) ; but they are also used adverbially. Only "THNt, one (ekhad), fern. DHK;, (akhath), is construed as an adjective. The other numbers have each a masculine and a feminine form, which are identical in point of meaning, but distinguished in use by the 70 Numerals. [ch. 6. (202) arbitrary custom of employing i\\Q feminine form with masculines, and the masculine withfeminines. 203 It is only in the dual form for two, U]'yp (sh'na'-yim), fern, U)r\p (sh'tcV-yim), that the gender of the nu- meral agrees with that of the object numbered. 204 The numerals from 1 to 10: — >^ n to Masculine (which after 2 are fem. infortn). Absol. Constr. ^^^ im e-khad a-khad f ^P.^ u^lp sh'na-yim sh'ne or . sh'nem ritbp ntbp sh'lo-shah sh'lo'-sheth •^^^l^ WllNt ar-ba-iah ar-ba-i>ath r\mn npDn kh'mish-shah kh'^me'-sheth r\m Dtp shish-shah she'-shcth r^v:pp nv^p shibh-:i?cah shTbh-:i^ath r\pp ri2)m sh'monah sh'mo-natli r^vp^ nvpPi tish-i^ah tVsh-iath ^^^v^ ^1)^^. i^-^sri-rah r*se'-rt"lh Feminine. Absol. Constr. ^!7^ nm e-khath a-khath f 'i}V W^j^p sh'ta'-yim sh'te < or , sh'tem tbp tbp sha-losh sh'losh ^?"1^ Vi"l^? ar-bk:L^ ar-bS,V ^?7 t^n kha-mesh kh'mesh m tp shesh shesh y^^ V2p shg'bha:^ sh'bhai^ npp ny2p sh'nioneh sh'md-n6h ypr) :;pr\ te'-shtO? t'8hai> "^W "^Vk r6'-s6r :^6'-8er § 1.] Numerals, 71 The other Semitic languages exhibit the same peculiarity in 205 respect to the genders. The explanation of this is, that these numerals, being ox\^mdi\\Y abstract substantives {\\\it decaSy trias), had both the masculine and feminine form. The feminine, as being the favorite form for abstract notions, was the principal form, and as such was connected with words of the masculine gender; so that the other form, without the feminine ending, was used with words of the feminine gender. Usage made this a settled law in all the Semitic languages, the exceptions to it being very rare. (G ) [Syntactical Remarks [G.]). a) The numerals from 2 to 10 stand either 206 1) in the construct state before the substantive (so that the object numbered is in the ge- nitive), U^'D'^ Dpb'p, three days, prop, triad of days ; or 2) in the absolute state before it (the thing num- bered being then considered as in the accu- sative or in apposition), D''JI1 'Hth'^, three sons; or 3) in the absolute state after it, as in apposition with the object numbered (a usage of the later books, where the adverbs also are so constructed), '^ST^ Jlto, three daughters, 1 Chron. xxv. 5 ^''. The numerals from 2 to 10 are joined, with very 207 few exceptions, with the plural. !1) sh'losheth banim. ^ 2) sh'loshah banim. — 3) banim sh'loshah (late and rare). When a numeral is used absolutely (i. e. without a sub- 20S stantive, the masculine is regularly used (i. e. the feminine form for the numerals after two. 202). * In hke manner the constructions H^ti^ 'Hi^'Oi Gen. xvii. T T T •• 17, and T\yi) nSD, xxv. 7, 17, a hundred yearSy are equally T T - : common. 72 Numerals. [CH. 6. Vocabulary 209 Son, ]2. {pl- D"'J2. constr. | S^a/A:, H^p, kaneh ^^2)> ben (banim, b'ne, - irreg.). Daughter, Jll (;;/. Jl^Jl, co«5^r. JliJ3,), bath (banoth, b'noth, irreg.). Branch, y^'^V, sarig (sarag ; • T in Pual to be interwoven). A day, QV, yom {pl. yarnim). J-to! niJH, hinneh. Perchance, haply, ^7lh}, ulai. Battle, luar, n^vhD («w), T T ; • milkhamah (lakham, to con- sume) . Leah, ^T^^7» Leah. Week, ^2"^, shabhuaP (pi. ry)V2t).^ Bullock, "13, par (pl. parim). Exercise 23. 210 a) r\V2p f'b *nb5^ii jnti;^'?ti^ W'ywn n\;}bp 2 ^ — y ... .. • T :irThJ njijn tnibir D^^i:;^ T • -; - •• T T ; • hn"? m':'^ D^:)n n-^^^ e T •• T :T • T T • ")H)Dn ni;^n^ n;;^^ 7 1 vayyivval'du* 16 f shibh>ah bhanim v'shalosh banoth. 2 sh'ldsheth hassarigim sh'lo- sheth yamim liem -. 3 hinneh sheba:L^ shibb°lim i^oloth X b'kaneh Skhad. 4 ulai yim- mats'un § sham i^'sarah. 5 arbai?ah m'lachira i^asii || i milkhao^h eth hakh"mTshshah. 6 shishshiih banim yal'dah Leah. 7 shibi^ah shfibhiioth ti^por. 8 sh'monah pharim hikribhu. 9 "nochi /obh lach mei)'sarah banim. b) 1. The three baskets are^ three days. 2. Four kings. 3, Three men. 4. Two sons. 5. Five men went. G. Eight stalks. * ' And there were born.' § ' There shall be found.' if ' They offered.' To him.' I ' Came up.* Made with (eth).' ^ 2.] Cardinal Numbers, 73 Chap. VI. § 2. The Cardinals continued. Ordinals. To express the numbers from 11 to 19, the imits 21 1 stand, without the copulative conjunction, before ten (in the form 'S'VV masc, TTSW fem.). In such as are masculine in form (and therefore used \\\th.fem. nouns) the units stand, at least from 13 upwards, in the C07istruct state, which here indicates merely a close connexion between the notions, not the relation of the genitive. These numerals have no construct state, and are always used adverbially. I Masc. I Fem. I I 12 n** ' ")\j;y w^t i nnj^v wr\t t 15 iiDt i nVy n^pn 'j nn;^'); t6n 18 r^ \ -svv r\pt I n'Swv n^io^ 19* ZD^ I ^'^v nv'pi^ I niw Vp^ 20 D D''"!""?^ The tens from 30 to 90 are expressed by the plural 213 forms of the corresponding units (so that the jjlural denotes teiifold the singular) ; except that twentij is expressed by D'^'^W, plur. of ^W^ ten. ^° They are of the common gender, and have no 214 construct state. * Unusual forms are lii^j; Dyi^DIl, ffteen, Judges viii. 10 ; T T V ••-: '^VV rsyyi)> eighteen. Judges xx. 25. Here the masculine too T T - : has the units in the construct state. t Used because TV begins the sacred name. 74 Cardinal Numbers. [ch. 6. 215 When units and tens are written together, the earlier writers commonly place the units first (e. g. two and twenty, as in Arabic) ; but in the later writers the order is almost invariably reversed {twenty and two, as in Syriac). The conjunction is always used. {Common gender^ 216 Twenty, Dn^JT, i'es-riin. ,.. ... Thirty, U^'th^i sh'lo-shim. Forty, Q^y3")^^, ar-bca-irim. W^y^ D'''.i'?Dn, kh-'mTsh-shirri. Sixty, D'''^'^, shish-shim. Seventy, U^V^^^ shTbh-i'im. Eighty, U^yiyD, sh'ino-nim. Ninety U^'^^r\, tish-i>im. The remaining numerals are : — 2\7 A hundred, TM^r2, me-ah. |T" constr. JIJ^D, m'ath. Two hundred, DTIS^D (for Q^JIJ^D), mVtha-yim. A thousand, ^bi^, e'-lSph. Two thousand, O'^hbi^, al-pa'-yim. Ten thousand, Hid"). Plur. /lUn"), r'l)ha-bhah ; Plur. ri- ,TT : -: . bh^-bhoth. KiH"l or in"1, Plur. nij^inn or nil"), nb- bo ; Plur. rib-bo-oth or rib-botb. a) Examples of the other hundreds.'] 218 :nii^o j;i-ij^ (n) 400 -.nym ^bp (}D) oOO ••niNQ tp nn) 600 -.n^m ^Dm [pn) 500 :'D npp (nn) soo :'o );yp i^n) 700 :'D ^^t^n (pnn) 900 7o § 2.] Ord'mal Numbers. b) Examples of the other thousands.'] (2is) : D^^^^^ ntht (i) sooo -.w^b^ ^yn-l^^ (1) 4000, and so on. : rX\2r) '^rst, or Q^Jl'in"), or ^^ Dn'W 20,000 : ^^ n'sm ^t 600,000, and so on. ' ■ 2. Ordinal Numbers, a) The ordinals after the 'first' (which is derived 219 from li^^^") [rosh], head) are formed from the cor- responding cardinals by appending *^-, and also usually inserting another ''_ in the preceding syl- lable. ' b) The feminines have the termination D\ (ith), less commonly H" (y-ydh); and also denote such a pai^t (or fraction) : but besides these there are other forms to denote fractional parts, such as ^DH (kho- mesh), the fifth part; ^IT and ^1"1 (robhaj; and re'bhaj;), t)\Q fourth part. 220 Masculine. Feminine. The Sing. P/ip"'Qi; n^rrpi^ 9th ■'y^t^r^ n^j^^'i^jji 10th n''":t>v " nn^W The rest of the Ordinal Numbers are made by the terms ap- 221 H 2 7Q Ordinal Numbers. [ch. 6. (221) propriated to the Cardinal ones: as, Tl'^'fy /irThiil HTOT, " : V T T T - the eleventh year ; so, QV "^W^ nV^l!^, the seventeenth day. T T T : • [Syntactical Remarks [G.]). 222 a) In the cardinal numbers, the ten^ (from 20 to 90), when they ^precede the substantive, are regular!}^ joined with the singvlar (in the ac- cusative), and when they follotv it, in apposition, with the plural. The first is the more frequent construction. The phiral may be used in the first case, but the sin- j gular never occurs in the second. The numerals from 11 to 19 are joined to the singular i form (in the accusative) only with certain substantives, ) of which the numbers are very frequently stated, as day, : year, man, &c. (comp. our ' six pair of stockings,' 'four head of oxen;' e.g. QV "1"?J^ ilVIlSj^, prop. /oMr/eew T T T T ;- day, Ex. xii. 6. With this exception, they are joined to the ])lural : and in the later books then stand after the ' substantive. . b) Numerals made up of tens and units (like 21, j 62) take the object numbered either 1) after them in the singular (in the accusative), or before '■ them in the plural, as in the later books (Dan. ,, ix. 26) : or 2) the object is repeated, with the 1 small numbers in the plural, with the larger in i the singular (Gen. xii. 4; xxiii. 1). i c) Beyond 10 the ordinals have no peculiar forms, 1 but are expressed by those of the cardinals, ' which then stand cither before the object num- i bercd, or after it as genitive. In the latter ' case, the word r\y^ is sometimes repeated. In ^ numbering days of the month and years, the j forms of the cardinals are used, even for the numbers from 1 to 10. ; 223 Rem. 1) The numerals take the article when they stand with- i out a substantive, and refer to subjects mentioned before, as D^y^^n, the two, Eccles. iv. 9. 12. I .^ ■2-'] Ordinal Numbers. 77 2) Some substantives denoting weights, measures, or space of (223) time, are regularly omitted after numerals : e. g. shekels, ephahs, loaves. Thus an Hebrew spoke of ' a thousand of silver,' 'six of barley,' ' ten of bread.' ' A hundred (&c.) cubits ' is often ex- pressed thus : ' a hundred by the cubit ' (flDJ^^, HJ^Q)- A T - T T •• 3) Numbers are expressed c/t^fn'SM/iye/y (nearly as in English) by the repetition of the cardinals, but without *). Two two = two and two {U^^t U^lt)- Once is "inj^ DVD, pai?am ekhad .-..-. TV-- (lit. a step)', twice, D^DVp; ^^^^« ^^^^^^^ WUV^ ^^w^- Also by the feminine forms of the cardinals, PX^'^ (akhath) once: U^rW> twice; ll^S^U), thrice (poetical). The ordinals are em- ployed in the same way. Vocabulary. Evening, ^TSV' i^e'rebh. Morning, "Ipil, boker. Sabbath, DZZK shabbath. T - Euphrates, J1"15, p'rath. T ; Wives, D''^^. nashim (with masc. termination: irr. pi. of nm)> T • Cubit, nDi»^j ammah. T - Length, ^ij^, orech. ^rk, nH-Hj tebhah. Breadth, 211^, rokhabh. Height, J^D^p (w), komah. Flood, b^^Diaj), mabbiil (yabhal, to flow *). Month, ]£}lh, khodesh (kha- dash, to make new). To become dry; to be dried up, ^2^ yabheshf. "T Waters, CD, mayim (irr.). 224 * So Gesenius. Others derive it from nabhel, to drop off {oi leaves, &c.); and make its primary meaning, delapsus pluviee. Simonis. t Intransitive verbs often take (••) for (-) in ult. of 3rd sing, perfect. In the other persons they are conjugated regularly. h3 78 225 fl)-7^^< D'l'' Ordinal Numbers. Exercise 24. ^i^^pri DV ''^f'^'ri DV rm'^b n^p "•rnii'n dv 2 T T T T - ' V V ; D^ 4 : D^I^Nl nj^^"1J^^" m u'p2 'r}p r\r2b 'b n^y^n dv) ni^ nnxrr ... — .. . ^^ _ _ ^ iipbp "^m 1^1"] 9 :n^:i ^^^J jiiK5 u)bp 10 :D'':)n n^hi D"'i^'7'^-i n^nn D':u} DW n" -.nraip DV Dy2ii^ n'n b-i^^n 12 • T ; - T T - - ^Dipb DV Dn-^f^VT nxora ' V T T T ; I T 1 vay'hi- ;i)e'rgl)h, vay'hi- bho'ker [CH. 0. § 2. yom 6khad yom sheni yom sh'lishi yom r'bhii?! yom kh'mishi yom hash- . shish-shi. 2 yom hashsh'bhU''i shabbath layhovah ^lohecha. 3 han- nahar hayah Tarba^ahrashim. 4 sbem haekhad Pishon. 5 sbem-hannahar hashsheni Gikhon. 6 sbem-hannabar bashsh'lisbi Khidde'kel. 7 hannahar har'bhii?i h4' P'rath. 8 lakakh 16 Le'mech sh'ti nasbim, sbem baakhath i?adah v'sbem basbsbenith Tsillab. 9 vayyoled Noakh sb'losbab bbanim. 10 sh'losh iiieoth ammah orech batte- bbah, kb^misbsbim ammah rokbbabb, usb'losbim ammab komalbabb. 1 1 sb'nayim sb'nayim bau 61-Ndakb el- hattebhab. 12 bammabbul bayab arbai-ira yom yal-ba- arets. 13 bakbodesh hasb- sbeni b'sbibi-'ab v'i-csiim yom lakhod^sh yabb'sbfdi baarets. ' And eveniriif was and morning was = and tbe evening and morning were (E. T.). Cf. 188. ^ bayrdi {= was) followed by 7 {to) = became. Here: ^ teas divided into.' '^ ' And Noah begat.' "^ ue7it. '■' el=:/o; into. CII, 7. § 1.] The Pronouns. 79 h) 1. And the evening and the morning were the seventh (225) day. 2. Three and twenty sons. 3. Forty-two years. 4. One hundred and three days. 5. Sixteen sons. 6. One thousand two hundred and eight years. Chap. VII. The Pronouns. § 1. Personal Pronouns. Nominative. '^^. 1 I «nt T . a-no-chi 6 We -nakh-nu, nakh-nu 2 Thouim. ) np\^ 7 You (m.) DJlNi at-tah at-tem 3 Thou{L) ^^ 8 You (f.) 'i^^ kt at-ten 4 He i^in 9 They (m.) DH, n^n hu- hem, hem'-mah 5 She K^n 10 They (f.) ]n, mn hi- Accusative. hen, hen'-nah Me ••nj^ o-thi 16 U5 ^2Hi^ 5-tha'-nu 226 227 12 Theeim.) r^n'i^ o-th'cha 17 You (m.) DD/IN^ eth-chem 13 Thee{L) "TJjnj^ o-thach jj 18 You (i.) pJ^^i^ eth-chen 14 Him ^n't^ o-tho | 19 Them(m.) UQi^ o-tham 15 Her nnj^ o-thahh j 20 Them (f.) ]jlj^ o-than Other relations expressed by prepositions and 228 pronominal affixes: — (To, towards) To b 'bi^ i'bi^) el- («Ie) 21 Me 22 Thee(m.) ^b li •rjb I'cha l^.^^ ^^'?.^ e-lai e-le-cha 8d (228) (To) 23 Thee (f.) 24 Him 25 Her 26 Us 27 You (m.) 28 You (f.) 29 Themim.] 30 T-^em (f.) 7%e Pronouns. , I ■JT? lach j 't I n*? lahh T D2^ la-chem V T j ]^b la-chen I Qil^ la-hem j I ]r\'? la-hen I From ]Q * > 31 Me ^JQD mim-men'-ni 32 T%ee (m.) '^Q*^ mTm-m'cha 33 r^ee (f.) "Tf^D mim-mech IUDD mTm-men'-nii > nj^;^ mim-men'-nah T V • > ^ht^D mim-men'-nu D3D mic-cem ]DD mic-cen 39 Them{m.) DUD me-hem 40 Them (f.) ]tlD me-hen 34 Him 35 Her 36 Us 37 You (m.) 38 FOM (f.) T •• T (V I"" ]ybii In 3 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 12 T DD2 [CH. 7- e-la-yich e-lav e-le-ah e-le'-nii ^le-chem *le-chen *le-hem 4e-hen bi b'cha bach b5 bahh ba'-nii bil-chem ba-chen f D2 fbam, I Dn2 iba-hgm f ]ni J-ba-hen, [ ]n2 ]^ba-hGn With 51 Me ''^l^^ 52 Thee{m.) ^n^^ 53 Thee(f.) '^r\i^ 54 Him ^^l^^ 55 Her nflj^ eth t-ti t-t'cha t-trich t-to t-tahh With 56 Us •I^DN it-ta'-nu T • 57 You{m) DDnX it-t'chem 58 I'o?^ (f.) priiS^ it-t'ch(^n 59 Them{m.) DHS* it-tam T • 60 Them{i.) ]r\'i^ it-tan § ].] ThePr onouns. 81 As As 3 (=1D3 * : here ID =: HO, 'what,' used as a rel. con- junction: 'that,' 'quod.' E.) 61 / '>:b3 ca-mo-ni 67 FoM(mO °?? ca-chem 62 Thou(m.) Tji^^S ca-mo'-cha 68 Foii (f.) ^?? ca-chen 63 Thou (f.) "rjilt^S ;ca-n]och 69 They{m.) Dn3 ca-hem 04 He JinbS ca-mo'-hu T 70 r%(f.) !•?? ca-hen 65 She (1^3 ca-mo'-ah 66 fl^'e ^JiQ3 ca-mo'-nu (228) Examples of Prepositions with a plural (construct) form before Svffixes. after (lit. the Jiiiider jjarts). under: instead of (lit. the under parts). between (JitAoca]. interval). (usque ad) as far as (h). before suffixes.) upon. (phir. only witli plur. sit'ifiv). TT ' V T T T a-kh*rai, after me. 229 a-kh^-re-cha, after thee (m.). a-kh^'re-chem, after you (m.). takh-te-hem, under them. takh-tai. be-ni, between me. be-ne-chem, between you (m.). i^a-dai, (up) to me. i?a-dav, (up) to him. i)a-de-chem, (up) to you Cm.). i?a-lai, upon me. i)a-le-cha, upon thee (m.). )>a-lav, upon him. )?Me-hemj upon them (m.). * ^Q3 is always used before the lighter, not before the heavier, suffixes. Some of the poets use it with 7, ^ also, but only before monosyllabic (rarely dissyllabic) prepositions. (E.) t But this (observes Ewald) is from a root Lamed He, and 82 The Pro7iouns. [CH. 230 Remarks [for future reference). The forms in parenthesis are rare; those withp poetical. 1 [I] \ In pause, >yt^. 2 T/<0M, m.] Also (r)i^). In pause, TM^'i^- T - T T 4, 5, He, SAe] a) The X ^vas perhaps heard at the end as a sort of half-vowel (G.)- b) In the Pen- tateuch J^?)n stands also for she .- it is then usually pointed like J^^H (i- e. ^^')^) ; but this is merely an ortho- graphical anomaly. 6 We-] OJi^). T 8 You, f.] (^TJ^1^^, in four passages). (]J1^J, once). 22 To ^Aee, m.] ! nD^, in;jaM5e, '?J^. 28 To you, f.] i nj5^. 29 To ^Am, m.] i r\^rh, xzb *. 31 From me] (;?) ''JID. (iJ) ••JD. 231 The prepositions and other very short attrited particles take the longest possible pronunciation before suffixes. Thus (I) they constantly take the foretone «.- (2) prefer the longer for- mations ; e. g. UTr? (not Q7), &c., though Q^l is found, but V T T T often DH^l- (3) They take a instead of e as union-vowel of the V T suffix : so much so that this a expels even the e of the suffix of 2nd fern. sing. "12, &t:. (4) So also 73 {every, all) has as- ' T sumed some pronominal peculiarities from its quasi-pronominal notion: J^^S^), cullaniA, we a/Z; Tf^^ or TT^3, cullech or ciillach, T \ '•• \ 't \ thou entirely (E.). 232 Sometimes tivo prepositions precede the same suffix : as VJnn^D. mittakhtav {from-beneath-him:=.) from his place j '^'I'y'y), I'neg'di (ad-coram-me, to before me =) orer-against me, 80 has the termination >_ (6) from its origin. So "^^ and * With collectives it is used apparently only. 1-] The Pronouns. 83 in my presence, Sfc. J '^y^, in the presence of ; '^I^'^'Zl (in-adhuc- (232) me =) while I am still alive, while I have my being. Vocabulary. Mouth, nSj pSh (irreg. See list). Destruction, DDTIO («)» m'khittah. Also, D^, gam. Calamity, 'T'X^ ed. To laugh, pjl^i^, shakhak. ' - T To toil, ^r2^, i^amal. — T To build, (1^3,, ban ah. T T In vain, ^^V^. shav. I T To perish, 12i^, abhad. To recompense, to reward, 7Q21, - T gamal. To say, ■^D^^, amar. - T To pour out, TJS)I^. shaphach. Counsel, Hi*^ (y "')> i^etsah (VPS to counsel). Sound wisdom, ri^]^^r\{a(i)y), 233 T • tushiyyah (Hti^''. to subsist, T T to be firm). Understanding, il^"»3, (w), bi- T • nah. Strength, r\'y\1^{^), g'bhu- T ; rah. Morsel, J1D (i>), path. ^'"^j 3in. kharebh. QM?e/ (subst.), niT'ti^j shalvah. t; ~ Sacrifice, victim, H^Tj ze'- bhakh (dec. 6). Strife, contention, ^H, ribh. B?ooc?, Q'^, dam, T Memorial, ")3| or l^t* ze'cher or ze'cher. If, D^^; «o^ k"? (im; -16). Exercise 25. a) n^ nrinO b^DD ''3 l l pi chVil m'khittah 16. T • ; • ; :p^■;:^^* D^T^^:l ''^N^'Dil 2 , 2 gam-^ni b'ed'chem es- ••*'?T/^h^ ni037 HWy^ 'i^^T^ 3 khakC;?). 3 hu" y6shebh labhe- n^2 n^3''"i^7 ^')^"'■D^^ 4 ^akh Ittakh. 4 Im-yhovah 16- ••i:a tV^'in I^DJ) ^y^i t yibhneh bayith, shav i^ara'lu T : T : T ; * In pause for "^JPi^. t Partcp. Act. of Kal, n^*)2l (v^erbs in H take ••• for ••), pi. D'iil, ^v^th suffix V^3- 234 84 The Pronouns. (234) mX^ 6 -i^ 2^ZD1 T"TI^J^ 5 bonav >^7^^ n^ji^''? -r^T:^? '^ [cH. 7. bo. 5 ashrecha v'/6bh lach. 6 abhad zichram hem- mah. 7 yibhi'kbii bh'cba yod'i^e sh'me'cha. 8 Y'h5vah gamal iJalai. 9 shaph'ch4 da- mam cammayim. 10 araart* layhovah "donai attah. 1 1 li- i)etsah v'thAshiyyah, 'ni bhi- nah, li g'bhurah. 12 tohh. path kh*rebbah v'shalvah-bah mibbayith male zibhkbe-ribh. 6) 1. Thou (m.) shalt hide my commandments with thee. 2. I wisdom have dwelt (°with) prudence. 3. My mouth is destruc- tion to me. 4. Prudence dwells with them. Chap. VII. § 2. Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns. Demonstrative Pronouns. 235 This That Sing. Plur. m. ^^T^^{ The f same | f. ^}^1^ ]r\r} Sing. Plur. fm. zeh, zu "] . _ , . el-leh, el /. zoth, zo fm. hal-laz, hal-lazgh Sing. With As To From m. f. nT3 J^^^Ti) VT /ii^6 nr2 n^^•TD [/. ha-le-zii ( m. ha-hu" 1^/. ha-hi" Pf.UR. V •■ T njx3 ^?^^ ha-hem ha-hen * ' Those ivho knoiv.' Partcp. Act. of Kal, yy {to knoiv), in Stat, constr. § 2.] The Pronouns, 85 The demonstrative zeh, ilt (also ^t, it), is also (es- 236 pecially in poetry) used, like our that, for the relative pronoun : ' the place that (nt, zeh) you intetid for me.' Thus : Uhe city that you live in' might be translated literally in Hebrew, except that instead of in we must use in Hebrew i?i-it (cf 246). E. g. Ps. civ. 8, to the place Dilb PilD*' ilT ivhich thou hast destined for ■'■ V T T : - T V ^ them. It is even employed (like ^sher) to give a re- lative sense to another word. (For an instance, see the last Example in the Exercise on the Relative, p. 92.) nt is used adverbially, a) for there, HT n^H, see there! and 237 then merely as an intensive particle, especially in questions, as HT Tli^b, why then? (prop, why there?), b) in reference to TT time, for now, as D''rj^9 nt> now (already) twice. The interrogative pronoun is mi CD), who ? for 238 persons; mah, mah- (HDj TID), lohat ? for things, ^^^^ ^D signifies who is he? K^H ''D who is she? But K^n T\12 [what he), >^^rT"nD (?«7^<2/ she), signify what is IT ? In the same way, HfNt ^ip, ?t'Ao «?'e /Ae^e [per- sons) ? but n?hl^ HQ z^/i«/ «7'e /Ae5e [things) ? The interrogative ^D may be used in reference to 239 a plural, also in reference to things; but only when the notion of persons is implied, e. g. DD^ ^D, mi Sh'chem? who are the Shechemites ? ''D may also stand in the genitive, as ''D nil, whose daughter? and mi and m«A, without interrogation, for ' any.^ For HQ in this sense we have also the specific term nD1J or petsa:? (deck 6). Without cause, DDH, khtn- T • nam. Wind, nn, ruakh. Fists, Wy^n (dual, of ]9n, inus.), khophna'yim (deck 8, c). Garment, rwt2\D, simlah (w, Pdm. 12, 6). Measure, H'lD, middah (deck T • 8, a) ; "7"TQ, to measure. — T Work, r\)Dyp («). maa^'seh (deck 9, a); rW^, i^asah, T T to make. To dream, D/H. khalam. - T A dream, DvPf, kh'lom. Mountain, ■)n (d), har. Enrf, limit, yp (d), kets (deck ^,b). 2-] The Pronouns. 87 Exercise 26. a) wn^ *"^^^^^■'•p i : Dnriiip^ DOT -rn^bbDn "D^^nipi iQ'zrnD n'jpt^i T ; ' VT T T : ': • = 0''?'^^ "^ipn "i[j'';np oi^t:^ "rn^^1 niiD'- '•dd n :mn'' TWD ^^irn-t: 12 1 mi-y5mar, ^aharti mekha?- 244 ^athi. 2 I'mi 6i ? I'mi *bh6i ? I'mi midyanim ? I'mi-siakh ? I'mi ph'tsai^im khinnam ? I'mi khachliluth i>enayim ? lam'a- kh^rim )^al-hayyain {p.). 3 mi asaph-ruakh b'khoph- nav ? mi tsarar-mayim bassim- lah ? mah-sh'mo ? umah- shem-b'no ? 4 mah hakh"16m hazzeh'sher (which) khalamta? 5 mi-elleh ? 6 mi-zeh me'lech haccabhod? 7 Y'hovah "^do- nenu, mah-addir X shimcha b'chol-haarets ! 8 Y'hovah mi- yishchon b'har kodshecha ? holech tamim. 9 Y'hovah mi-chamocha ? mah-yakar khasd'cha ^lohim ? 10 hodi- i>eni Y'h5vah kitstsi umiddath yamai mah-hi". 11 mathai yamuth v'abhad sh'mo ? 12 mah-gad'lu majl?*secha Y'hovah ! b) 1. Who will bind the winds ? 2. How great is thy glory, Jehovah ! 3. I have dwelt on the mount of holiness. 4. What * « Will say.' t Eng. Trans, 'redness;' ' dimness ' (G .) ; 'fierceness' (L.). X {To those tarrying =) to those who tarry (or linger). § Is-become-glorious ; is glorious : from "TIJ^, to become glorious. Perf. of Hiph. "^ II Make-me-know ; cause- me-to-know. i2 88 The Relative Pronoun. [ch. 7. ;244) is your (m. pi.) name? 5. This river. 6. Those rivers. 7- This boy. 8. This girl. 9. Whose daughter is this girl ? Chap. VII. § 3. Relative Pronoun, 245 The relative pronoun is '^til^^^ ^shor {who, which) indeclinable; for which the prefix '^ (less com- monly '^) with following Dagesh is also used (but chiefly in rabbinical Hebrew). 246 Cases of the Relative'] The indeclinable relative pronoun ")Ii^^^ virtually assumes different cases by taking after it the cases of the personal pronouns — m. /. m. /. Now. 'y:)^^ ^tik^ -shgr -shgr Gen. (noun with pron. suffix) Iti^J^ [as masc.) Dat. '')\} IlL^ji nb l^i^ -^sher 16 'sher • "^ '■' "• lahh {to whom) Ace. iriK Ipi^ rrni^ Iti^ ^sher otho, \sher " ~* "^ '•* ~* othahh (whom) 247 Just so in the plural: Dil^ "l^h^, '"'sher-lrihem, to whom, &c. One or tivo words are generally inter- posed. Thus : ^^^^, immo, his mother, *lDh? "l^J^, *sher immo = whose mother (i. e. who his mother). 248 Just SO the relative "sher converts demonstrative adverbs of place, time, &c. (=: here, there, then, &c.) into the corresponding relative adverbs : as D^ sham, there. •> _ TVy^ sharn'mfih, thither. Dlt^Q mish-sham, ^ * thence. W^ 'yp'^ "sher sham, ■^ ■•■ "•* IV here. •> r\t^"2} ^\^ik 'sher sham'muh, ■•■ '■ whither. Dli'D ")lL^^^ 'sli^'^r mish-sham, ■^ * ■•■ "• whence. § 3.] The Relative Pronoun. 89 In this way a relative force may be given to the 249 obhque cases of the first and second persons : as, thou, Jacob, lohom I have chosen, '^'^Pnn'2. ")^>^» ^sher b'kharticha, i. e. whom I -have- chosen -^Aee (suffix of 2nd person added to the verb). The ace. ivhom may be expressed by "llil^h^ {"sher) 250 alone ; as in Exod. ii. 2. The antecedent personal or demonstrative pronoun 251 is often omitted before "sher ; and nearly always when a prepositional prefix stands before it. The preposition is then to be construed with the implied pronoun, the expressed relative taking the case re- quired by the construction of its own clause. Just so in English, from what, of what, &c. : e. g. thou shall drink from what ("It^i^O, me^sher) the young men will draw (Ruth ii. 9). Sometimes such a general notion as time or place 252 must be supplied : as, 1^>^3,, harsher {in the place where—), where; "l^i^?, me^sher {from the time when —),from when. As in English, the relative is sometimes omitted, 253 the relation being implied by the position of the relative clause, which stands as a sort of apposition to the word it is to modify. This happens (especially in poetry) — a) When the relative would be in the nom. or ace. 254 (without a prep. ^). Thus, ^ he has fallen into the pit he made,' would be expressed exactly as in English. Cf. Ps. viii. 2. * In a relative clause serving as a further description of a substantive, the relative may be omitted when a pronoun is ex- pressed, if it be a closely subordinated idea : e. g. the way they should walk ill, ,12 13^^ "?T1^n,Exod. xviii. 20. i3 90 The Relative Pi'onoun, [ch. 7. (254) h) So especially in general specifications of time: at the time the offering began^ TvfsyiTy 71111 JIJ^^- c) When the antecedent personal or demonstrative pronoun is also omitted: ' Sheol shall carry away ^h^ZDH (those who) sin.' The omitted antecedent may also be a general notion of place or time, so that a clause stands apparently under the government of a preposition. Thus, whereas in English we can say, Ho where I have prepared for him,' in Hebrew we may go further, and say, ' to I have prepared for him,' w '^I^^y^2'^^'?'^ (el-h^chinothi 16). 255 When the implied pronoun would, if expressed, be in the genitive, the preceding noun takes the stat. constr. Thus, ' by the hand of him thou ivilt send,' nbpn T:a, b'yad (stat. constr.) tishlrikh. 256 Such relative clauses as more specifically describe a substantive, may also be added to a preceding speci- fication by the copidative conjunction: the orphan ('b lU? J«^^1), v'lo i^ozer 16 (and there is no helper to him z=.), and one who has no helper. Vocabulary. 257 To forsake, ITp, J^azabh. - T Way, ^l^<. orakh, pi. "ra- khim, constr. Jli^'l^^. or- : T khoth. Uprightness, 1t^\ yoshgr(ya- shar, to be straight). Perverse, ^[5^, i^ikkesh (i^a- kash, to convict of perverse- ness). Ant, tlibr:):i M, n'malah. Leader, prince, ]'^'^p, katsin. Magistrate, 110'^, slio/er (partcp. act. of Kal, from [sha/ar] to write). Ruler, bll)^^ moshel (partcp. act. of Kal, mashal, to rule). Also, even, Qj), gam. fVelfare,-] >Ur>^, Shalom. Peace, J ▼ Against, 7^, i^al. Heel, npy. rakcbh. § 3.] The Relative Pronoun. Holy, tXl'p, kadosh. Excellent, "y^ti, addir. Desire, ySn? khephets. Blood, Q^, dam, for adam T (ish-damirn, man of blood =z bloody man, blood-thirsty man). Inmost part, or recess, IpJlD (a), mekhkar ([")prT]> to ex- plore). Wealth, treasure, JliB^iil (a w), T toi^aphoth. Wicked device j wickedness, HDT, zimmah (deck 10). 91 Joseph, C]D^^ Yoseph (lit. ad- (257^ ding). To sell, 13D. machar. Egypt, DHjiD, Mitsrayim. rm^, padah. (1) Eneraj/, "1 >*1V tsar (2) Adversity, f -' To obtain, acquire, H^p, kanah. t't His right hand, ij'*D^> y'mino, for ^Tr^] T, yad y'mino, hand of his right side (]"'D"'> the right). ^ot, "j''>^, en, is the construct state of ^li^, ayin {nothingness, nought), used adverbially. With ^ governing personal pronoun, it signifies, I (you, ^c.) have not a — {have no — ). Exercise 27. ' ."t t ' •• 1 ha^oz'bhim'orkhoth yosher, 258 *sher orkhothehem' i^ikk'shim. 2 lech el-n'malah Patsel, *sher en-lahh katsin sho/er umo- shel. 3 gam-ish s'hlomi ^sher- baiakhti bo ochel lakhmi hig- * Go (thou). t ^Dw]l}~V'^i^, ish-sh'lomi, ' man-of -my -peace,' i. e. 'my friend' (who, whenever he came, inquired after my health, &c.). I lit. eating = who ate. Partcp. act. of Kal, from ^Jii, to eat. 93 The Relative Pronoun. [ch. 7. § 3. [255) : ;2py 'hv * ^^"l^n 1 Jil i^Slai i^akebh. 4 likdoshim, K J I.. T - T ... I ' V T T V -; • : • : Dn"'':i3ry'73 nnj^i hdh Diin^a' ipiji W'D'i ^t^i^ 5 :t t:it: • • : T :'t V - T bm f?^) m'.T ^TO b^< 9 T 'v V T : T T ; - T V ' b) 1. (He) whose son said. 1. The man whose bread I have eaten. 3. The men whose bread I have eaten. 4. Men who have no ruler. 5. The man who trusted me. 6. The men who trusted them. 7- Thy covenant which I observ^ed. j "sAtr-baarets hemmdh, v'addire ! col-khgphtsi-bham. 5 anshe damim 'sher bidehem' zim- mah. 6 *ni Yoseph "khichSm "is^fer-m'chartem' othi Mits- ra'y'mah. 7 l6-zach'ru eth- yado, yom "sher padam minni- tsar. 8 har zeh-kan'thah y'mino. 9 el gadol Y'hSvah iime'lech gadol i)al-col-^lohini "shcr b'yado mekhk're arets, v'thoi'^uphoth harim 16 ; "sher- 16 hayyam. 10 gaalta har- Tsiyyon zeh schacanta bho. Chap. VIII. The Regular Verb. § 1. Derivation of Verbs. The Conjugations. 259 Verbs, like nouns, may be divided, in respect to their origin, into three classes. 260 a) Primitives. b) Verbal derivatives, derived from other verbs. * Has lifted up. Perf. of the form called Hiphil. t As for the saints. The prefix 7 with pi. of ^Hp (kad6sh), holy. Decl. 3. ' ^ "^ I lit. E(;ij/)t-icards = into Eyypt. The final n-^=«-'a^t^^> to- wards, into, of motion /o, or into. "^ § He-redeemed-them. Sulli.v of 3rd jil. masc. i CH. 8. § 1.] The Regular Verb. 93 | c) Denominatives, or those derived {de nomine) (260) from a noun : which appear to be of later origin | than the two preceding classes (G.). \ The noun^from which a denominative verb comes, 261 | is generally a derivative : e. g. ]2b labhan, to be \ tvhite, hence HJIlr? I'bhenah, a brick (from its colour), | and hence again, p7, to make bricks; from r\Xl> | dagah, to increase greatly, yi, dag, a fish; and hence again, -3^% dug, to fish (G.). , A peculiar kind of denominatives, of rather late 262 formation, are derived from augmented nouns, so that i one of their radical letters w^as in the noun a servile : \ e. g. n^^, nuakh, to rest, to set oneself doivn-, hence, j the noun, rSH^, na'khath, a setting down; and hence again, HHI, nakhath, to descend (G.). \ Conjugations or Species of the Hebrew Verb.] The 263 original signification of the root receives various mo- difications of meaning, according to a regular analogy, by a specific change of form: e. g. "TQ7, to learn; "TD^, to cause to learn, to teach; 22"^, to lie; y^^pH, to cause to lie, to lay. In other languages such words are regarded as new derivative 264 verbs : e. g. to fall, to fell; jacere, to throw; jacere, to lie; yivonai, to be hom ; yswdw, to beget, to bear. But in Hebrew, where these formations are beyond comparison more regular than in any other language, they have been called conjugations * and parts of the same verb. The changes consist partly in varying the vowels 265 of the root, or doubling one or more of its letters i^m, b^i^; b\!;i\\), b^S\>', bb\2\>, ^^^^IP; ki//el, kujf^al; ko/el, ko^al; ki/lrd, k'^al/al; comp. to lie, to lay ; to fall, to fell); partly in prefixing formative letters or * Hebr. D''i''J21. buildings, more correctly species, modifica- tions of the ground-form. 94 The Regular Verb, [ch. 8. (265) syllables ('^^fp^, '^'Z?!?'?, nik/rd, hik/il ; comp. speak, bespeak ; count, to recount ; bid, forbid) ; sometimes in a change of each kind, as 7'^'\>r\7\, hithka/Zol. 2G6 The conjugations that are in common use are — tep (3rd sing. masc. Kal or light, because not burdened with any accessory meaning, or with any formative addition or doubled letter. Niphal, properly reflexive, sometimes passive: n prefixed with i, and Sh'va under the first radical. (The full prefix, as we shall see, is hin.) Piel, mostly intensive; to act with diligence, earnestness, or frequency. Second radical doubled by dagesh : vowels, i, e. Pual, passive of Piel. Second radical doubled by dagesh : vowels m, a. Hiphil, mostly causatice : A prefixed with i (with a in other forms), and i (with Yod) for the second vowel. of perfect), ka- ta\, to kill. bt^p^, nik/al, he killed ' ' himself. btOp, ki^/el, he killed eir many ; he mas- sacred. b^py ku//al, he was ^ killed violently, 6,-c. b'^'i^p'^, \\\^t\\, he caused to kill. bl^pr{, hok^al. b*\^pr\r\, hithka«el. Hophal, passive of Hiphil. Hithpael, an intensive reflexive; the syllable hith prefixed, and (like Piel, from which it is formed,) a strong dagesh in the second radical. 2G7 The names of the Conjugations are the actual tenses of the old Paradigm bv'^, pai^al, bv^), bv^, &c. The selection of this verb was unfortunate, because from having for its second radical a guttural which is incapable of receiving dagesh, the name is not an exact type of the usual formation of the tense for strong verbs. Kdtcil is now generally used for the Paradigm, and has the advantage of clear distinct sound, but the disadvantage of stating forms that have no existence ; for none of the forms but Kal occur in Hebrew, and even that is rare, and confined to the poetical books. §!•] Conjugations. 95 As compared with Kal {— light), Piel, Pual, and 268 Hithpael are called heavy conjugations, having their middle radical loaded with dagesh. The persons of the derived conjugations are formed, 269 as in the perfect of Kal, by appending to the tense- root (3rd sing, masc.) the suffixes ti ; td, t; ah; \mi; teni, ten ; u. Since the terminations that begin with a vowel 270 [ah, v) are added to the root in the same way, one of them may serve as an example for the other ; and so, for the same reason, one of the persons with a ter- mination beginning with a consonant, may serve for the rest*; only the pupil must remember that, since terr^, teri are accented on the penult, a Kamets in the first syllable of the root will be changed into SWva (or, if the initial consonant is a guttural.) into a Khateph. Thus: Perfect. {Tense-root.) 271 Niphal Pill Pual HipMl Hophal Hithpael 1 sing. 3 m. ''^'?lp? "^^i?? nikklti nik^al 'J?^ii? ^^i? ki//alti ki«el "^rhv^p kii^/alti * ku«al "^phhpT} ^'^I?'? hiicmiti hikhl • : - : T ^iDpn hok/alti hok/al ^phhpm ^^P.-OO hithka^/alti hithka'//el 3/. r^bu:ipl niki'lah rhBp ki^I'fah rhmp kii^f lah n^^ZDpn hik^iiah rhv::^pr] T : ': T hoki'lah nb^pjin hithka^i'lah * These model (or normal) forms are marked in the Paradigms with an asterisk. 96 The Regular Verb. [CH. 8. 272 Observe that in Piel, the characteristic e is dropt in the other persons; in Hiphil, the i is retained in the 3rd fern, hikttlah (and therefore in 3rd plur. Kikiilu). The pupil will find no difficulty in fiUinir up the other persons (ntk^alti, nTk/alta, nik^alt, ntk^al, nik^'lah, | nik^alnu, nik^altem, nTk/alten, nikf lu). Vocabulary. m Word, -)Qi^, omer (decl. 6, h). To divide into fioe, li^DPf. khimmesh (khamash,^i?e). Plenty, )^2V, sabha^^. T T Year, r\y^, shanah {pi. sha- T T nim and shanoth. To let go, ^c, tOD'^, shama^*. To learn, 1^7, lamad f. — T To break; to break in pieces; to afflict, ')2^, shabhar. - T Affliction, sorrow, "1^!^, she'- bher. Hail, T12, barad. T T Rock, ^^0, se\a^ (decl. 6, b). Tree, yj;,* i^ets (decl. 7, a). To flow, ")Z0O, ma^arj. - T To visit, "7p3, pakad §. To destroy, [1:2*1}], [shamad], - T used in Hiphil. A city, -)^y, i^ir. To steal, 2^^< ganabh. -T To bless, "JJ"!:!, barach ||. To walk, "^Sl, halachH. Exercise 28. 274 a) :^'B npji^n ^Is'^A 1 ••j'^ ;?2'^3 Dn^*D V"!^'-^^ 1 nilcadta bh'imre phicha. 2 nilc'dah raglam. 3 zS'rai^ tsaddikim nimliU. 4 limmadti elhcem torah. 5 khimmesh eth-e'rets Mitsra'yim** b'shS'- bhai? sh'ne hassabhaJ^. * In Niphal, to be thrown down. t In Pir;l, to teach. I In Hiphil, to cause to flow; to rain (trans.)- § In Hiphil, to cause to visit; to order to iiispect: hence to place a person over ; to make him a manager, &c, II In Hithpael, to bless oneself; think oneself happy, &c. _ % In Hithpael, to walk; to go about (also of a course of life). ** i^gypt. §2.] ... I .- T - ' V|T T - • v; iir«/. 97 6 nishm'^u bhide-se']ai> (274)- shophVehem. 7 eth-col-i''ets hassadeh shibber habbarad. S nishb'ru col-m'ah*bhayich *. I i^al-she'bher bath-i>ammi hoshbarti. 10 i^amasa [Amasa] lo-nishmar f ba- khe'rebh "sher b'yad-Yoabb. II 15 him^ir Y'hovah ^lohim i?al-baa'rets (p.). 12 him^arti i)al ^h akhath. 13 hishmid eth-hakh5ri X mipp'ne-hem. 14 Po^iphar hiphkid otho IpSn -IB^tpB 14 --DmBD b'bhetho. 15 Noakh hats- p^7^*n m 15 : ^j-|^5:ii ^h^^ | tsaddik hithhallech eth-ha. b) 1. Thou art taken, O Babel! 2. I am broken-hearted. 3. I was stolen from the land of the Hebrews. 4. They divided- the land -into-five, 5. The kings have placed- him -over the land. 6. The righteous (pi.) walked with God. 7. He blessed-himself in his heart. 8. You {pi. m.) have placed- us -over your house. Chap. VIII. § 2. On the ground-form [or Conju- gation) Kal (G.). The forms of the Hebrew verb are the Perfect (1); 275 the Infinitive (2); the Imperative (3); the Imperfect [often called the Future'] (4) ; the Participle (5). If the forms are taken in this order, and the Conjugations in 276 the usual order Kal[\), Niphal{2), Piel{2>), Pual{A), HipMl {b), Hophal (6), Hithpael (7), the combination of two numerals will * Thy lovers. A Participle Piei, IHi^p (decl. 7, b), with pronominal suffix. " ~ • t Niphal. of ■^Q'^i^ (= (pvXdTTsaOai), to be on one's guard against. ~ "^ X The Horims, K 98 The Regular Verb. fCH. 8. {-17^) supply a ready means of shortly denoting the mood or tense and conjugation of any form. Thus 2, 5 {= second form of the fifth conjugation), i. e. the Infinitioe of Hiphil ; 3, 2 (z= third form of the second conjugation), i. e. Imperative of Niphal. The Short Paradigm of Kal. 277 I Kal 1 Perf. kafal •2 bifin. constr. k7ol Puricp. act. kotel 6 Past paiicp. 3 Imperat. 4 Imperf. k'/ol yWtbX 278 Perfect. — {a) The third singular of this tense is considered, as we have seen, the ground-form or root. Besides the usual roots with vowels a — a, we also find the vowels a — e, a — o, usually confined to in- transitive verbs denoting states and qualities. b) Verbs whose vowels are a — a, a — e, a — o, are called respect- ively, Verbs Middle A, Verbs Middle E, and Verbs Middle O. 279 Verbs Middle E are conjugated exactly like Verbs Middle A, except in the 3rd sing, of the Perfect. Thus from cCibhed we shall have cdbhddti, cdbhddtd, cdbhddt, cabhcd, cdbWddh, &c. 280 The exceptions to this rule are (1) Verbs Lamed Aleph, and (2) the remaining persons of the regular verb when they are in pause [See 282]. Thus, 3rd sing. npHI becomes HpH'^ in 't; t 't" t pause. 281 In Verbs Middle the Kholem is retained in inflexion, where it has the tone; and "changed into Kamets Khatuph, when the tone is thrown forwards. 28 2 On 'Pause' and its effects'^']. — The tone-syllable of the last word of a sentence, or principal member of a sentence, is said to be in pause. This syllable is marked with one of the great distinctive accents (es- pecially Alhnakh [a] and Silluk [i]), as VINH, D;DrT. 2S3 a) When the syllable in pause has a short vowel, it becomes long; as ^Dp, b^\)', U'^, wr2; rh\:^\), rb\!:^y>> - 't At't • - -AT T ; -'t T : |t't This rule respects principally Pathakh and Segol. Segol them rhe pupil need not study these rules, till he is referred to § 2.] Kal. 99 is, however, strong enough to be retained in pause, when (283) the syllable closes with Dagesh forte, as ^^l^J)'^. {Pathakh is sometimes adopted in place of Segol, and even of Tsere.) h) When a final tone-syllable begins with two consonants (as ri/Dp). the vocal Sh'va under the first gives place to a full vowel ; a more fitting position is thus secured for the tone, which is moved from the last syllable to the new penultima : e. g. n'^ZOD, H^^Dp ; HK^i::, B^b^ ; •l^:Op^ T : '|T tat't t : IT TA-T : ': • •1/tDp^' The vowel selected is always that which had been dropt from the same syllable, in consequence of the lengthening of the word. Vocal Sh'va in pause becomes Segol, and a Khateph gives place to the analogous long vowel, as >J^^, ''J.v^; >Vn, 'hh. •-; 'AT • t; 'A c) This tendency to place the tone on the penultima in pause shows itself moreover in several words which then regu- larly retract the tone, as O^^, ''DJK; rT^^^^, r^r^U^ • T • ^ T X - T AT nn^, nn^ ; and in some other single cases. The forms that end in ti, td, nu, are penacute 2S4 (Milel) ; the others are oxytone (Milra). {a) By pause (as just described) the accent is, in several persons, shifted back, and the original vowel of the second syllable restored, [b) Vav conversive of the Peifect moves the accent forward one syllable. Infinitive or second ground-form of each Conju- 285 gatioii]. — («) The shorter infinitive, or infinitive con- struct (^bip, k'^ol) is the more usual; and is the form that is 7iecessarily used With, prefixed prepositions. b) The longer infinitive [infinitive absolute) is used, when the action of the verb is stated independently by itself; it is of common occurrence in a frequent Hebrew idiom, by which it is either — 1) placed before a finite verb, to denote intensity (or strong asseveration) ; 2) placed after a finite verb, to denote continuity (a lasting action). K 2 100 The Regular Verb. [ch. 8. I 286 Thus /^3pD^ ^C)p^, nich.9oph nichsaphta (thou ear- nestly longedst) ; 2019';^ tODOT, vriyyisbpo^ shapho/, j he will he playing the judge. \ 287 A sort of gerund is formed by the infinitive con- struct with 7 : e. g. /lOp? for killing [interficiendo, ad \ inierficienduni]. It may be followed by a substantive (which, strictly speaking, stands in the genitive re- lation to the gerundial infinitive). 288 The 7 is here so closelv connected, that it constitutes part of the grammatical form /ZOpA hk-/ol ; 7D^7, lin-pol (with dagesh lene) : jnst as the preformatives of the Imperfect (e. g. in yik-tol). But 3, (in), ^ {from), are not supposed to be so closely connected ; hence a liefradcephath letter (as 2nd radical) would not take dagesh lene: 73J3.> bi-n'phol {not bin-pol). 289 Lnperafive'] — («) The chief form of the Imperative 7tbfp (/L^p) is the same that Hes also at the basis of the Imperfect, and which, when viewed as an In- finitive, is likewise allied to the noun. It expresses only the second person, but has inflexions for the Feminine and the Plural. It has no form for the third person, and even the second must be expressed by the Imperfect, when a negative precedes, as 7b|pjn ^hJ, do not kill; lit. thou shall not kill \ne oc- cidas] (not bt\) bi^). b) The proper passive conjugations have no Im- perative, but the reflexive Niphal and Hithpael have. 290 The inflexion is exactly similar to that of the Im- perfect. 291 Imperfect.'] — The final o (Kholem) is on\y to)ie-lo?ig (as in the Inf. and Imp.). Hence, a) it is very sel- dom w^ritten fully, b) Before Makkeph it becomes Kamets-Khatuph. c) Before the afformatives \ and 1 it becomes vocal Shh'a. d) In a very few passages it is changed into ^ before these atibrmatives, but § 2.] Kal. 101 only when it stands close before the pause: e. g. (291) .')j3')3:i;>j yishpu/u, they will judge, a) Intransitice verbs {middle E and 0) take a (Pathakh) in 292 the Imperfect, as '^1^, to be great, Imperf. biy^', \h\>, to he small, Imperf. ]t!3p''- b) Sometimes both forms exist together; the Imperf. with 0. is then transitive, and that with a intransitive : but now and then both occur without any difference of meaning. In the irregular verbs, the feeble e {Tsere) is also found in the final syllable, as ]Xn'' for '[PST- These three forms of the Imperfect are called Imperfect 0, Imperfect A, Im- perfect E *. c) In the Pentateuch ] (nd) occurs in place of H^, especially T ■•■ after Vav conversive. d) For ?) {u) the fuller ending *'y\ (un) is not uncommon (mostly with an obvious stress on the word at the end of a period), the vowel of the second syllable being retained, as ilt^l^j yirga'zun, they tremble \. AT :• In hke manner ^'PtOpJl has a longer form with final ]: 293 In pause [282], the vowel of the second syllable, if it had be- 294 come Sh'va, is restored, and takes the tone, as '♦7lOpi"j •VZDp''- * For the 3rd plur. fem. TS'^hJ^l^rS is substituted in three instances, to distinguish it from the 2nd pers., the form n!)/bp'' (etymologically more correct), as in Chaldee and Arabic ; and in several instances n^^bp-H seems to have been used improperly for the 3rd pers. singular. f This original ending ^^ is common in Aramaean and Arabic. Of the Imperfect with ^, KV^^^ Jer. x. 5, is the only example. T • X This is also common in Aram, and Arabic (probably in imitation of the plural ending ]J). G.) K 3 102 The Uegular Verb. [ch. 8. [Learn the Paradigm of Kal, in the Regular Verb, Appendix D.] Vocabulary. 295 To seek, to require, ti^ll, da- rash. To be great, 7"T^, gadal. To anoint, '•\D2> nasach. To write, 2n3> cathabh. — T To take hold of; take, seize, handle, 'IV^D, taphas. - T To rage {tumulluously) , li^JI, — T ragash. Tojlee, n")2, barakh. ~ T To observe, ■^^;J, natsar. - T To wink {maliciously or craft- 'i'ly), Y"^p' karats. To devise {evil), li^lpf, kharash ~ T {to plough; tofabricate,SfC.). To forsake, :2T>% i^azabh. ~ r To go on, '^Ii,♦^^, ashar. - T To slay (esjiecially animals), n^l^j /abhakh. - T To mix, to mingle, "^TDD. nia- 5ach. To arrange, to prepare, "?Tiy, i?arach. To inhabit, \'2^, shachan. ~ T Very, 1^^D. m'od (lit. strength) . An accusation, H^l^V (w), si^- nah (sfi/an, to oppose). Baal, 'p^i, ba'ral. A prophet, X'^^J], nabhi" (deck 3, a), [nabha", to announce^. Holy, Ten, khasid (deck 3, a). • T A commandment, IllJiD ("), mitsvfih (tsavfih, to set up). A covenant, JIHU. b'rith. Between, y^., ben. Seed, ^-)T, ze'rai> (zarai^, to scatter, to soiv). Time, season, JIJ?, i.''eth,(c.decl. > 8,6; contr. for jn"T^, from mi;, to go by). A victim, PTZIlDj ^e'bhakh (see to slay, above). When? ^JID, mathai. - T How long? "^DO'lV* ^a^- mathai. Harp, lyre, "1^-13, cinnor. Numerous, 133. cabbed. To be able, 7J^, yacol {verb T middle 0). A prison, Dn^DH /T'^, beth hasurim (lit. house of the bound; contr. from J1^3, "1^D^5' a prisoner; partcp. T of "IDS. iisixr, to bind. — T To go forth, i^'^\ yfitsa. §2.] Kal. Exercise 29. 103 0) :mn''-nhi '^p^^^^ i T ; V * : ~ T T T " ; • T : T T T DIN* 13 i^^tr^ b'^v TJX1 17 : yn^ ra^z;^ n'? *r^r\ ^^^^ ^bv is ^^'^"[ji ^?py-ji^j rDB'^^ ^d; \tp 19 1 darashti eth-Y'li5vah. 296 2 gadalta m'od. 3 va^ni nasachti malci i^al-Tsiyyon. 4 cath'bhu si^nah i-''al-y6- sh'bhe Y'hddah. 5 tiphsu eth- n'bhie haBBa)>al. G lammah ragh'shu goyim Hagar bar'khah mipp'ne Sarah. 8 v'de'rech kh^^idav yishmor. 9 m'zimmah tishmor i?alecha. 10 n'tsor, b'ni, mitsvath abhi- cha. 11 zonh b'rithi "sher tishm'm beni ubhenechem' ubhen zar'i^^cha akh^recha. 1 2 i?ad-mathai i^atsel tishcabh'? 13 adam B'liyya)?al ish a ven, korets b'i^enav, khoresh rai^ b'chol-i^eth. 14 ^^izbhu ph'thaicn v'isbru bh'de'rech bhinah. 15 ^abh'khah /ibh- khahh, ma^'chah yenahh, aph i^ar'chah' shuikhanahh. 16 r'shai'^im 16* yishc'nii arets {p.). 17 v'ach eth- dimchem' I'naphshothechem' edrosh. 18 Yubhalhu''hayah* ^bhi col-tophes cinnor v'i^ugabh. 1 9 mi yachal lishpo^ eth-i-^amm'cha haccabhed hazzeh ? 20 mibbeth hasurim yatsa liraloch. Was. 104 The Regular Verb, [ch. 8. (296) b) Translate into Hebrew — 1. I will seek Jehovah, 2. My children, seek ye the Jehovah. 3. Why did he fly from the face of Abraham ? 4. I will keep this thy covenant. 5. They will write an accusation. 6. How long shall we dwell in the land? 7- Thou shalt keep my covenant. 8. We will keep their covenants. 9) Write down the Perfect, Imperative, and Imperfect of shdmar through all its persons. 10) Write down the Infinitive {absol. and constr.) of ddrash. 11) Write down both Participles of ndtsdr. Chap. VIII. §3. Niphal. 297 The full characteristic of this conjugation is the preformative syllable hin (JH). It appears only in the Inf. constr. /^[^n (by assimilation from bl^p2n). With the Lif. are connected, in form, the Lnper. bl^pT} and the Lnperf. ^i?p), contracted from ^^pH/ In the Perf. the (less essential) h has been suffered to fall away, and only n remains as the characteristic, hence /^pi (niktril). The Participle is distinguished from the Perfect only by the long (t), as 7tDpJ, /em. n^ZDpJ or rhl^jyi. The inflexion of Niphal is per- fectly analogous to that of Kal. [See Paradigm D in Appendix.] 298 Hence the characteristics of Niphal are (1) for the Perf. and Partcp. the Nun prefixed; for the Imper., Inf., and Imperf. Dagesh in the first radical. 299 The same marks are found in the irregular verbs, except that where the first radical is a guttural, Dagesh forte is necessarily omitted, and compensation made for it by lengthening the pre- ceding vowel. 300 Significations of AHphaL] Niphal resembles the Greek middle voice, and hence, 301 a) It is primarily reflexive of Kal; often in verbs which express passion or feeling. b) It frequently expresses reciprocal action — 1) primarily, when the action is done to one another (to each other), or by one with another/ § 3.] Niphal, 105 2) secondarily, when two or more are concerned in the (301 ) same action in opposition to each other (B. a, b). c) It also, like Hithpael and the Greek Middle, denotes an action done to ov for oneself. d) It is often also passive of Kal, but also of Piel and Hiphil, when Kal is intransitive or not in use ; and in this case its meaning may again coincide with Kal (n7n, Kal and Niphal, to be sick), and even take an accusative. Examples of denominatives are : ^3.7J. cordatum fieri, from 302 22b, heart; "130, to be born a male, from IDT, a male. T •• - ; • TT The older Hebrew Grammarians consider Niphal a.s the proper 303 Passive of Kah This is decidedly incorrect ; for Niphal has not the characteristics of the other passives. According to the usage of the language, the passive signification is certainly the predominant one ; but it was first derived from the reflexive. The prefixed hin has (like the hith of Hithpael) the force of a reflexive pronoun. The bif. absol. yi^T)"^ (nik^ol) connects itself, in form, with 304 the Perfect, to which it bears the same relation as ^itOp to 7L3p. The *! in the final syllable (which is essentially long) is - 't only found in the Inf. of Piel and Pual. a) In pause [282], Pathakh often takes the place of Tsere in 305 the final syllable. b) In the 2nd and 3rd plur. fern, the form with Pathakh is more common than that given in the Paradigm : e. g. n^'^3-Tj^ (tizzacharnah), they shall be remembered, Isa. Ixv. 17. c) When the Imperf., or the Inf., or the Imper. is imme- diately followed by a monosyllable, the tone is mostly drawn back upon the penult, and consequently the final syllable, losing the tone, takes Segol instead of Tsere: e.g. n3, bwh'^ (yiccashel bahh), he stumbled at it, T •• T • d) In a few words, this form with the retracted tone is the only one in use. e) A frequent form of the 1st Pers. is "^ZOpJ^ (ikka^el). 106 The Regular Verb, [ch. 8. The Short Paradigm of Kal and Niphal. 306 \Kal 2 Niphal 1 Per/. ka^al nik^al 2 Tnfin. constr. k'^ol hikka^el 3 Imperat. k7ol hikka7rii to be abominable. nithrabh ZO/DJ to deliver oneself; to escape; to be delivered. nimla^ nichlain [shaJl^an]. i ]Vt} j nishi^an [tsamad, to bind], j "^P^t' I nitsmad [xdididim*, to snore], ^ll^ ! nirdain * An onomatoepic word. Cf. ^a^-Qdvu), dor-mio (G.). to be insulted; to be shamed; to be ashamed \_ai(Txvvt(T9ai], to rest oneself; to lean upon; to confide in. to bind oneself (to) ; to be at- tached or adhere to. to sleep heavily; to fall down astounded. §3.] NiphaL 107 [shakaph, prob. to | 5]pti^J lav over; to cover. 1 \ . , 7 • *, ^ -^ I nisbkaph [camar, to warm]. (to lay oneself over [e.g. a win- (307) dow-sill] for the purpose of looking out=^) to look out; to behold J to hang over (of a mountain) ; and fig. to impend. N^J(a^) to show oneself a prophet; to "IDD^ to he warmed: fig. to hum, to 'S yearn. Vocabulary. [The forms in crotchets do not occur in Kal.] To destroy, [iQIi*], shamad — T (in Niphal). To cutoff, [pii], garaz. To cast out or up, [^12l]) ga- rash (Niph., to he cast or tossed up; to he agitated, troubled). To separate, "TIS, parad. ~T To break, "l^i^, shabhar. - T To bury, ")2p, kabhar. To hold, hold up; to acquire, TJDn, tamach. To take; to catch, Id'p, la- - T chad *. To gather; to collect, Y^p, kabhats. To stumble, 7ti^3, cashal. To burn, C]^'!^, saraph. To be pure, [H^p], kanah (Niph., to be unpunished). Before, in the sight of, "7Jl5, 308 ne'ged. From before, T.I^D. Therefore, ]Il"^^, i>al-cen. > Suddenly, ^^ilS, pe'tha)>. Remedy, ^ KD"1D («, a^), Deliverance, \ "^^^P^! ('"'^P^^' to heal). Grey -hair; old age, n^^Ii^(w), sebhah (sibh, to be grey- headed). Cord, b2n, khe'bhel ([kha- bhal], to bind). A treacherous person, T^^^, bo- ged (partcp. Kal of [bagad] to cover). Garment, "fj|2l (decl. 6, a), be'ged. Harvest, "T'^'p, katsir (decl. 3, a) ; katsar, to reap. Also ' to take by lot ' [Xayxdvoj ?] 108 The Regular Verb. [CH, (308) Frowardness, riDISrm, ta- I T -:- I h'phuchah Deceit, | (only in plur.), J haphach. Wickedness, n^H. havvah. T- Righteous, p^'lii, tsaddik. To write; to number, ISD, ~ T 5aphar. Multitude, 2"i(d), robh (ra- bhab, to become numerous). Famine, 2^1, raVabh (rai^ebh, T T to be hungry). The bowels (fig. compassion), □n"). rakhain (decl. 6,/). Exercise 30. 309 a) rs^T "in-^^^ vrk MT^^ ^ • t; • • T : ; • ' .. X • iib riii 8 ' ' ■ : bp\n •-^^hb] Dn^2 DTjh 12 j7"3 np^-N^^ ' t'p t 13 -D^ 14 ■■hbr2: Q^pnii yin :3y";n Y^Sfrr n-i3Ji ■■2pv;_ 'n r^2\^rj 17 ■ iry::^ dt^i h'3 is 1 nigrazti minne'ged i^en^cha. 2 v'har'shai-^iin cayyam nig- rash. 3 i?al-cen pg'thai* yishshabber', v'en marpe". 4 tikkabher b'sebhah ^obhah. 5 b'khable khaf/atho yitta- mech. 6 nishm'dah miBBin- yamin ishshah. 7 b'de'rech khochmah 15 thiccashel. 8 b'gadav 15 thissaraphnah. 9 mei^olam nissachti*. 10 nir- dam bakkiitsir ben mebhishf. 1 1 I'shon tahpuchoth ticcareth. 12 b'havvath b5g'dim yilla- chedu (;;). 13 yad I'yad X l5-yinnakeh rai^, v'zeral? tsad- dikim nimla^ (/?). 14 gam- damo hinneh nidrash (p). 1 5 l5-tbiccareth haerets bara- i^abh. IG nichm'ru rakh'mav el-akhiv. 17 hikkabh'tsii b'n^ Ya^-'kobli. 18 beth r'sharim yishshamed. * For ninsacii. "l * Hand in hand ' f * That maketh ashamed' though hand be joined in hand.' § 4.] Piel and Pual. 109 b) 1. His brother was taken-captive. 2. Thy seed shall not (309) be numbered (for *) multitude. 3. The treacherous man shall be taken in his wickedness. 4. The wicked {pi.) shall not be unpunished. 5. And they separated (themselves) from each other. 6. My clothes are burned. 7. And I shall be destroyed, I and my house. 8. The kinoes have been anointed. 9. Our queen will be anointed. 10. His garment is burnt. 11. He will be buried. 12. The land shall be utterly destroyed. 13. Gather {pi.) all Israel: and they were gathered. 14. (In the-being-gathered-together of the nations i=) In the nations being gathered together and the kingdoms. 15. Those who-are- gathered {pi. partcp.) to tbee. 16. Write down the short Paradifjm of 112'^ in Niphal. 17. Write the Hebrew of — ~ "^ 1) To be buried. 2) Ye {fem.) shall be buried. 3) Being buried {fern, sing., fem. phir.). Chap. VIII. § 4. Piel and (Its passive) PuaL ^° The characteristic of this conjugation is the 310 doubling of the middle radical. In Piel, the Imperf. {bBp^^, y'ka//§l) and the 311 Partcp. (^^p_D, m'khttel), whose preformatives take Sh'va, are formed, according to the general analogy, from the Inf. and Imperat. ^^j^. The Passive (Pual) has more obscure vowels, and its Infinitive is of the same form with the 3rd sing, of the Perfect. In other respects the Active and Passive follow the same analogy. In the Perfect of Piel, Pathahh takes the place of Tsere in the first and second persons, which, properly, have for their basis the form bl^\>. See (and learn) the full conjugation of Piel in Para- digm D. The O, which in this and the succeeding conjugations is the 312 characteristic of the Partcp., may be derived from \'3, who? in the sense of some one. The characteristic Dagesh in the middle radical is omitted 313 only in the following cases — a) When this letter is a guttural. * Q. How pointed before Resh ? L 110 The Regular Verb. [ch. 8. [313) h) Sometimes, though rarely, when it has Sh'va; the omission is then sometimes indicated by a Khateph under the letter that ought to be dugeshed, i^ In the Imperf. and Partcp. the Sh'va under the pre- formatives may always serve as a mark of these conjugations. Significations of Piel.'] 314 a) It denotes intensity and repetition^, and that the action is performed upon many. This sig- nification of Piel is found with various shades of difference. With the eager pursuit of an object is connected the influencing and urging others to perform it. Hence, 6) It has a causative signification (like Hiphil), and may be resolved by to make, cause, or let; to declare (a person to be what the root denotes); to regard him as — , to help. c) Deyiominatives are frequently found in this con- jugation, which in general mean to make a thing (what the noun expresses), or to be in any way occupied with it. — What kind of reference the verb then denotes, depends on the kind of ope- ration of which the noun is susceptible : in the case of several possible operations, custom arbi- trarily affixes the verb to one of them ; and often restricts the use of it, in this sense, to particular objects (e. g. to afield in the case of to stone). d) They sometimes express the taking away or in- juring the thing or part, of which the noun is the name. [Compare our, to brain a man ; to bone a herring; to stone raisins: to dust a room, &c.] e) So also in some verbs, whose origin cannot be traced to a noun. 315 a) When Piel approaches the causative force of HiphU, it ])rimarily expresses this notion with the accessory one of care and great activity, b) Sometimes, however, it is used together with HiphU, without any great difference of force, especially to ex- press transitively what Kal expresses intransitively (E.). * So intensive and iterative nouns are also formed by doubling the middle stem-letter. 4.] Piel and PuaL 111 The Short Paradigms of Kal, Niphal, and Piel. IPerf. 2l7if.cdr. 3 Impend. 4 Imperf. 5 Partcp. 1 Kal ka^al k'fol k'tdl yik/ol kofcl 2 Mphal nik/al hikka^el hikka^el yikka/el nikfal 3 Piel ki«el ka^el k&tte\ y'ka«el m'ka/^el 6 P«6^ 316 partcp. of Kal. ka^ul Normal Forms. Perf. ki/Zel, ki^/'lah, ki^^al'ta. Imperat. ka^/el, ka^fli, ka^/el'nah. Imperf. y'ka/^el, t'ka^fli, t'ka^^el'nah. 317 Examples. Kal. «) 'Pi^Ii^, shaal nnii». tsakhak to ask to laugh Piel. to beg. (to laugh repeatedly), to sport, to jest. to bury (many persons). to loose. to relate; to tell. to {cause to learn =) teach. to make alive. nnp. kabhar to bury - 't nilD, pathakh to open ~ T "1E)D> ^aphar to number - T b) "7D^» lamad to learn - T c) HTT, khayah to live TT (PieT) p1^, tsiddek, to declare innocent (314, b). 1^'», yilled, io a^sis^ in child-bearing. Pp, kinnen, ^o make a nest (p, ken, nest). 1BV' i^ipper, to throw dust (i^aphar, dust). d) ^Tvi^, sheresh, to root out [the form will be explained hereafter], 3i3t, zinnebh (to injure the tail=:) to rout the rear- guard of an army. e) 'PpD, sikkel, (1) to stone, (2) to remove stones from afield. l2 112 The Regular Verb. [ch. 8. 319 ^^^^ is the Passive of Piel : e. g. ^^D, to steal; Pi el, to steal; Pual, to be stolen. 320 In Piel the proper and literal signification of a word is often retained, when Kal has adopted a figurative one, the former being the stronger and more prominent idea: e.g. J^H)1 i" T T Piel to stitch up, in Kal to heal; i^')3,, Piel to cut, to hew out, Kal to form, to make; H^Il, Piel to uncover, Kal to reveal. TT 321 Piel is also found intransitively, but only in poetry, as an intensive form, as JiriH, frangi; nDD, to be open. 322 The Perfect of Piel has frequently Pathakh in the final syllable instead of Tsere: e. g. "T3J»^, to destroy; l^li^, to break in pieces. This occurs especially before Makkeph, and in the middle of a period, when other words immediately follow; but at the end of a period Tsere is the more common vowel. Some verbs have Segol, as IJl"^, to speak; "133, to atone; D213. 'o wash. 323 «) Tlie Imperf., Infin., and Imperat., when followed by Mak- keph, generally take Segol in the final syllable *. h) With Vav cunv. we have also 7Z5pK1 for ^LDp^^l- Instead of n^b'^pPi are found such forms as nj/L^p-Tl- 324 c) The Infin, absol. has the marked form 7bp (as lb^, casti- gando); and in Pual, 2^^- But more frequently the form 7tOp is used. 325 In Piial, instead of Kibbuts, is found less frequently Khamets- Khatuphf {e. g. Uli^'O, dyed red). 326 The Partcp. Pual sometimes occurs without the prefix t2; it is then distinguished (like the Partcp. Niphal) only by the Kamets in the final syllable (e. g. Tlpb, taken). * In the \st pers. sing. Imperf., besides 7tOp^^. there occur also (very seldom) the forms H'lTi^, ")^Di»i- vtv; •• T •• t It is merely an orthographic variation, when Shnrek takes the place of Kibbuts, as "7;'V- <^ 4J Piel and Pual, 113 Vocabulary. To seek J to try to get, ^pH) bikkesh. Fill {Kal not used). To restore, repay, recompense, D^^j U^p> shillam, shillera (Piel) ; [(shalam), to be at peace, &c.]. To seek early, ^fl"^, shakhar - T (denom. from shakhar, the dawn). To overthrow J to pervert, ^0, 5alaph, in Piel. To separate, "F"13, parad. Niphal, to separate oneself; to be separated. To lie, ^T3, cazabh (both in ~ T Kal and Pi'el). Knowledge, JH^'l, dai^ath (pro- perly an inf.). A scorner; a scoffer, V^, lets, partcp. of Y?)'? (v), to scoff, mock. Sevenfold, W^D^^^, shibh- • - T : • i^athayim (prop, a Dual). Thus, p, cen. Lifo> D'^TT, khayyim. Evil, V-j, rai> ; and nP"), ra- : T T ^ah,fem. (as abstract). Favour, ]i^") (hw), ratson. Wickedness, jl^^l (w), rish- )?ah (rashai?, to be wicked). Not {to be), ]>i^* {constr. ]>>j»), ay in (constr. en). Folly, rh^'i^, ivve'leth. Mischief, ^Dl^, i^amal. T T Lip, n3'^> saphah. Dual b"'J13'^j s'phathayim. • - T ; A witness, *TJ?, i?ed (strictly a partcp. from •7.')^) : decl. 1 . Truth, faithfulness, \^'D^, emun (decl. 3, g) ; ish ^mu- nim (a man offaiihfulness=) a faithful (or true) man. To wash [D^3], cabha5, in Piel and Pual. To be or become clean, "IHD^ •• T ^aher. 127 * This particle (properly a substantive, denoting nothingness, nought) always comprehends the substantive verb {to be). l3 114 The Regular Verb. [CH. 8. 328 a) Exercise 31 (Picl). *T\V'^ Ult^ 'M:hl2r\ 1 1 ha-m'lammed adam dajL^ath n;;*) ^i"»^i D^'^n'? npi:: T T •• - : • - : 'tt : ^Q:^ 10' " rS^-l-^ C]Jpph : jiiDBrrri -i^t T[^b> 1 1 :i:^"tt: n:}n"^D^ 13 T :• •• • T 'r\^'rh i2p_Q rNt 14 Dnpap} 1(3 ^rt/iiD d^d^v (/?). 2 bikkesh lets khochmah, vaayin(jt?). 3 y'shallem shibh- i^athayim (/;). 4 cen-ts'dakah i-t^L i rkhayyim um'racldeph rai^ah I'motho. 5 shokher /6bh y'bhakkesh ra-ts6n. G rishi\ah t'^alleph kha//ath. 7 kha^/aim t'raddeph rai^ab, v'etb-tsaddi- kim y'shallem-fobb. 8 I'tha"- vah^^ y'bhakkesh niphrad. 9 ivve'leth adam t'salleph darco. 10 i^amal siphtehem t'dabber'nah. 11 libb'cta y'dabber tahpu'choth. 12 i^ed *munim 15" y'chazzebh. 13 damo, hinneh, nidrash {p). 14 en m'kabber lliheramah. 15 cibbe5 bayyayin rbhusho ubh'dam-i?*nabhim siithoh. 16 v'chibbastem bigdechem bayyom hashsh'bhi))i u/'har- tgm. h) 1. Their clothes shall be washed on" the third day. 2. Foolishness perverteth our ways. 3. We will seek ^^ wisdom and knowledge. 4. Wisdom will not pervert the ways of men. 5. I have washed my clothes. 6. We will wash our clothes. 7. She has washed her clothes, and is clean. 8. We have washed our clothes, and are clean. 9. Having washed his clothes. 10. They were sought-for. * Knmets in pause. f ' One who is separated,' or ' ivho separates himself [(rom man- kind in general).' This is the subject or nominative case. §*•] Piel and Pual. 315 The Short Paradigms of Kal, Niphal, Piel, and Pual. IFerf. 2 Inf. cstr. 3 Imperat. 4 Imperf. 5 Partcp. iKal ka/al k'tol k'/ol yik/6l kbtel 2 Niphal nik^al hikka/el hikkaiel yikka^el mktal 3Prel ki^^el kattel kattel y'ka^^el m'ka//el 4 Pual kii^al ku«al (none) y'ku//al _ xn'kuttal 6 Past 329 partcp. ofKal. ka/ul Vocabulary. Soul, person, t^H)5> ne'phesh (decl. 6, 8 ; naphash, to respire). Bounty, gift, nD"l3,. b'rachah (ne'phesh-b'rachah, person of bounty =: a bountiful per- son) ; baracb, to bless. Lo I ]n, ben. Understanding, ^2i'\D or p^^V, se'chel or se'cbel (decl. 6, a 2) ; sachal, to act wisely. According to, ''37, I'phi (7 and ••S the stat. constr. of the irregular peh, HDj « mouth). To praise, ^^H. hillel (Piel oi [halal] to be bright, clear). Hope, rbTyr\ (a w), tokhe'- leth i!^TV, in Piel, to hope). To draw, "?[ti;Q, mashacb (Piel, 330 to protract). Disease, TDU^, makh*leh ; .rhn^{a), liiakh'^iah {rhn, T -: - T T to be worn J to be sick). Rebuke, JinDixH («wy), tocba- khath ; yachakh, to prove, to rebuke. To hide ["IJID], satbar (Pual, to be hidden, to be secret). To cover, forgive, expiate, "1H)3> capbar. — T Bone, D^y, i^e'tsem (in pause, i?a'tsem). Report, ny-")D^(w), sb'murah; T ; sbamai'', to hear. Love, 7\2.'^t^, ab''bbab(w). Dust, 13^, rapbar. ^^ Some segolate nouns with vowels e-c are not declined 331 like melech (malcbi, &c.), but like sepher (decl. 6, b), siphri, &c. Se'chel (or sechel) takes sichli. 116 The Regular Verb. [CH. 8. Exercise 32 (Pual). 332 a) '{p)\^nn HD-'.n-^sj 1 T \ : T t; v|.- : (p) u^t' Y^iii pn:i ]n 2 T -; - T T \ : : y\v "i3p; np.J^'i. "rpra s nyvjii^ 10 :*nit^ iTi^ 9 TT : T t; - -'% T ,r D:a3 i^an 13 ns);;3 ! 1 ne'phesh-b'rachah th'diish- I shan(;>). 2 hen tsaddik baarets ' y'shullam (;;). 3 I'phl sichlo I y'hullal-ish. 4 ne'phesh kha- j rutsim t'dushshan ip). 5 to- I khe'leth lu'mushshachah ma- ' kh*lah lebh. 6 shomer "donav y'chiib'bad (p). 7 ^obhah to- chakhath m'gullah meah'^bhah m'A-utta reth (;j). 8 b'khe'sed ve^meth y'chiippar i.\avon. 9 shiiddad sadeh. 10 sh'mii- i^ah ^obbah t'dasshen- i^atsem {p). 11 shammah kubbar Abhrabam v'Sarah ishto. 12 v'shuppach daraam cei^aphar. 13 habbe'ggd cubba^r. h) 1. Our fields are wasted. 2. This (is) the place where '^ I shall be buried. 3. The righteous {pi.) are recompensed in the earth. 4. Those who observe (partcp.) tlieir masters are ho- noured. 5. The iniquity of my ])eople shall not be purged. 6. The river in winch '^ the clothes are washed. 7- Lo! the fields of the city are wasted. 8. Are thy (inasc.) iniquities purged ? 9. Shall not your {fern, pi.) clothes be washed? 10, Mercy, by which iniquity shall be purged. 11. Mercy and truth, by which iniquity is purged. 12 Thy mercy, by which my iniquities are purged. * M'gullah is fern, partcp. Pual from galah, a ver1) Lamed He. In this sentence /obhuh is the predicate, the copula (= is) being omitted. ^5.] HipMl and HophaL 117 Chap. VIII. § 5. HiphU and (its passive) HophaL a) The characteristic of Hiphil is a prefixed hd or 333 hi, and *- inserted after the second radical. b) From the Infin. ^''^pH are formed the Imperf. and the Partcp. ^''b|p^, ^''?i?'P. for ^'^l^D'.' c) In Hophal (as in Pual), the Infin. is of the same form with the 3rd pers. sing, of the Per- fect ; and in its other forms follows the general analogy. In the 1st and 2nd pers. Perf. the ^- falls away, 334 and Pathakh takes its place. See the Paradigm, Ap- pendix D. The Yod (which is not found in the Aramaean or Arahic) 335 does not appear to be an essential characteristic of the form, but it has arisen out of a shorter vowel. The marks of this conjugation are, therefore, in the Perf., 336 Imperat., and Infin., the prefix H; in the Imperf. and Parlcp., the vowel under the preformatives, which in Hiphil is Pathakh, in Hophal, Kibbuts or Kamets-khatuph. Meanings of Hiphil.'] a) It is properly causative of Kal (and in this sense 337 is more frequently employed than Piel). b) When Kal is transitive, Hiphil takes two accu- satives. c) Frequently Piel and Hiphil are both in use in the same signification (as ^Zl^^, abhad, to perish; Piel and Hiphil, to destroy)-, but generally only one of them is found, or they have some dif- ference of meaning: thus "T33, cabhed, to be heavy ; in Piel, to honour; in Hiphil, to make heavy. d) Intransitive verbs merely become transitive e. g. ntO^, to bow (intrans.) ; Hiphil, to (trans.). 118 The Regular Verb. [ch. 8. 338 The causative and transitive Hiphil is employed in Hebrew for the expression of notions which other languages express by intransitive verbs. Thus, any change in a man's habit of body was conceived m Hebrew as the result of personal agency, j and rej)resented as produced by the individual himself: e. g. ! ^D^, Hiphil, to become fat {properly to produce fat) ; pVH and \i2i^, Hiphil, to become strong (properly to develop strength) ; i C]JO^, Hiphil, to become feeble. The same analogy applies j to "11^;^, Hiphil, to become rich (properly to make, to acquire, \ ~ T riches); also especially to words which express the taking of a j new colour, as ]^3,bn, to become white, &c. Moreover, states \ or conditions, become, in the Hebrew mode of concej)tion, acts : j e. g. ti^^'*)nn, not, to be silent, but properly to keep silence , (silentium facere, Plin.) ; ^^^lin, to lead a quiet life. In such | cases there is often an ellipsis, as ^■'lO'TTj io deal well; JlTf^^il. ; to do wickedly, properly to make good or bad (sc. ^31"^, VDT^j I which are also often expressed). | 339 a) These remarks apply also to Denominatives, i. e. the verb i often expresses the notion oi producing or putting forth, \ what the original noun denotes, e. g. ^^T^n> to put forth roots; ]"'1p(l> to put forth horns. ,j b) Hiphil also expresses the actual use of a member, as '{''T^}^T> to listen (properly to make cars); ]'^]l)7'n> to chatter, to j slander (after the same analogy, properly to make tongue, to ; use the tongue freely). \ 340 The signification of Hophal, as of Nijjlial, may . sometimes coincide with that of Kal : e. g. p'y, potuit, \ Imperf. Hophal, ^mtens fiet, i. g. poterit. ) 341 It is only the Perfect of Hiphil that always retains the *»_ of j the final syllable (in 3rd pers. sing, and plur.); on the contrary, i the Infin., Imper., and Imperf. frequently take TsTr^instead of it (in Chaldee the usual form), although usage generally makes a distinction between forms with i and c. Tsere is in this case ! only tone-long, and hence in the lengthening of the forms it .j 'becomes vocal Sh'va, and, with gutturals, is changed into ■ Pathakh. §5.] Hipliil and Hoplial. 119 The Infin. absol. has generally Tsere, with and without Yod, 342 as ^'^pr\, 123a T'oii^rr*. The Imperat. but seldom takes the form ^'^\^T)p; instead of it 343 are employed the shortened and the lengthened forms ^ZOpH and 'rh'^h\>T\. The first takes Segol before Makkeph f. In the Perf. are sometimes found the forms IJo'^DrT, we have 344 reproached, and ''/^7^i-3^^, I have soiled {with. J^ as in i\ram3ean). In the Imperf. and Partcp. the characteristic H regularly 345 gives place to the preformatives, as ^''tOpV b'*lDpD, but not to prepositions in the Infin., b^l^pub, because their connexion with the ground-form is less intimate than that of the pre- formatives. To both rules there are some few exceptions. ^" The tone, in Hiphil, does not fall on the atFormatives 346 !l, rT_, and *»_. They take it, however, in the Perf. when Vav T conversive is prefixed. In the Passive {Hophal) Perf., Imperf., and Partcp. u (\) is 347 found in the first syllable as well as o (t), bl^'pT], but not so often in the regular verb : e. g. 23ti^n +• The Infin. absol. is distinguished by (••) in the final syllable. 348 Of the Infin. constr., as given in the Paradigm, there happens to be no example in the regular verb. The Short Paradigms of Kal, Niphal, Piel, Pual, r^ Past 'partcp. of Kal. kaful 349 HlPHII , AND a. OPHAL. \Perf. 2 Inf. cstr. 3 Imperat. 4 Imperf 5 PaHcp. \Kal kafal k'tbl k'/ol yik/51 ko/el 2 Wiphal nikM hikka^el hikka^el yikka^el nik/al 3 'Piel ki//el ka«el ka^^el y'ka^/el m'ka//el 4 Fual ku^^al kii«al (none) y'ku^al m'kii«al 5 HipUl hik^il hakiil hak^el yak/il raakm 6 Hophal hok^al hok/al (none) yok/al mok/al * Unfrequent exceptions, in which the form with T^ere stands for the Infin. constr., are found in Deut. xxvi. 12; xxxii. 8. t The form of the Partcp. with (••) in the Sing, is doubtful (Isa. liii. 3). // X Verbs "jB have m constantly, as liirT- 120 The Regular Verb. [CH. Vocabulary. 350 To be holy, II^lp, kadash. -' T To bend forward, ^p'^, sba- kaph (in Hiph. to look). To act prudeatly, 72 D, sfichal — T (in Hiph. to be wise, partcp. wise). To hide; to treasure up, IH)^, ' - T tsaphan. To hearken, unto, yHJT) (in - 't Hiph. with ]f^, ozen, ear = to prick up the ear to; to incline the ear to = attend to). To huwjer, ^yi, rai?ebh (in Hiph. to cause to hunger; to starve). To devise, ^^11, khashabh. — T Heaven, D^'^^. shama'yim • - T {constr. ^I^"^). Doing; deed {oi man, in a bad sense), Tlb^bv {^), Tlilsih T • -; (J^alal). Now, nnV. i^attah. T — Profane, PliPT. khfineph (usually translated hypo- crite). Cor/i (separated from the husk), 13. (d), bar (barar, to sepa- rate). Root, ti;^'^, shoresh (pi. U^''\1}111}, shorashim, with Kamets Khatuph instead of Khateph Kamets). From above, 7^^*D, mimma- ral. From below, Jinr^D^ mitta- khath. To shame; to hurt, U/3y ca- ~ T lam (in Piel). A lamb, '1D23, ce'bhgs. Wife; intelligent, 1^30. nie- bhin. A prodigal, ^7*1?, z6\e\ (partcp. Kal). Lot, 'p-lii), goral. T Powerful, U^':iV> i^ats^ra. T To eat, ^Di^, achal. - T Flesh, ")^<::;, sh'er(decl. I, a) To strip (off) ; to flay, ^tB, ~ T pasha^ §5.] Hiphil and Hophal. 121 Exercise 33 (Hiphil). opr insn D^n'i^^m 14 b-viiiii mt^: D^;inD 15 T^p:i7 t^tD^i^sn Dn^yg :vai cabhad (in Hithp. to show oneself honoured; to boast oneself). To lack, "IDH) khasar. - T To relax, HE)"!, raphah {to T T hang down the hands, SfC. Hithp. to relax oneself; to be slothful). Service; work, HDJ^/D. m'la- T T I chah (laach). To be known or recognised, "liDJJin. hithnaccer (nacar, inus. is to be strange: the notion of contemplating, re- cognizing, &c. comes from that of looking at anything as strange). To place [2T], yatsabh (in -T Hithp. to stand firm or up' right). Companion, friend, ^1, rea)?, > Servant, slave, "T2V» y^'bh^d (l^abhad, to work). Possessor, lord, ^^21, bai?al * . Work, bb^!2, ma^'lal (only in pi.) a, from 77^. — r Pure, "jyt or ^[T, zach or zach. Mean, TT^n. khashuch (pi. D^3li^n); khashach, to be dark. Garment, b'*V^, m'i^iUmaral). * Before an adjective or participle denoting (piality, ba^al denotes the possessor of the quality ; so that it may be translated by • one who is.' See E.^ample 3. ^ §6-] Hithpael. ]27 Exercise 35 «) :Tn an-)i DD"vin 1 -r V- ; . TT-:,-: -:i r T T • ; '- ri^rii 6 : ^^n/i>^ rs* ^^ (Hithpael). 1 hithrappe* 6'r'habh rei^e- 3G0 cha. 2 toh\i nikleh v'i^e'bhed 16, mimmithcabbed vakh"5ar- lakhem. 3 gam mitbrappeh bhimlachto akh hii" rbha:L^al masbkhith *. 4 gam b'ma)^*- lalav yithnaccer-nal^ar, im- zach, v'im yashar poi?*16. 5 rai?, rai? yomar hakkoneh v'ozel 16 az yithhallal {p). 6 khazitha ish mahir bim- lacht6 liphne-m'lachim yith- yatstsabh (p), bal-yithyatstsebh lipbnekh^shuccim. 7 camma- yim nishpacbti v'hithpar'du c61-i.>atsm6thai. 8 vayyith- pashshe^ Y'h6nathan eth- hamm'i?il "sher i^alav. h) 1. Has be not boasted ? 2. Did not tbe king strip bimself of the robe that was upon him ? 3. The kings will strip them- selves of the rohes that are upon them. 4. Strip thyself of thy garments. 5. Their bones separated themselves (= were out of joint). 6. Do not boast. 7- He who is diligent in his work is better than he who boasts. 8. The kings wi]l boast. 9. Those who stand before a king will boast. 10. To boast-myself {inf. consir. with 7). Chap. IX. Vej'bs ivith Gutturals. § 1 . Verbs with Pe guttural. The gutturals usually take a Khateph (36) instead 36] of simple Sh^va; a peculiarity which causes several * 5, 3. 128 Verbs with Gutturals. [ch. 9. (361) changes In those forms of the verb in which one of the radical letters would regularly take Sh^va. 362 For verbs with a guttural for their Pe (or first radical), the following are the principal changes : a) Where the first radical of the regular verb would take a Sh^va (without any preformative), a Kkateph is substituted : usually (-:) Khateph Pathakh. Thus in the perfect of Kal the 2nd persons plural become i^PT) Qj^i^l^^- b) In the forms that take a preformative, the first radical of the regular verb takes silent Sfi'va, and closes the syllable. In a verb Pe guttural the preformative usually retains the same vowel that the preformative of the regular verb has, and places the Khateph of the same sound under the first radical. Thus for p^ we should have c\ Since, however, i and u have no Khateph of their own sound, the Khateph of the same class (60, 61) is used: i. e. the Khateph of the e-sound [Khateph Segol) for i; that of the o-sound (Khateph Kamets) for o: and the vowel of the preformative is changed into the short vowel from which the Khateph is derived. (See Paradigm E.) Hence the changes will be (if we take FT for the first radical and H for the preformative of the verb Pe guttural) : 363 Regular Verb. hak- hik- hok- huk- pil pH pH pH Verb Pe guttural. ha-kh" he-kh« hu-kh" ho-kh" nrj lirT UT} ViT] 304 Sometimes, however, the first radit-al (especially if H) retains the silent Shhrn ; but then the pre- formative takes the same short vowel that it would have taken if the first radical had taken its Khateph: § 1.] Pe Guttural. 129 e. g. imrs (takhmod, not tikhmod), t:^2n^ (yekh- (364) bash). Niph. l^'BT}'! (nehpach), to change oneself; Hiph. Tpnn (hekhsir), to cause to fail. The pupil should observe that the characteristic ni-, hi- of 365 Niphal and Hiphil passes, respectively, into ne, he in verbs Pe Guttural. When an accented afformative [i, ah, u) is added 366 to forms like "t?^^^ "T^^^' the last vowel becomes moveable Sh'va, and the Khateph of the guttural is changed into its homogeneous short vowel : "tp??''» npJJ''_ (ya;^amdu) ; so HUTJ^l ne^ezbah. she is for- saken. There is, however, also a harder form that changes 367 the Khateph into Sh'va: e. g. ^'^^rv, PIH.^; but also Of the Infinitive, Imperative, and Imperfect of Ni- 368 phal, where the first radical would regularly be doubled (hi\ikdtel, yikkcitel), this doubling is omit- ted, but compensation made for it by using Tsere for the vowel of the preformative "TDP'' (yej/amed). a) In the Imperative the vowel of the guttural is often changed 369 into Segol. h) The Imperfect A begins regularly with the vowels e-L (-Tyr-), or (with the hard combination) e {yi). In verbs Im- perfect the pointing e_i (v; •••) is rare. c) In Hiphil and Hophal, Vav conversive of the Perfect, by throwing forward the tone, causes a change of accent, and then e_i {vr--) is changed into fl__2 (^y^). Thus rnr^V^ becomes /niD^m (hei?^madta, v'hai?»- T : -v:iv T :--:i-: madta). d) In the Perfect of Hiphil e_i is sometimes changed into e_", and in Perfect of Hophal o_f into 6— (itt^ into -~., and t:T into ^t") ; the short vowel, supported by Metheg, being extended into the long vowel of the same class. 130 Verbs with Gutturals. [CH. 9. Table of the tense-roots and normal forms of TDV, to stand. Kal. 370 Perf. 3 s. i)amad i^am'dah i^'madtem' Niphal. Hiphil. Hophal. nei>^mad (vrp:-) he:i^'mid (ttt) ho^^mad nej^emdah hei^^midah h6i.''6mdah ne^'^madti he)?«madti hor-madti I/iJin. constr. JJ^mod ahsol. i)am6d hei^amed nai'^mod hai>*mid hai?"ir)ed hoi'°mad Imperat. i^^mod hei^amed )>imdi " he:L^am'di ha'^'med ha-«raidi (wanting) kh^zak kliizki Imperf. A) yai^*m6d yei?amed ta^^mod tel^amed taram(li(2/.)teramdi e:i)^inod (I) ei^airied (1) tar^modnah tai;'»mednah yai^'mid tai^^mid tar^midi ai?»mid ta>'mednah yoi^^mad t6P"mad toi'^omdi oi^'^mad toi'^'^madnah (or) B) yakhmod takhraodi yekb^zak tekh^zak tekhezki ekh^zak tekh^zaknah Partcp.act. i>omed pass, i^amud nei^^mad mai^'mid moi^*mad Verbs Pe Guttural (not including those with Pe Aleph). *r|bn halach To cast out or C^lil hadaph away " "*" 371 To walk To kill, to slay ^I'lH harag To overthrow, '?|3il haphach ruin ~ ^ i To devise To be dry, to y^H kharabh be dried up, to "^ be desolate Tobreak down, DIH haras destroy ~ "^ 2tn khashSbh To desire, to "TltDH khamad covet ~ '' §••] To train up To cease, to forbear To pass by * To pity, to spare To draw out To be strong, violent To gird To be dark To want To be ashamed To search Jealousy Heat, rage Man (vir) Verbs ivith Gutturals. To bind up "TJ^n khanach I ^nn khadal ■- T P)7n khalaph ^r2n kharaal - T y^n khalatsf p\r] khazak ")^n khagar r\]i)n khashach IDH khaser ["I3n] khaphar [-ipnjkhakar To search out, explore To stand To dispose, to set in order To be deep To pass (a river, &c.) To help To sum To shut To leave 131 ^D^n khabhash (371) 'tV^n khaphas ~ T IDjr i^amad - T TJ")P i^arach [pDP] i^amak - T [irVl^azar ")IDP i^a/ar [")^*jr]i^atsar ~ T a?jr ^azabh T : '• T •• ^2l 'tt n^i^^ Vengeance Desire Trouble, distress Enemy A charge il")^^? Maid-servant HDh^ Ox nit^ To vow 112 Gain, profit '^'^3. As, according as 1'^'i^'^ kinah (deck 12, b); kinne" (Piel), to be jealous. khemah (deck 11), for y'khemah (w) fr. yak ham. ge'bher (also "husband, warrior) ; gabhar, to he strong. nakam (deck 4, a) ; nakam, to avenge. havvah (havah, to breathe ; to be). tsarah (d w) ; tsarar, to tie up. oyebh (properly [5, 1 ] fr. ayabb,/o hate). mishme'reth (a) ; shamar, to keep. amah (irr.). shor (pi. sh'varim), deck 1. nadar. be'tsai^ (batsai^, to break; to gain). (=:lit. as what, secundum id quod). * Piel = to change, as a garment ; Hiph. to change. t Niph. to be delivered. X Piel, to crown. 132 (37 1) River, the Nile By Young cow City End, limit Boundary, Verbs with Gutturals. -)^^> y'6r. b'Jli^ etsel.; mD parah. • T D^ip katsgh. b^2!\ g'bbul (gabal, /oiownc?). [CH. 9. Exercise 36. [Sentences with X prefixed, are not complete sentences.] 372 a) iih^ inrji^n tm^^p i : VAT --: t;'. ikb 2 : upi Diu bS^ni : Y':'nj n"iiiD pn^ 3 -)H"i 'iti^:^ "t:)3d T3^^ V • V -:|- 'at • ' v: I ■ ■ : - : A V - - t '^DV ikb 7 : Dp;n''?i^ A-T : • " : : • : - t : 1 kinali kh*inath-gabher (p), v'lo yakhmol b'yom nakam. 2 lo yari^ibh Y'hovah nephSsh tsaddik ; v'havvath r'shai^im yeh'doph. 3 tsaddik raits- tsarah nekh<'lats(jo). 4 vayyom^r Shaul b'ruchim attera laYho vah ci kh^maltem i?alai. 5 X lah"- doph eth-col-oy'bhecha mippanecha ca'sher dibber Y'hovah. 6 lo-i^'zabhtein eth-"khechem zeh yamiin rabbi m i?ad hayyom hazzSh ; lish'martgm Sth-mishme'reth initsvath Y'hovah ^lohechgm. 7 lo yiichalf hanna'i?ar lai*'- zobh dth-abhiv. 8 v'shachanti b'thoch b'ne Yisrael ; v'lo ti?'zobh eth-i?ammi Yisrael. * Other reading : QO^")^. t From yachal, to be able (5, 4). §1.] liDB'^in; "^^^l^rj P^i?^"''? ^'^K-j?!! D^?n3ni D;i^n-]:p •iDDi^^p^ ^^'"i^!'? -riiaj^n i-t: T : :Dn:iD Y"l^i3 nynn pin-") •|t; • ' V V : T x|T '— .•:|-.— TM^-} 19 ':nK";n 'n^V '^-^ Pe Guttural. 133 9 nahar yekh^rabh v'yabhesh. (372) 10 vihoshuai) hekh'^rim eth col-yosh'bhe hai' ai. 1 1 hakh*- rem takh^rim otbam lo- thicbrotb labem b'rith. 12 lo- tbakhmod esbetb rei?g'cha v'i'^abhdo va^matho v'sboro vakb^moro v'chol ^sher I're- i^e'cba. 13 kb'^noch lannai^ar i>al-pi darco. 14 ci tbekhdal lindor lo-yih'yeh bh'cha khe^*. 15 v'gam biyrushalaim hei^*"- mid Y'hosbapba? min-hall'- viyyim v'haccoh^nim umerashe haabhoth I'Yisrael I'misbpaf Y'hovah v'laribh, 16 mah- betsai? ci nah^rog etb-akhinu ? 17 v'hara)>abb hayab i?al col- p'ne haarets ; vayyiphtakh Yoseph eth-col-^sher ba- hem vayyishbor I'Mitsrayim vayekh^zak barai'^abb b'erets Mitsra yim (p). 18 vattai?*mod'nab etsel bap- paroth i^al s'pbath bay or. 19 v'eth-baram bei^^bbir otbo lei^arim miktseh g'bbul- Mitsrayim v'i'"'ad-katsebii. b) 1. He will not bave compassion upon me. 2. Tbis city sball be desolate witbout an inbabitant. 3. Tbou sball not covet tby neigbbour's bouse. 4. He will not desert bis people. * * There shall not he.'' f ' Every thing in which there was corn J' X Tbe nora. is a/em. noun pi. {the cows). N 134 Verbs with Gutturals. [ch. 9. (372) 5. The queen will not desert her people. 6. They deserted their people. 7. Ye (/.) deserted. 8. We have not deserted our God. 9. I have not deserted this city. 10. The deserted ones (m). 11. Ye (m.) shall not covet your neighbours' vine- yards. 12. By coveting. 13. From deserting. 14. Being coveted (/.). 15. I will not desert this city. 16. Will ye (/.) desert these great cities ? 1 7- A man shall leave his father and mother. Chap. IX. § 2. Verbs Ayin Guttural [g^). 373 1. a) The middle radical, being a Guttural, of course, takes a Khateph where in the regular verb it has SJi'va. This is almost always —-:, except after 6, when it is naturally tt. b) This rule holds good also of those persons of the Im- perative of Kal, where the second radical of the regular verl) has Sh^va. The guttural then takes — , and the preceding vowel conforms to it; that is, is "=". Regular. Ayin Guttural. ki/'lu (^itrOp) ^a^-'du iXlVV) : '• -:r 374 2. The /w^;e//(?c/Mi^fZ/ey4 prevails throughout; the Imperative also has a: but the Infin. constr. retains the (the retention of which in Imperf. and Tmperat, is a rare exception). 375 3. In the heavy (or dageshed) conjugations {Piel, Pual, Hithpael) the general rule for compensation w^ould require a lengthening of the vowel, to com- pensate for the Dagesh, which the guttural should have, if it could. But— 37(5 a) After — , the characteristic Dagesh is usually un- compensated in the case of H, H, and ^, and sometimes in that of ^^. The Dagesh thus omitted is said to be implied or implicit [Dagesh impUcitum) . b) After —, the Dagesh is ahvays merely implied. c) After vj "^ve find both (1) Dagesh im2)liedy and §2-] Ayin Guttural, 135 (2) a compensation of the Dagesh by a lengthen- (376) ing of the vowel in _?_ . d) Middle "1 always requires the compensation: i. e. a lengthened vowel. 1 Kal 2 Niph. 3 Viel 4Pual 5 Hithp.hithbd Per/! I Infiti. constr. I Imperat. shakha? sh'kho^ sh'khdt _ t _ nishkha^ hishshakhe^ hishshakhe/ ] berech bdrech bdrech i borach borach j (none) i (as perf.) j (as perf.) Imperf. | Partcp. yishkhat shokhe^ yishshakhe^ nishkha^ y'bhdrech m^bhdrech y'bhorach m'bhorach yithbdrech mithbdrech 377 Past Partcp. of Kal, shakhu^. 1^" But besides Perf. Piel berech, such forms occur as zi^am, berach, clkhesh. 378 (Normal Forms.) Kal. Niphal Perf, shakh^/ah nishkh^/ah Imperat. sh'kha/, shakh^^i hishshakhe?, hishshakh*"di thakhtai v'lo^ mai^Mii karsuUai. 1 1 ach * Or pr\'^by Tsere being changed into Segol on account of Makkeph: ^]^, in it, i. e. in the sea. f She was, 3rd sing, form of hayah. N 3 138 Verbs ivith Gutturals. [ch. 9. (382) Vn^'i*^ t'^'^ ynO'' U'Tf)^^ \ "^lohim ylmkhats rosh oy'bhav I . . - I - • . IT T -:i- kodkod sei?ar mithhallech ba'shamav. 12 timkhats ragl'cha b'dam I'shon c'la- bhe'cha meoy'bhim minnehu *. 13 hu" "sher cihen babbayitli "sher-banah t Sh'15moh W\ IJpn^ U :D^.If^nU i |,jy>,^shalem. 14 cekbatban "^^^^ n2"in r^^^ 15 :nSi3 y'cahenp'er. 15 v'zehhadda- UPii^ t'lpb Urh n'i^^n bar "sbgr tai^-'seh X lahem : 'h irTD*? I I'kaddesh otbam I'chaben li. Parse the following forms, and explain their for- mation. nn^p •OIl'9 '•^V''. -^'^ "^™'? -"^^ ="^™' b) 1. He will be hungry. 2. The virgin, the daughter of Zion, mocks at thee (m.). 3. Playing {partcp.f. sing). 4. I will choose their ways. 5. Thou (w.) art cleansed. 6. Thou hast cleansed. 7. 1 will waste. 8. We tasted of the honey. 9. They tasted. 10. Ye (/.) tasted. U. Who has tasted? 12. To taste. 13. Being tasted (m.). 14. The honey that I tasted. 15. To choose the ways of death. 16. We shall be hungry. 17. We were hungry. 18. Ye {m.) were hungry. 19. Who is hungry? 20. Who has mocked the daughter of Jerusalem ? 21. Rebuke ^^^ the lad. * From it z= some of it : I'shon is nom., and the verb 'shall get' is to be supplied {Hengstenberg.). f Built. X '^'^0" ^'^^'^^ ^0' ^ 3.] Lamed Guttural. 139 Chap. IX. § 3. Verbs Lamed Guttural. In these verbs either a) the final syllable keeps its regular vowel, with 383 fur^tive Pathakh under the guttural : b) or the final syllable exchanges its regular vowel for Pathakh. a) i, 6, u (the strong immutable vowels are always retained). b) b is retained in the Infin. constr. o (being merely lengthened by the tone) is changed into a in the Imperat. and Imperf. of Kal. c) 1. e (when it is the regular vowel of the last syllable) is sometimes retained^ sometimes changed into Pathakh. 2. Usage, however, makes a distinction in these forms : thus In the Partcp. Kal and Piel r]b}D, vhtlp is the exclusive form, and the full Pathakh first appears in the constr. state TrW, th^'D- In the Imperf. and Infin. Niph., and in the Pe//. Infin. and Imperf. Piel, the form with a is employed at the beginning and in the middle of a period ; that with ^^, at the end, and in Pause : e. g. V]^]' it is diminished, and ^"^ii] ; J?)51% he cleaves, and _^|p.^)» V^^' to swallow. It may further be observed that the Infin. absol. retains Tsere, the Infin. constr. does not. The guttural here has simple Sh'va, whenever the 384 third radical regularly takes it (because being Sh'va quiescent it can remain under a guttural) : e. g. I^rhli)- But in the second fem. sine:, of the Perf. a T : -T ^ helping -Pathakh takes its place : e. g. -Hn?^- 140 Ve7^bs with Gutturals. [CH. 9. 385 [A compnund Sh'va (or, Khateph) occurs in (1) a h\v examples o{ plar. 1 of Perf. when the tone is thrown forward; (2) before the suffixes cha, chem, chen]. I 1 Ferf. I 2 //// cstr. 1 3 Imperat. ^ 4 Imperf. I 5 Partcp. 386 1 Kal shalakh sh'loakh jsh'lakh yishlakh 'sholeakh 2 Mo^a/ nishlakh hishsha- ihishsha- yishshalakh nishlakh lakh shillakh shallakh lakh shallakh ly'shallakh (none) y'shullakh 3 Fi'el 1 i 4 Paal 'shuUakh ^shullakh 5 HijoAi/ hishliakh hashliakh hashlakh yashliakh 6 Hoph. Ihoshliikh hoshlakh (none) jyoshlakh 7 Hithp. hishtal- lakh Ihishtal- lakh jhishtal- lakh yishtallakh m'shalleakh m'shiillakh mashliakh moshlakh mishtal- leakh Partcp. Pass, of Kal, shaluakh. Infn. absol. {Kal), sha- loakh ; {Niph.), nishloakh ; {Piel), shalleakh ; (Hipkil), hash- leak h. Kal Perf. shalakh, shalakhat (2/.) ; and so in the other con- jugations, -akhat ybr akht. Imperat. sh'lakh, shilkhi, &c. Imperf. nishlakh, tishlakh'nah ; and so in the other con- jugations, -akhnah. Hiphil Imperf. yashliakh, tashlikhi, tashlakh'nah. Vocabulary. 387 To forget, nD^> shachakh. - T To hear, ^DI^^, shama:i^. To forgive ; to pardon, TwDj 5alakh (with 7). To be satisfied, ^'yV, sabhai? *. To swear, ^2^, shabha)^ f (prop, by seven victims). To sacrifice, n^T, zabhakh. To expire, ^^]|, gavai?. To devour, ^^2,, haW. — T To sow, plant seed, ^")T, zara)'. ~T To slay, HltO, Zabhakh. To bud, niB. parakh. — T To rend, ^^p. kara)?. To open, TIDB, pathakh. * In Hii)liil, to make satisfied; to satisfy. t In Ni[)hal, to bind myself by oath; to sivear, promise with an oath. § 3.] Lamed Good (or ill) deed; benefit y b^'O^, g'mul (decl. 1). Iniquity, \\y^ or yS]^, i?av6n or i^avon. Diseases, D''^^'1/^i^> takhluim (khalah, to be sick). Eagle, '^t}, ne'sher (decl. 6, a), pi. c. nishre. Youth, Dn^V^ n'^urim. f^'D'll}, shakaph *. To look, J ';; _, , _ I ZD21 nabhaf. Groaning, HpJi^. ^nakah {constr. enkath). Guttural, 141 Prisoner, *T>Di<» asir (asar, ?o (387) T;^i«, p-1, dak (/. T]\r]y dak- kah). Full, ^hl2, male", /. HK^Q (male", 1^j1> tor (bur, to cleave), pi. boroth. Height, Uy^t2) marom. 1. The word *>1^ is twice construed 'mouth' in the English 388 Bible. Gesenius construes it * age ;' the Septuagint, ' {thy) desire ' (sTriQviJtiav). 2. nJllDDj t'muthah (death, from maveth), only in ben T t'muthah, a child of death = one who is condemned to die. Exercise 38 T : V • :- • :iT 1 bar'chi naphshi eCh-Y'hovah, 389 v'al-tishc'khi col-g'mulav : hassoleakh l'chol-i?*v6nechi ; harophe" * Pchol-takh^lua- y'chi : hammasbiai? baWobh i^edyech; tithkhaddesh can- ne'sher n'i^uray'chi. 2 ci- hishkiph mimm'rom kodsho * In Hiphil. t Who healeth, rophe", partcp. Kal act. of rapha. 142 Use of the Accents as Stops 389) u't^m mn'' wip DnsQ ' • - T • T : :'t : • 'n nn^b n>DNt npjii^ [CH. 10. Y'hovah ; mishshama'yim el-e'rets hibbit ; lishmoa)? Sn- kath asir, I'phatteakh b'ne th'muthah. 3 vattibhlai^'nah hashshibb''lim haddakkoth }^2^ J^^^ ilipin D"*^!!'^'!! | eth shebha^ hashshibb°lim )|V Ml N''m DTi'h r]tbt ]E):im 5 • T T- - - : 1 T T • •-• — I . . — — habb'rioth v'hamm'Ieoth. 4 f'bhoakh te'l)hakh. 5 ubhagge'phen sh'loshah sa- rigim v'hi" ch'pborakhath. 6 vayyashabh R'libhen el- habbor v'hinneh en-Yoseph babbor ; vayyikrai^ eth- b'gadav. b) 1. And Joseph took an oath of the children of Israel. 2. The land which Elohim swore to Abraham, to Isaac, and to Jacob. 3. And Jacob expired. 4. He will offer-sacrifices. 5. I have planted the house of Israel. G. Every herb seeding seed. 7. Ye shall sow the land. 8. Ye shall not sow the land. 9. Seed is sown. 10. The seed sown. 11. I have sown my seeds. 12. To sow seeds. 13. Thou wilt sow thy land. 14. The opened door. 15. I will open the door. 16. Opened if em. sing.). Chap. X. § 1. Use of the Accents as Stops^, (Before tlie ])upil jiroceeds to the JVeak Verbs, he may pay some further attention to the accents, which will henceforth be added. For their names and forms, see 85.) 390 in the Hebrew Bible the verses are usually divided into two major divisions. The end of the whole verse is marked by Silluk with two dots (j) called So{)h Pasuk. The middle of the verse, or, as it is properly, the end of the first major division, is marked by Athnakh or Merka Mahpachatum. * From Dr. M'^Caul's Primer. § 1.] Use of the Accents as Stops. 143 Genesis i. 1. W^rhi^ ^^")l /T'li^i^^"!:! Vreshitb' baia' Elohim 391 A* ■•■: jTT v.' •• : in the beginning created God ; y"^>i>n J^K") DTjIi'n Di^ ^'■^^ bash-sbama'yim v'eth baa'rets ' v|TT j"i 'v-T - f the heavens and the earth Psalm ii. 1. D**!^ ^^^"1 H^b lam'mah rag'shu goyim'? A* a:iT TTV ^vhe^efore rage peoples : DH'-I^n'' D^Di^Sl ul'ummim yeh'gu-rik? I |. ;|v . %^ ; and nations imagine vanity Psalm iv. 5. D3^3l?^Q"^l^ DD^.^'^n. ^"lI!Di^ imru bhilbhabhchem j;.al-mishcabh- •/:-:• - •••;-;• : • speak in your heart upon your bed . rt'in ^^^"T1 chem v'dommu. se'lah. • • VK " : and be still. Selah. Proverbs x. 1. llDb'^} "hllJD mishle Sh'lomoh ; ' ; " : • the proverbs of Solomon ^S^-j-fJ^'^l Q]3J^ 1^ ben khacham y'sammakh abh AT : TTv 'j- a son wise rejoiceth a father r\:i^D ^DS ]2^ "bhen c'sil tugath - . . ' .. and a son looiisn the heaviness : ^^^ immo I • of his mother The lesser subdivisions are marked by the dis- 392 tinctive accents of less power^ as in Gen. i. 1. In the begimdng, God created. After the word beginning there is a pause. This pause is expressed by a Tiphkha. This system of interpunction is^ however^ much more accurate than ours : for it not only de- notes a pause, but shows whether the word is con- nected with, or separated from, the following word in the construction. Thus i^''I£/^i"}4 is separated from the followins; word t^ll, whereas this word t^ll has ~ TT ^ JT T a conjunctive accent, because the verb is naturally connected with its nominative D\'1/>^. This latter word DTt^K has again a distinctive, which separates it from the following word. It might appear that a 144 Use of the Accents as Stops. [cii. lo. (392) pause after the word God is misplaced ; but it is the strictly logical division of the sentence. 1. The fact of creation. 2. The things created. It also lays the emphasis upon God as the Creator. In the be- ginning, created God the heavens, and the earth. In the second example, the verb and nominative D^iD y^^T) are connected in the same way by a con- junctive accent. But in the second member, the similar connection between the verb and accusative is noted by a line between the words, which is called Makkeph. In this case the first word I^H'' has no accent. The small perpendicular line to the left of the Segol is called Metheg (48), and shows that •• is a separate syllable. ^9^ In placing the accents, the first step is to place the Silluk at the end of the verse or sentence, just as in English the full stop is the most important. The next, is to place the Athnakh, and then the various minor distinctives. The whole verse is looked upon as a territory under the dominion of Silluk, though his immediate domination extends only to Athnakh. The dominion of Athnakh extends to the beginning of the verse. The nearer any minor dis- tinctive is to Silluk or Athnakh, so much the less is its distinctive power. The accents are not selected arbitrarily, but have a regular order of consecution. Silluk has next to it Tiphkha, then Zakeph. Athnakh takes next to it Tiphkha, then T'bhir, then Zakeph, then Segolta. Segolta takes Zarka Kbhia. Zakeph takes Pashta, Rbhia, &c. 394 The Conjunctives or Servants are also subject to rule, ac- cording to which they have their pecuUar masters — Munukh serves Athnakh Segolta Zakej)!! katon Mercha serves R'bhia Zarka Silluk 'i'ijjhkha Zarka T'hhir Darga serves T'bhir. Kadma serves Goresh. CH. 10.] Use of the Accents as Stops. 145 Esther vi. 1 — 4. n:^ ni-r: i^^hn rh'b3, 2^ ^ Plf >^'^^K .u^^^"" °l^'f ^' /^'f*^ (^^'^J a-; VT :iT - t;j-- Id the night the same fled the sleep liamtne'lech vayyo'mer Thabhi'" eth- of the king and he said to bring the se'pher hazzichronoth' dibhre' book of the records the words of hayyamim' vayyihyu'nikraim' liphne' days and they were read before 2 hamme lech, yayyimmatse' cathubh' the king, and it was found written ^sher higgid' Mord'chai' ral-Bigtha'na that had told of vathe'resh sh'n^ sa'rise' hamme'lech and two chamberlains of the king mishshom're' hassaph' ^gligr of the keepers of the threshhold who bikshu lishloakh yad bamme'lech sought to send a hand on the king 3 akhashverosh. vayyomer hamme'lech Ahasuerus. and said the king mah-nai^»sah y'kar ug'dulah what hath been done honour and dignity I'Mord'chai yal-zeh, vayyom'ru to for this and "they said na'^i^re' hamme'lech m'shar'thav the young men of tRe king his servants lo-na'r^sah' J?imm6 dabhar'. not have been done wnth him a thing. n:i;j^ 3ihD 2^:iD^i :'?T^Dn X J"T — 'V I V - Wp3, ^ti^ nDH '^')mr2 T hbtb •>T : 'st: t-:|- - np^^^ jirbv ^^^i?^ T :jt: 'v V - <---:r "»»>JT^ ^v* TT^^^^ "ir^yi'l "T 4 vawomer hamme'lech mi bhekhatser ';^V|v 'r- ''vvv- V >- aud'he said the king who in the court v'Haman and Haman lakhatsar to the court '^b VDrr-^m Y;?n-^j; was come be th -hamme'lech hakhitsonah lemor of the house of the king the outer to say lamme'lech lithloth eth-Mord'chai to the king to hang Mordecai yal-hayets asher-hechin upon the tree which he had prepared 16. for liim. Note 1. V. 2, over the Vav in t^^")^^^^^ there is an asterisk. If the reader looks to the foot of the page (in a Hebrew Bible) 395 146 Use of the* Acceiits as Slops. [cii. lo. (395) he will find the Hebrew letters ^"1 i^^^^, which signifies that in another copy the last syllable of Ahnsuerus is written without a Vau. i^^^^ are the initials of NJ"inj^ NHDl another copy. T tt; T T ; T Note 2. In verses 3 and 4, the "ijyQn has in appearance two accents, but in reality only one. Pa^hta being postpositive, must be [ilaced over the last letter. But as not the last syl- lable, but the penultimate has the accent, it is repeated in order to show the tone-syllable. Note 3. In verse 3, the word •iSDhi'^l, and in verse 4, the word nilTnil has two diflferent accents. In such cases, the T J- - last of the two shows the tone-syllable. The other is only Euphonic. Note 4. In syllables like r\y^£} in verse 1, the accent is J": placed as if Sh'va formed a syllable. This is also the case with the compound Sh'vas. Ruth iii. 5. "Ili^J^ bli n'^bi^ IDi^ni vrittomer eleah col asher- ■•• ": J T A-" ••• \.- and she said to her all that |vv:iv V- •• !• ; I Hum Wilt say tome 1 will do 396 After the fifth word in this example, there are two points without consonants with a circle over them. By looking to the foot of the page, you find the consonants belonging to them '^bi^> which, with the points written in the text, make '•7^^, e-lai, to me. This is said to be k'ri {read), though not k'thibh (written). The transcriber had omitted the three consonants ; and thoujih the Jewish tradition was, that they ought to be a part of the text, they did not dare to put them in, but noted them at the foot of the page. This examjile shows what is meant by the words k'ri and k'thibh ; k'thibh is written, and ai)plies to the word as it stands in the text; k'ri signifies read, and refers to the reading at the foot of the page, which the Jews prefer. Verse 12, there is an example of a word written, but not read. D^ ''3 D2r2i^ ""^ nr>^1 v-rattah ci .^miuim ci ;• t; T J- T -: and now that it i*- true that oi^ '7^^i ^''''\ ^""''\'' • AT v." a rcuccnuT aui 1 CH. 11. § 1.] Verbs Double'Ayin. 147 Here the fifth word QJ^ has no vowel. The masoretic note 397 at the foot of the page is >")p t^") yr\'2, k'thibh v'lo k'ri, written, hat not read. Here the two letters were put in, and though the Jews consider them as no part of the text, they suffer them to remain. These two examples serve to show the scrupulosity with which the Jews copied their manuscripts. The word 7J^^ also has a reference to the foot of the page, which tells us, that in other copies the Gimel has not got a Dagesh. Chap. XI. § 1. Verbs Double Ayin [VV], Example '2'2D, ^abhabh, to go about Paradigm : Appendix E, [pp. 17, 18. Short Paradigms. 1 Kal 2 "Niph. 3 Poel* \Perf. 5abh nasabh sobhebh 2Inf.cstr. sobh hissabh sobhebh 4 Imperf. 3 Imperat. sobh hlssahh ^obhebh y'sobhebh i Poal .<;6bhabh 56bhabh| (none) y'sobhabh 5 Hiph. 5 Partcp. yasobh (yi^sobh) *6bhebh 398 yi55abh hesebh 6 HopJi.hixsBbh. ha^ebh husabh nasabh m'sobhebh m'^obhabh mesebh musabh heusebh yasebh (ya.9sebh) (none) lyusabh (yiissabh) Past Partcp. of Kal, ^abhubh. Normal Forms. — (No irregularity in the other conjugations.) 399 1 Kal 2 Niphal 1 Per/. sabh sab'bah [j sabbo'tha f nasabh . j nasab'bah [ 1 n'sabbotha 3 Imperat. 5obh 5ob'bi 5ubbenah hissabh hissabbi hissabbenah 4 Imperf. yasobh ta*5b'bi t'subbenah yissabh tissabbi tissabbenah yis5obh tiss'bhi tissobh'nah * This conjugation and its Passive are called here Poel, Pool, instead of Piel, Pual, because they have the vowels o — e, o — a, instead of i — e, u—a. o 2 148 Verbs Double Ayin. [cii. 11. (399) 3 HipMl { 6 Hoph. 1 Per/. hesebh he^eb'bah h'sibbotha liusabh hu^ab'bah hClsabbotha 3 Imperat. hasebh ha^eb'bi h»5ibbenah (none) 4 Imperf. yasebh ya«5ebh ta^ebbi t'^ibbenah yusabh yiissabh tu^ab'bi tusabbenah 400 Imperf. with Vav conversive (Kal) vayyasobh ; (Hiph.) vayyasSbh. a) The principal irregularity of these verbs is this, that before an ajf'ormative the two identical letters of the root are pronounced as one, doubled by strong Dagesh, and that, even when a full vowel would regularly stand between them : J)2LD for -innD. b) When there is no afformative, the final conso- nant is tlirown away: ^p (since Up is im- possible). c) Those forms are not contracted, which contain unchanp:eable vowels, or a Dagesh forte; as, ni3D, ania n^D. 401 The stem, which is thus rendered monosyllabic, takes, throughout, the vowel which the full form would have in its second syllable ; as, indeed, even in the regular verb, it is this vowel that characterizes the form : e. g. 20 for 23p ; Infin. 2D for I12p ; Hiph. 2DT\ for HHDil (comp. note on 5). 402 When the afformative begins with a consonant {1, D), a vowel is inserted before it, in order to render audible the Dagesh of the final radical. This vowel in the Perf. is i, in the Imperat. and Imperf ^t c. g. -HIZp, Imperf. n^^^Or) (sabbo'tha, t'Anlbbenrdi). 403 The prcformativcs of Imperf. Kal, Perf. Niphal, § 1.] Verbs Double Ayin. 149 and of HipMl and Hophal, which, in consequence of (403] the contraction, stand in a simple syllable (2D!^ in- stead of 32' D^), take, instead of the short vowel of the regular form, the corresponding long one. Hence, hnperf. lb for inp;; = 2iip;; Imj^erf. Middle A, np; for nilD] ; Hiph' aDil for nHDH, hifin. 2pn for nnprr ; Hopk. npin for 22pr\. This long vowef (ex- cept •*) in Hophal) is changeable t^ There is still another mode of constructing these forms (the 404 common one in Chuldee), which consists in a sharp pronunciation of the first syllable and a consequent doubling of the^rs^ radical by Dagesh: e. g. Imperf. Kal 3^^ for 23,D^ Imperf. Hiph. QJ^> for D/DJlS Hoph. r\'y^ for /li^D''. These forms do not usually ... - - .. - . .. take Dagesh in the final letter on receiving an accession, as np\ they bow themselves (from T'lp), as if the doubling of the first letter were a sufficient compensation. They therefore omit also the vowels T and >_ : e. g. n^7^F\ (from 77^). The T : - • - T Paradigm exhibits this form by the side of the other in Imperf. Kal. a) The tone has this peculiarity, that it is not 405 thrown forward upon the formative syllables beginning with a vowel [dh^ it, i), but remains before them on the stem-syllable, as -IHD. 5) » Before the other afformatives, it rests upon the t Many of these contractions are founded on more ancient forms than those of the regular verb. Thus ^D** stands for T 23,0'') with a under the preforraative, as in the regular Arabic form (Hebrew 7^p\ from 7lbp'^ ; the a appears also in verbs Pe guttural, especially in verbs Pe Aleph and Ayin Vnv). Hiph. 3Dn for 321Dn has in the contracted stem-syllable the shorter and more original e (like the Aram. 7tOp?^> see Ges.) ; Perf. jSiph. 2,V2 for 23D3 ; Imperf. Niph. 3p> for ^2B'^ • comp. 'pZDp\ See Ges. o 3 150 Verbs Double Ayin. [ch. ii. (405) inserted syllables 6 and i^i) e (except in the case of Df), ]ri, which always take the tone) ; and in consequence of this the vowels of the word are shortened, as 13,Dn, H^^HDD : nUDH, but /liion. T • ~; 406 Instead of Piel, Pual, Hithpael, and in the same signification, is found, in numerous verbs of this kind, the unfrequent conjugation called (from its vowels — e) Poel, with its Passive and Reflexive : e. g. y2^)^> to treat one ill, Pass. bb^V, Reflex. bb'^VPiT} (from "p^i^): in some is found the rare conjugation (so called from its •form and vowels) Pilpel, as 7^/11, to roll; ^^^^Jin, to roll oneself (from ^P^^) ; Pass. VtVt. to be caressed (from VV^)' They are inflected regularly like Piel. Additional Remarks (for reference). 407 ^) ^'^ Kal.'] Some further peculiarities are : 1) Perfect with Kholem. 2) Infin., Imperat., and Imperf. with Pathakh. ^^ The Kholem of the Injin., Imperat., and Imperf., being a changeable vowel, is written defectively (with a few ex- ceptions principally in the later writers), and shortened into Kamets Kkateph or Kibbuts, whenever it loses the tone; as Infn. "H, to rejoice (Job), with suffix *)pn2l, ichen he founded; Imperat. ''J-HIj P^^y ^^> Imperf with Vav con- > *!' ^ vers. ^D'^l* ^vith suffix D"^^1. ^^ W* them waste. T T- "T ; b) Niphal.'] Besides the most usual form with Pathakh in the second syllable, as given in the Paradigm, there is another with Tsere, and a third with Kholem (analogous to bl^p> N"1^. b'D'^)t extending through the whole con- jugation : (1) e.g. Peif. bp2 (f^lso 7pi). »' is a light '••T '-T thing; Infn. DDH. '0 melt; Partcp. D^SJ- wasted away. (2) T?22, they are rolled together; InJin. absol. TI^H. *? ^ I.] Verbs Double Ayin. 151 plundered: Imperat. -IDSHj take yourselves up; Imperf. (407) c) Hiphil and Hophal.'] (1) Instead of Tsere the final syllable has sometimes Pa/AaM, especially with gutturals, as IDH; Injin. ')2r\f io cleanse; (2) but also without a guttural, as plH; Piur. !)3DrT; Partcp. ^)if2, shadowing. The Imperfect with retracted tone takes the form ^p\ he protects; py^"], and he rolled. "T- It may be remarked in general, that verbs Double Ayin are 408 very nearly related to verbs Ayin Vav, as appears even from the similarity in their conjugations, which are parallel throughout. In form the verb ^^ is generally shorter than the other (comp. ^b** ai^d D^P^ ^Dtl and D'^pH). In some cases they have precisely the same form as in the Imperf. convcrs. of Kal and Hiphtl, in Hophal, and in the unfrequent conjugations. On account of this relation, they have sometimes borrowed forms from each other : e. g. p")> for p>, he rejoices. Along with the contracted forms there are found, especially 409 in certain conjugations and tenses, others which are wholly regular : e. g. Perf. Kal TtB, to plunder, Plur. J)UB, IJU^ (also •l^iO) ; Infin. 22V and 2D » Imperf. pn\ he is gracious, elsewhere ]h'^. Hiph. ]'^y^n, Imperf. ^^^S\ he will rejoice (which is never contracted) ; Partcp. D'^Dt^D* astonished. Some- times the full form appears to be emphatic. Although the aflformatives here do not attract the tone, yet it 410 is thrown on them when suffixes are appended, as !)3.D> ''1")3,D. Before Dagesh, Kholem in the Imperf. becomes Kibbuts, less frequently Kamets-Khatuph ; Tsere in Hiph. becomes Khirik (after the analogy of n^ZD/l. JlillDn) ; the preformatives then, in place of the full vowel, take Sh'va : e. g. ^J^D"** inbo^; Hiph.h2D^. \ : . .. . ; 152 Verbs Double Ayin. [CH. 11. Vocabulary. 411 To curse, ■^"l^<, arar. To take prey ; to sjwil, plunder, TT3.. bazaz. To roll, bbia, gaiai*. To cover, protect, pH, ganan. To be weak, ^7^1, dalal. To be silent, DQl. damam. - T To be clean, ^JT. zachach. To be wounded, f 7711. khalal. To be hot, DDH. khainam, ~ T To be gracious, pH. khanan. To be broken, DDn, khathath. - T To beat (down); crush; to rout, r)D2y crahatb. - T To be completed or ended; to cease, Ql^n, tamaai X. To lick, lap, ppb, lakak. To measure, '^112^ madad. ~ T Tomelt; to faint, DDD. miua^f. — T To be in bitterness, 1"1?3. marar. -T To feel, ti^t^lD. masbasb. Tofiee, IIJ, nadad. To turn oneself; to go round; to surround, Q^^D. «abbabb. To cover, conceal; to protect, IDDj «acbacb. To cast up a mound, a way, — T To tie up; to bind, 11^, tsarar. To be light; to be lessened or abated, ^^p, kalal. -'t To shout (for joy), ]y), ranao. To err, ^^it, sbagag. ~ T To carry off; to spoil, 77]l}, — T shalal. To be desolate; to desolate, DO^j sbamam. - T Desolation, y^fl, kborebh. For ever, HiJJ/. lane'tsakh - VT (netsakb,asuljst.=5/r2i, tsir. Bed, f n^D, mi«ah(an)||. I 2,'2'p'O, mTsbcabb(n). * Also ^"^t not used in Kal : in Pocl, to affect painfully, itb b- t 111 IIii)b. to begin. Probably tbe first meaning is to open. \ \n \V\\)\\. to complete; I o finish. § Regular in many forms: as are nddad and several otbers. II IS'a/ab, to stretch out; sbacbabb, to lie down. § 1.] Verbs Double Ayin. 153 Supplication, ^!)jnn> takh^niin Cpl. im or 6th) ; khanan, to be gracious. To pierce, ^Dl, dakar. Only (son), T»n\ yakhid. To mourn, TS)D, 5aphad. "j (41l) Mourning, ^3DD> mi*ped(a). ( First-born, 1021. b'chor (ba- ch ar, to be early). A dog, 27i)> ce'lebh. ]^D (for n^X^D. in^ew^, purpose), occurs only with 7 (]i?D7. /or fAe sake of) ; with suffixes, ''^VDa /o^ ^"2/ 5«^^> ^c. Exercise 39. «) D")DT "Tn^* r\tn:i aniri to:)9 ninnn ^iDn i *n^iKn 1412 jt;* \.-t t : a- t )' t l -):-r tt; ;- •• |t I T • - "t: at- - J • V V- V. T|" ' •.•|TT ;- •• -v — '/- I • J"-; \t;». r :- I -.j- J... ,. «r ^ . ,. . • ;-: jt; I "T i: J" J-: • T ••-•:- it:^ i- t t j:|t: 'att V -; J" v-" r-; • -:j- : " ~ < • ")mn-^;r nans rbjr nam Tn'^n-'^v iddq3 v^r ' v|TT V. • ; : I I a: • V j-T V : :*'^n:i? "TH ]vr2b^ ^':ivr2b mk-^n '^'vr^'bi^ Tii-]:! 10 :^^^^^"D:) ^D^"rix D^n'^sn T [T - ' : |T V JT : - * This difficult verse is best explained thus: (1) the nomi- native, 'the enemy' (which some consider the vocative), must be considered as a nominntivus pendens, just stating, who are the subject of the discourse. The enemy =■ as to the enemy, &c. (2) In ndthashta the Psalmist is addressing Jehovah. (3) hem- mah (they), which is construed in our version ivith them, must be considered nom. to dbh'du understood. t Infin. constr. of hayah, to be, with 7 prefixed. 154 Verbs Pe Nun. [ch. ii. (412) h) \. The enemy {pi.) plundered the city. 2. The city will be plundered. 3. The great cities were plundered. 3. Thou shalt not plunder this city. 4. Those who are shearing his flock. 5. I am very weak. 6. My eyes are weak. 7. ^Ve are very weak. 8. Our brethren have made-faint our hearts. 9. They flee {regular) from me. 10. Does not the door turn upon its hinge ? Chap. XI. § 2. Verbs Pe Nun. \ 413 The principal anomaly of this class of verbs is that the Nun, when it would close a syllable, is assimi- lated to the following consonant. Sometimes also an initial Nun is dropt. 1 414 I, The assimilation of Nun takes place (a) in the Imperfect of Kal. The second vowel is most \ commonly d^ sometimes d: e occurs only in i yitten (=: yinten), from nathan, to give ; (b) in I the Perfect of Niphal; [c) throughout Hipldl and Hophal (which has always Kibbuts). II. a) The Imperat. and Infin. constr. often drop the ; Nun (by aphmresis), as gash/o?- n'gash, t^^ for b) The Infin. then, however, usually appends the ' feminine ending eth (the accent being on the ' j9em^//.); after a guttural, rt /A: as /1*I^5 (go'sheth), j PiVl (ga'^rrith), from nagay, to touch. \ c) The Imperative has usually «, but sometimes e ' (as in ten, give, from nathan). It frequently takes the lengthened form with appended h : i\^i\\\, give up [p^P). \ 415 The characteristic of these verbs, in all the forms which have a preformalive, is Dagesh following the preformative in the second radical; but, as we shall see, some forms of verbs Pe Yod, and even of verbs double Ayin, resemble them in this. 410 Tlic Nun is nearUj always retained in the forms enumerated in L, 11., when the second radical is a § 2.] Verbs Pe Nun. 155 guttural (as yinkhal, he ivill possess) . In other cases (41 6) the retention of it is comparatively rare, never oc- curring in Niphal, and very seldom in Hiphil and Hophal. Similar anomalies are in part exhibited by T]\>7 417 (lakakh), to take; Lamed being assimilated or dropt like the Nun. Imperf. yikkakh. Imperat. kakh (seldom I'kakh). Infin. constr. ka'khath. Hoph. Imperf. yiikkakh. — Nipkal, however, is always nilkakh. Nathan (IJHJ), to give, is peculiar in assimilating 418 the fitial as well as the initial Nun. Thus^ nathatti, teth, for nathanti^ te'neth {Infin. constr.). — On the Imperf. see above, I. Example ^;ij, nagash, to approach: see Appendix E, p. 20. Short Paradigms. [The regular forms are in italics.] Perf. Inf. C07istr. Imperat. Imperf. iKal nagash ge'sheth gash yiggash 2 Niphal niggash hinndgesh hinndgesh yinndgesh 3 Hiphil higgish haggish haggesh yaggish 4 Hophal huggash huggash (none) yuggash Partcp. 419 niggash maggish miiggash Fast partcp. of Kal, ndgush. Infin. ahsol. 1) nagosh, 2) hinnagosh, 3) haggesh. Imperat. (Kal) gash g'shi gashnah (Niph.) hinnagesh hinnag'shi hinnagesh'nah (Hiph.) haggesh haggishi haggesh'nah The other tenses are conjugated regularly. See Paradigm in Appendix E. On the Jussive and Cohortative forms of Verbs. Jussive.'] The jussive is a form of the Imperfect, 420 which occurs only in the second and third persons. In verbs Lamed He this form is called the apocopated Imperfect, because the shortening consists in the 15G Verbs Pe Nun. [cii. ii. (420) cutting off (apocope) of the final He ; from these the name is extended to all verbs. The jussive is often not distinguished orthographically from the indi- cative ; v)here it is, it will be pointed out. The Itn- perative is also apocopated. 421 Cohortative.] The first person of the Imperfect and the persons of the Imperative sometimes take a para- gogicHe (ah); this syllable has the tone wherever the afibrmatives 11, i would have it, and therefore shorten the final vowel of the root, just as those terminations do : hence for cshmor we have eshm'rah CmQ^K). T ; ; V As ah appended to an ace. denotes direction, so here it denotes a direction, tendency, or effort of the will. Vocabulary. 422 To guard, watch, preserve, l^ii natsar. - T To deliver, 7ii^, natsal*. — T To come near, to approach, ti^Jl nagash. -T To bite, "ryti^J, nasliach. To tellf [IJIJ, nagad = /o be -T clear F]. To look, JOll nabha^J. - T To touch, ^^^, naga)? (constr. -T with 21, &c.). To forsake, It^JO^, na/ash. - T To give, ]Jli, urahan. - T To fade, ^21 nabhal. To kiss, p'^i^^, nashak. i To overtake [J';i^J], nasag (in;'" ! Hiph.). " I j To take, ni)b, lakakh. i ! "^ L - - I I To overthrow, P)7D» «alaph (in> I Piel). '" |j I To tear, C^IID, Paraph. i I ' - T J I A lion, nh^ and H^^i^, Ti ; and aryeh. To crush, p")3, parak. ] A serpent, t^pf^, nakhash | T T (deck 4). Extremity; heel, 3pi?, i^akebh (deck 5, c: but taking Khirik under tlie first rad. in constr. pi. instead of Pa- thakh). * In Hiphil: in Kal, to strip off; then, to deliver. t In Hiphil = to 7)iake clear (higgid). Jin Hiphil : once in Piel. i §2-] Verbs Pe Nun, 157 Those two = them both, Uri^'yp, \ To tremble, ^^^, rai^ad. (422) sh'nehem (numeral in constr. I To smoke, ]^y, i^ashan. state with suffi... 204). g^^^^__^ ^^"^^.^^ ^j,.j_j._ ^^^_ Right hand, V?J\ yamin (decl. ^^^_^_ ^t,^^ ^,5,-1, (j^^, g, ' To divide J to sing hymns, ^f^]. Left hand, yikti^, s'mo]. zamar. ""^ Exercise 40. 0) : nsrsn s^^DJi ny^ni ^ii-Dn y^n npn 1 423 IT - ;••- : T : •; VAT T a • 'tt:v ^'t^'iin 3 • : ^>ijQ ]>Ki p^s •'ti^sj Ti'^n^:) n^t5'"]3 2 •|T- -;v VT •• ; : -;- A" J" ~ w -; • T Vr2't2 "hikr^iv:! my:rni^ bi^yi)'^ bi^nwo iVdu Dns)i^ v' : : • f • T :j— i tt< it- v — a" t: • |T I*-; • - T ;•- 'a* J" T -V : - - '|'T|T a* |T ; V - V •• : ATT : jt" j* • |Tv:|v; j«T)v V— AT : • - ' VTTV ITT ; . T : • : A : - j-- : ••: tt; i-:i- a T-:i-: a- jt : •inbj;') ir^:;! ]r\'^ 1 ins -i::;^^ D^D-^:'7D"'?:ir b^m i"T ; • I ' ■" :• 3 13 153 Verbs Pe Nun. [en. ii. (423)1 hjt^d ')^^ TOij^n-p ^i^^^ "m^^ 15 t'^ii^-K^ JTJITJV-; TT-:iT- T^T jT |- VT" ;- '|VT' ' V T i •• ; V -'i)-T T • pi:^^ "lEii;'? niaD?) •'•n \n^^^ cjbn^i :iiir>') v^^^ :i\s^ ,.. _ ,.. .... •-; • y v: r TA — : 'jv -xv h) Look the way of the sea ; and he looked. 2. The kings were smitten before the children of Israel. 3. They will trample our honour in the dust. 4. Deliver thy people. 5. Tell me all that thou hast heard. 6. 'I'heir leaves shall not fade. 7. Ye shall not forsake your people. 8. I have given this garden to my brother. 9. Who told thee that thou ("wast) naked ? 10. His leaf shall not fall. Write down the Hebrew of the following forms § : Plur. 1. We will kiss. 2. 1 Ye will take. Sing. 1. I will take. 2. /Thou shall kiss thy mother. iThou (/.) shalt approach. i I Ye (/",) will pursue. 3. ( He will take. i 3. (They will trample. ^ I She will give. i IThey (/.) will take. (Imperative.) Sing. Plur. Take thou. Draw near. Draw near (/). Take (/.). * With parogngic He. t J" the Bible, 5]"^")^ X my slrengthl Another reading is i?MZ2(?. § The j)ronouns are to represent the masculine when/ is not added. §3.] Vei'bs Pe Aleph. 159 Chap. XL § 3. Verbs Pe Aleph. Feeble Verbs ( Verba quiescentia) . Example. ^'2'i^, achal, to eat : see Appendix E, p. 2 1 . Short Paradigms. 2 Inf. cstr. ?> Imperat.'i Imperf. 1 1 J^e>f. 1 Kal dchal 2 Niph. ne^chal 3 Hiph. he^chil .4 Hoph. ho^chal ^chol heachel ha*chil h6°chal ^chol heachel ha^'chel (none) yochel yeachel ya^chil 5 Partcp. ochel 424 ne^chal \ ^ , ^, (as verbs Pe ma^chll V rmff.urnJ\ yo°chal mo"ch -J (jiittural) Past Partcp. of Kal, achul. Infin. ahsol. 1) achol; 2) heachdl. Imperf. Kal, with Vav conversive, vayyo'chal : vayyo'mer. In some verbs and forms J*^ quiesces. The verbs 425 in which this regularly occurs are : /D^, achal, to eat. | JlSli^, aphah, to bake. 1t2i^, amar, to say. "7^^^J abhad, to perish. ^^^^> abhah, to be willing. In the Imperf. Kal of these verbs (of which the 42G two last are also Lamed He), and usually in ITO, akhaz, to hold, the K quiesces, with a transposition of the vowels. Hence, 15^^ (yomer) for "^b^^,^ = "^b^^.^ the form it would regularly take as a verb first guttural. (We shall see that, as verbs Lamed He, dbhdh, 427 Ciphdh have for their Imperfects yobheh, yophek.) With conjunctive accents in the middle of a clause, 42S and with Vav conversive (which draws back the tone- syllable), Tsere is usually shortened into Pathakh. This change, however, in the case of Vav conversive, is only found in achat; dmdr taking the still greater shortening into Segol : vayyomer, vattomer. (Of course, in pause the Tsere is retained). p2 160 Verbs Pe Aleph. [cii. ii. 429 Only a few cases occur in which h^ quiesces, ac- cording to the general rule, in -tr? -^, or — . It always quiesces in Tsere in the common form lemor Clbh?/'), m saying ; very seldom in Imperf. Kal. 430 In the first person singular of the Imperfect the quiescent t^ is also rejected, to avoid the concurrence of two Aleplis. This occurs frequently in the other forms also. 431 Other verbs beginning with Aleph are conjugated like verbs Pe guttural (Paradigm E.) ; and, except in KaL even the verbs above given very seldom quiesce. In Piel, K sometimes falls away by contraction. Vocabulary, t32 To kiss, ptir^, nashak (in both Kal and Piel). To burn, ")^1, ba:i?ar. — T To prove, ]rT21. bakhan. To draw-near, 21py karabh, -'t with )^al, upon = for the pur- pose o( falling upon; of at- tacking. To divide, rfyn, khalak. ' - T A little, * roi^O or JOVD, m'i^a^ or m'X'a.t (from JOVQ* ^o be ~ T small, orfeiv). Expectation, rOn^D^ tokhC'- ISth (a w y) ; yakhal, to wait, expect. Joy* TinJ^i^* simkhuh (sa- T : makh, to shine bright). Hope, expectation, Tl^pD, tik- vah (kavah, to wait for, hope in). For ever, n^'J A lanetsakh - VT (netsakh =:■ truth, perpetuity). A fig-tree, ^J^^^^, t'enah. Forvfty ■^^^n, toar (taar, to be drawn, marked). Countenance, rTSJ")D 00. raa- reh (deck 9, a) ; raah, to see. Except, Di^""'3. ci-im, {iii-si, properly quod si). An evil-doer, J?10, merai? (partcp. Hiph. of ra>ai.\ to be evil). A ^'olf, y^], z'ebh. Booty, ly, Vud. Prey, ^^t, shrdfU. * DyD3 = as a little (a little) soon. §3.] Verbs Pe Aleph. ]G1 Exercise 41. 'l^^i royDS "ij?a^-''3 * •?i")i ^a^^A^ piis^-iB "a"ip:;i^:i 2 A- J- : • J-: • I- ' V V : ; '-.:iv v - • : - r^'pp^ r\mv D\T^:i rbrr)r\ 3 on t^Din-^3 n'^^ji ni:h v'^t t'i^^ lai^^ D^2T3""iy 4 :ln^^D □^yt:^"^ :"7nD"' v:l^^ iDt:^') nns ^d^^^ ^:)^^^) n:^^ 5 n^i^ iT\: jr -: v." ; at: • J- T •• :v. j- i" -: ;• T : • <-T I : ' •• J-; V -; t j M-- ns^i -)^^J^ ns^ ^IDv >n^T byi^ tn^rr^t^!^ uwrrun )" ■ - V y; '•• a-: I- A" a v -; •••v.- j-T ;-T : V v-':r-' ■ •• : ~t <'; • iv :- "ipkn pi'iD^ nh^r rD^:)3 s : ^b^y\ r^bm hdh '»'? u^i^i 'vv- t;- j": -t:- itt; a:iT TV A- j-:i; np^i in^ D3Q ^iii^t:^ 9 •. ^"p::^ p^n^ n*nj;'7i ip ':'nN^ 'a—; T V J.- : • |TT I;..- ; V^Vt: .." ~ J D^r^^^ ^^P °?"?.^^ •''^njj^l ^^PIJ^J Q-^^l QP^n^'-n^^ i>T '> .:vT iv- v: -: ;• ;- j- • : :D\'D'' J^'^y^ -IDI^^D 6) 1. The ways of the scorners shall perish. 2. And Jehovah said to the woman, Hast ihou not eaten of the tree ? And the woman said, The serpent deceived-me*1], and I did eat. 3. Thy- way perished. 4. Then shalt thou say unto Joab, The sword * The way = as to your way. f Trusting. Partcp. act. Kal in stat. constr. from a verb Lamed He .- nDH- T T X Itto m'umah, lit. with-him any-thing = any thing that was with him, § Supply bikrobh again : karabh is construed with V (= to). 11 An oath, life of Pharaoh = by the life of Pharaoh, ^F •'J^<^'ito'^ (Irom i^t^ : Hiph. >^v^,-j). p3 162 Verbs Pe Yod. [CH. 11, (433) devoureth one as well as another *. 5. I will say, Thou "art my servant, whom I have chosen. G. The woman ate the l)read which ("belonged) to me. 7. I will go up f, and destroy the people. 8. He said to his daughters, Eat flesh. 9. All fat of ox, or of sheep, or of goat shall ye not eat. Chap. XI. § 4. Verbs Pe Yod (>3). First Class, or Verbs originally IS). E. g. ^t£^^ yashabh, to dwell. Paradigm : see Appendix E, p. 22. Short Paradigms. 1 Per/. 2 l7if. cstr. 3 Imperat. 4 Imperf. 5 Partcp. 434 1 Kal yashabh she'bheth rshebh ]^y'rash I'yeshebh lyirash yoshebh 2 mph. noshabh hivvashebh hivvashebh yivvfishebh noshabh 5 Hiph. hoshfbh hoshibh hoshebh yoshibh moshibh 6 Uoph. h^shabh hushabh (none) yashabh raushabh 43: Injin. absol. 6 Past Partcp. of Kal, yashubh. Fut. Apoc. (Jussive), yoshebh. Fut. Vav convers. {Kal), vayye'sh^bh. fKal, yashobh. I Hiph. hoshibh or hoshebh. Normal Forms. Kal Imp. shebh, sh'bhi, shebh'nah ; or, y'rash, yirshi, y'rash'nah. (Per/. hoshibh hoshi'bhah hoshabh'ta Hiphil-. Imperat. hoshebh hoshi'bhi hoshebh'nah yimperf. toshibh toshi'bhi toshebh'nah Verbs Pe Yod are divided into two, or even three, classes: (1) those verbs which have properly a J ay J * Say: 'as this so that.' HTD") ("TD; the J taking Kamets '•' T I T as coming immediately before a tone-syllable. t r^bvi^, Imperf. of nbyO')- ■•■ ~: ~ T T I In Arabic they are written with V § 4.] Verbs Pe Yod. 163 for their first radical ; (2) those which are properly (435) Pe Yod; (3) a few of these verbs Pe Yod form, in some respects, a thi7'd class inflected like verbs Pe Nun. Ycltsar ("Iji"') occurs in both classes : (1) ")^> (for l!^')), to be 436 in a strait J (2) ^^^ to form. -T {Pe Yod = Pe Vav.) Kal.] A) Infin. co?istr., Imperat., Imperf. — About 437 half of these verbs have the feeblest forms : (1) she'- bheth, (2) shebh, (3) yeshebh. 1) Imperf. In yeshebh p^,^) the second e is only- lengthened by the tone, and may be shortened to Segol and vocal Sh'va ; the e in the first syllable is somewhat firmer, and in a degree still embodies the first radical ** that has fallen away. 2) Imperat. 2^ is from 2"^], by omission of the feeble \ 3) Infin. 112]^ is shortened in the same way, and takes the fem. ending il-r.— , which again gives to the form more length and body. B) The other half of these verbs are inflected w^ith 438 stronger forms, having the Imperf. Middle A, and retaining the Yod at the beginning ; but in the hnperf. only as quiescent, or as resolved into the vowel i. Imperat. l£^T and Infin. "7D) retain the ^ as a conso- nant, but in Imperf, V^\ it is a quiescent. That the latter mode of inflexion belongs to verbs actually 439 // *)H) is shown, partly by the numerous verbs which take these forms in Kal, and at the same time have T in Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal, partly by the analogy of the Arabic. Even in the same verb are found both forms, one with, the other without Yod. 164 Verbs Pe Yod. [cii. ii. 440 a) The original Vav always appears in Niphal, HiphU, and Hophal. It quiesces in the Perf. and Partcp. of Niphal, and throughout HiphK, in Khokiti; throughout Hophal in Shi/rek: as ai^i: (for n^i:), a^^in (for n-'ii^^n), nii^in (for Z>) In the /?z^/i., Imperat., and Imperf. Niphal, ^ re- mains as a consonant, and the inflexion is regular. c) It also retains its power as a consonant in the Hitlipael of some verbs : e. g. 3^^1j"in from ^1\ 441 The other forms, with few exceptions, are regular. 442 In those forms in which Yod does not appear, these verbs may be distinguished, in the Imperf. of Kal by the Tsere under the preformatives, in Niphal, Hipkil, and Hophal, by the Vav {*), '"], ?)) before the second radical. Forms hke "y^D, i^2^, they have in common with verbs Pe Nun. Hophal has the same form as in verbs Double Ayin and Ayin Vav. 443 a) The Infin. of Kal without the radical Yod, has very seldom the masculine form like ^^, to know, or the feminine ending H- iik^ Hw, to bear, b) With a guttural the latter takes the form * D _i instead of D^r ' e. g. D^l, to know. Examples of the regular full form occur with stijfixes, nD^. ^1D'^^ 'Ibis full form seldom takes the feminine ending, as /17D'', to be able. 444 The Imperat. Kal often has the lengthening H-, as Jl^Ii^, sit : T r ; ), descend. From ^n'', 'o ^7^'^, the lengthened hnperat. is (1211. /^'"- ''3n» /^^'"'- ^Ilil, with accented Kaniets, owing to the T T • T T influence of the guttural. 44 5 a) The Imperf. of the form ^^^ takes Pathakh in its final syllable, when it has a guttural, as yiV also HJl. * Jll'?, in 1 Sam. iv. ID, is contracted to ph- § 4.] Verbs Pe Yod. 165 b) When the tone is drawn back on the penultima, the final (445) syllable takes Segolj namely, before a word of one syllable, and after Vav conversive: e. g. i^y^lD'^* ^11% ^^^\ but in Pause, 211)^') and -n^l. A — I— - c) The form ti^"l''^ when lengthened, may also lose its radical > (as •')3_J7\ ^yT>). Yet the cases are rare and doubtful where this occurs after other preformatives than •». In some stems the feebleness aflPects also the Per/. Kal, so far that the a under the second radical becomes e or t in such forms as have no full vowel under the first radical, as rmC^H"'. DFIti^lN 'Virh^ from t:^-)^ -t^\ I . . . . -T -y a) As an exception the Imperf. Niph. sometimes retains Yod: e. g. ^n^^'l. and he waited, b) The first Pers. sing, has always the form ^^^K, not •• T V In Piel the radical Yod sometimes falls away after > pre- 446 > : formative, which takes its punctuation : e. g. •inii^Il'^') for i "J — •1(11^3."'''). and he dried it up. Imperf. Hiphil, like Imperf. Kal, takes Segol when the tone is 447 drawn back. The verb "!|Sl. io go, is connected with verbs Pe Yod of the 448 first class, for it forms (as if from TJT) Imperf. ^7"» with Vav, "TJ7-1, m pause "TJTI) Infn. constr. J^j^, Imperat. "JJ^, lengthened 112b, and also ?T^, and so Hiphtl, ^"'^IH- Rarely (and almost exclusively in the later books and in poetry) we find also the regular inflexions from ^7^^, as Imperf. "TT^nS Infin. "!|7n. Imperat. pi. •ID^n ; on the contrary, Perf Kal is always 'TJ^bn, Partcp. ^7n, Injin. absol. TTi^H ; Pi'tl "^St] ; Hithpatl '^btlDn ; so that a > nowhere distinctly appears as first radical *. * An obsolete stem, ?r7'», may however be assumed, although L in a word so much used as ^7H. the feeble letter H may itself be treated like "», and so the inflexion resemble Pe Yod. Comp. 1G6 Verbs Pe Yod. [cii. 11. Vocabulary, 449 To know, ^T, yadai^ Want, poverty, '^'\'0XV2>^^^^ To hear ; to beget, 'TT, yalad. To add, S]D\ yasapli. To come down, descend, T)'', — T yarad. To profit, ^))\ ya^al. ! ~T To dwell, :i'Z;\ yashabh. To save, j;;i^>, yashc^. i -T I To set up, erect, establish, \ [D'^J]> natsabh, in Hiph. Treasure, "liJlX. otsar (pi. \ To conceal, nVH, casab. T T To withhold, "TJli^n, khasach. j 50 r. Only, "JJi*^, ach. Proud, r\li:p, geSh {pi. D>^i^). Widow, T12f2i?^, almanah. Instruction, Jl^P, IS'kakb (proj). taking speech; lakakh, to take). Adversity, n"1^> tsiirah (w), TT deck 10 ; tsarar, to bind. Corner, 1153, pinnah (d w), T • deck 10. Roof, :i|, gag (deck 8, a). Fellowship, "1311, kbe'bber. Generation, age, ")i"l or "1"1, dor or dor (deck 1). 450 Exercise 42. [Note. — The student must not suppose tliat every sentence will necessarily contain an example of the conjugation (or form) that is tlie sul)ject of the exercise.] :tnns^n b^B'' wb^M *t^p:;ji yt^> Qvjn i7\7\ i |Tv: )• --T : 'i-:::-'.-,\"T- • tv 'a- : niDO b'-irs npiii'i ;;:^-] rS^^pi^ ^by\''"^b 2 also the feel)le Pe Aleph .- e. g. '''^tJl from '^Ti^, ami oS'^ f'*o""» -T^n, //»;?(??/. /i7>/ri7, ni^n^ from la^^, and HD^'^iiV from - T T • - T T • * Nei^'kash (5,2), from i?akash, to walk perversely, ^yc, to he perverse, usually construed, who is perverse in his wuijs : ak (taking the dual strictly) he who walks unsteadily in two ways. t In one (of them) : i. e. of the two ways. §4.] Verbs PeYod. 167 : nm y^v ^'b')^ i^^"^ "i^^VJ^ ^^''^ mn*' jidi:i 3 (450) ^r\'B "^^s'i^^ DDH n^ 7 : n^r^bi^ '^Jini) nkn nin'^ A* J' : ~ TTv. J •• ITT : - J : ••-: at : /-: -a"t a" -v. t: 't|v 'j- tt: *D^ii"tD ^Jlt:^^^Q :irn:3D~^v r\2tb nib 9 :-ibv nn:^':? • t:- V V •• AT -• - v^vT i-t- tt: T - • : - : A" — : j- t •-;- ••• |t j- ni"i;::3 rhiri^ n-'Diri-'^ ?Tbn-r^"'-^y d-d'' h :'?[n^njn ; : T ; ' A- 'vjv •• : - j-T ' I'-T • : i«:i- - V— ;t : IT b) I. A fire is kindled in (2) my anger, and shall burn unto bell. 2. God caused tbe sea to go down, and tbe dry land ap- peared §. 3. Cursed ("be) the day on Q) which I was born. 4. My days have declined || as a shadow, and as grass am I dried up. 5. Abraham was eighty-six years old 51 when Hagar bare Ishmael to him. 6. He says to the temple. Thou shalt be founded. 7- The Lord fainteth not, neither is weary. 8. The youths shall faint, and be weary. 9. Write down the short Paradigms of yalad, to bear (in- cluding Piel and Piial). * W'Tl'O), t 'A house of fellowship' = a house in common, X Imperat. with Jl jiaragogic. § n^nm, Imperf Niph. of H^^")- V T •• : T T 11 "'^tDJ. Parlcp. Pass, of na/ah. ^ Say: 'at (3) the bearing {Infin. constr.) of Hagar:' the two words to be joined by Makkeph. 168 Verbs Pe Yocl [CH. 11. Chap. XL § 5. Feeble Verbs Pe Yod (continued). A. Second Class, or Verbs properly Pe Yod. See ^Z0^ ya^abh, to he good. Paradigm: Appendix E, p. 23. - T Paradigms of Verbs properly Pe Yod. 1 Perf. 2 Inf. cstr. 3 Imperat. 4 Imperf 5 Partcp. 451 1 Kal ya/abh y'tohh y7abh yi^abh yo/ebh 5 Hiph. he/ibh he^ibh he/ebh ye^ibh me^ibh Past Partcp. of Kal, ya/ubh. 452 The most essential points of difference between verbs properly Pe Yod and verbs properly Pe Vav are the following : 453 Kal.'\ In the Imperf., Imperat.^ and Infin. the radical *» is retained [Infin. 220^), being in the Imperf, Middle A quiescent as i: e. g. yhabh (^^''^j, the Pathakh of which becomes Segol, when the tone moves back, as YP!^^5 ^^^ ^^^ awoke. 454 Hiphil.'] Here the ** is retained, forming with Tsere a diphthongal e, Tp^n (for 2''^]'rT), Imperf. n*^^"!^; seldom with the diphthong ai, ay, as in ^Tli^Jj they make straight. 455 Of the Imperf . Hiph. there is an anomalous form with prc- formatives put before tbe 3rd pers. 7^7"», as ^^TV ^^ icails; /v^^^. J wail; -l/vTlj ye trai/.- once even in Imperf. Kal, 3;"T^>, from ^T. So ^^tO''^ ; this anomaly is explained by sup- posing, that the > of the simple form was superficially taken to belong to the stem. B. Third Class, or Contracted Verbs Pe Yod. 45G a) The Yod of these verbs does not quicsce in long I or e, but is assimilated like //. Some verbs are exclusively of this class. § 5.] Verbs Pe Yod. 169 b) Others have two forms ; in one the Yod is as- (43( similated, in the other it quiesces, as \>'T, to pour, Imperf. \>'l] and p^']! ; 1^*^, to form. Imperf. n^^^l and ^'^\ ; '^tl, to be straight, Imperf, ^p\ and y^\ Ver])s of this class (which seldom occur) are inflected like 457 verbs Pe Nun, for which they may easily be mistaken by the learner. AVhen, therefore, a form has not a root Pe Nun in the Lexicon, he should look for one of this class. Vocabulary To be good, ^D^ ya^abh *. -T To awake, *fp>, yakats. To suck, pj'^, yanak f . To howl, ^^S yalal. 458 — T To sleep, "J^^, yashan. a) Verbs exclusively of the contracted form : To spread beneath, y^"», yatsai> {Hiph. hits-tsiai> ; Hoph. hiits- tsal^). To burn up, Jl!i\ yatsath (Imperf. yitstsatb ; Hiph. hits- tsith). b) Verbs with two forms : To pour, p;^**, yatsak {Imperf. yitstsok ; and with '"^ Vav. conv. vayye'tsek). To form, '^^i'», ydtsar {Imperf. vayyi'tser [c. Fau cony.] "^ and yitstsor). To be straight, 'lli^'', yashar {Imperf. yishar and yishshar). To bubble-out, ^y^, nabha)? %. Joyful, TlfyV, sameakh (from - •• T samakh, to shine bright j be glad). A cure, nHil, gehah. Afflicted, i^3J, nache" {fern. hkd::). Horned, ]"1pD> makrin §. Sea-monster, ]^r\, tannin {pi. only). * In Hiph. to seem good; to please; slIso, to make good; do good. t In Hiph. to give suck; suckle. X In Hiph. trans, to pour forth. § Prop. Hiph. partcp. for makrin; keren, a horn. Q 170 Verbs Pe Yod. [cii. ii. (458) The breast, "^t, shad. Ostrich, y^>, ya^^en. A whelp, Tli), gur (decl. 1). * Cruel, "ITDJ^, achzar. To plant, ^JOl na : t - - jv ••< t t - 'j -; J -: '•- ;"j • AT : • J-: '-.-v. ;-j-: i ;- '\ — :D^'7n ni)m n:;"iD vpn 10 :du^ 6) 1. We will sleep and dream in the night. 2. Inf the morning shalt thou awake and tell thy dream. 3. Sarah gave suck to children which f«he bare unto Abraham. 4. It will be good for us that God will come down to the earth I. 5. If ye forsake the Lord, and serve a strange god §, he will consume |) * 3, 4, n. t 2- X To the earth, Hiii'^i^ : respecting the H-. see 175, c. § A strange god, 13 J TT/h^, a god of the stranger. II He will consume, ^\bD^■ § 5.] Verbs Pe Yod. 171 you according as* he hath done you good. 6, The menf shall (459) lament, and all the inhabitants X of the land shall howl. 7. Noah will awake from wine, and know what § Ham has done. 8. The potter i| formeth the vessel. 9. My people shall be taken ^, and their rulers** shall howl. 10. I will howl for Moab, and I will cry out for all Moab : joy and gladness is withdrawn from the land of Moab. 11. Ye will not form man out of the earth as the Lord hath done this f f. Chap. XI. § 6. Feeble Verbs Ayhi Vav, E. g. Dip kum, to rise up. Paradigm : see Appendix E, p. 24. Short Paradigms. \Kal 2 Niphal 3 Tilel 4 Pulal 5 HipMl kam nakom komem komam hekim 6 Hophal\ hukam ; kum hikkom komem komam hakim hukam 3Imperat. 4 Imperf. kum yakum hikkom yikkom komem y'komem (none) y'komam ! hakem yakim (none) yukam 5 Partcp. 460 kam nakom m'komem m'komara mekim milk am Past Partcp. of Kal, kum. Imperf. Apoc. {Kal) yakom; (Hiph.) yakem. Imperf. c. Vav conv. {Kal) vayya'kom ; Hiph. vayyakem. Injin. ahsol. {Kal) kom ; {Hiph.) hakem or hakem. In Niph. as InJin. constr. * According as, •^li^^^ ''inj^, after that which. t D1^^, used collectively for the plural. TT X Partcp. Kal of ^^>, to dwell, inhabit. - T § "^^^?■/^^^• ll Partcp. Kal of -)^\ "^ Pual. ** Partcp. Kal of btD, to rule. ft As— this, ')ti^'3. q2 172 461 I Verbs Ayi n Vav. [cii. Normal Forms. [Per/. kam kamah kam'ta 1 Kal \ Imperat. kum k^'mi kom'nah . Imperf. yak^lm takiVmi t'kumenah 'Per/. nakom nako'mah n'kumo'tha 2 Niph. \ Imperat. hikkom hikko'mi L Imperf. yikkorn tikko'mi tikkom'nah 'Perf ' Imperat. , Imperf. hekim hekimah h'kimo'tha 3 Hiph. hakem haki'mi yakim taki'mi takem'nah 4Hoph Perf. hukam huk'mah hukara'tah 462 In these verbs the Vav always gives up its con- sonantal power, and is absorbed by the principal vowel of the form, even when it would, if regularly formed, stand between two full vowels. Thus, in Kal Past Part cp. [kdvum z^) kiim ; Infin. absol. [kavomzz.) kom. Hence the root always appears as a mono- syllable. 463 The principal vowel of the form is the second vowel. This second vowel receives, by its union with Vav, greater extension and firmness than it naturally pos- sesses. Thus, in Lifin. and Imper. k\'dm becomes kiini (D^p) ; Pf?/. kdvam becomes kdm (the Vav dis- appearing). This firmer vowel cannot be ejected; it may, however, be shortened: as kCtm from kamtah. T\\Q Imperf . Hij)hil yixkixn (from yhk\im) is shortened in the Jussive to keni. a) The verb intrans. middle E takes in Perf. Kal the form of JID (from JIIQ), he is dead. h) The verb middle takes the form of -)ihJ (from -)iK), T luxit; t^i2l (from Ii^i3,)> he was ashamed. 464 The preformatives in the Imperf. Kal, Perf. Niph., and throughout Hiph. and lloph., which before the monosyllabic stem form a simj)lc syllal)lc, take, in- stead of the short vowel of the regular form, the § 6.] Verbs Aijin Vav. 173 corresponding long one (59—61) : e. g. ydkil/in for (464) yakom ; hekim for hikvim ; hukdm for hiikvam. This vowel is changeable, and becomes SK'va when the tone 465 is thrown forward * : e. g. with the full plural form (with n epenthetic) of the hnperf. ]1J~1?)Q'', they will die. The u in Hophal is the only exception. But this conjugation 465 is formed (in appearance) by transposing the letters of the original stem. Thus hickvam becomes by transposition huvkam, hence hukam. a) Some of the forms in these verbs arise from primitive 467 forms which afterwards became obsolete in the regular verb : e. g. Imperf. Kal, ydkiim for yakom; Partcp. kdm for kdvdm (aft. an original form kdidl). b) Those which conform to the regular Hebrew verb are, in general, the least common : as yebhosh (aft. the regular Imperf. yibvosh). c) The in Niphal comes from va (=: na) : ndkom from ndkvamj Imperf. yikkom from yikkdvam. In the Perf. Niph. and Hiph. the harshness of pro- 468 nunciation in such forms as ndkomtd, hekamtd, is avoided by the insertion of 6 before the afformatives of the first and second person. For the same pur- pose (y e is inserted in the Imperf. Kal before the termination ndh. These inserted syllables take the tone and shorten the preceding vowels, as tidkom, iv'kumothd ; hekim, h"^kimothdh ; also h^kemothd, fkumendh. (Yet in some cases the harder forms, without the inserted syllable, are also in use.) The tone, as in verbs Double Ayin, is not thrown forward upon the afformatives dh^ u, i, except with the full plural form (with epenthetic n) '\^'D^\>\ In those persons which take afformatives without epen- thesis (see 477), the accentuation is regulai;, as inpj^; so in Hophal, nppH. For the tone on T and V see 468. * Hence before Suff. !)^jp''p\ he will kill him. q3 "' 174 Verbs AyinVav. [ch. ii. 470 The conjugations Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, are very seldom tbund in verbs properly Ayin Vav. The only instance in which the Vav remains as consonant is T^, to suri'ound, the Pitl of'"T^V (but see 476). In some others ^ has taken the place of 1, as in D;p from Dip, Tf] from IT^ ; forms which belong to the later Hebrew*. On the contrary, the unfrequent conjugation Pilel, with its Passive and Reflexive {kiilel or kiilal ; Pass, kuilcd, Reflex, hithkdilel), is the common form employed in the signification of Piel, and as a substitute for it: e. g. DQ'pj to raise up, from Dp ; WOT\, to elevate, Pass. UOT), from UT\ ; 1"J1V-nrT, to rouse oneself, from "l^y. Less frequent is the conjugation Pilpel : e. g. /S/?^ ^o sustain, to nourish, from 7^'^. •471 Of these unusual conjugations the Paraditrm exhibits only Pilel and Pulal, from which the reflexive {Hithpael) is readily formed. Remarks. 472 I. Kal.'\ Of verbs middle E and 0, which in the repfular verb also have their Perf. and Partcp. the same f, the following are examples : 1) muth {tu die); Per/, meth (for maveth), me'thah, mat'ti, math'nu ; Partcp. meth. 2) bush (/o blush) ; Perf. bosh {for bavosh), bo'shah, bosh'ti, bosli'nii ; Partcp. {pi.) boshira. 473 a) In the Infiti. and hnperat. of some verbs, ") always quiesces in Kholem (as Ni:i, ^izo, "^^^^). b) In most verbs, however, it quiesces only in Shurek ; but even in these the Infin. absol. has ") in the final syllable (after the form 7iI0p). ^^ -l/tDp^ D'p. surgendo suryent. c) Those verbs which have T in the Infin. retain it in the Imperf, as KH''- T d) In one verb alone the preformatives of the Imperf. have ^Tsere, viz. ]D^^, Imperf. ^'iQt (for ]l}')y). * Having been borrowed from the Arama?nn. t Of the Perf. and Partcp. tiie usual form Dp i^ very seldom written with i^ (after the Arab, mode) : e. g. DNp- 'T § G.] Ver'bs Ayin Vav. 175 In the hnperat. with afformatives {*>iy\^, ^D^p) the tone is on 474 the penultima, with a few exceptions. The lengthened form [with H-] has, on the contrary, the tone usually on the last syllable (HD^p, mi^^^)> with a few exceptions where the word is Milel. a) The shortened Imperf. as Jussive has the form Dp'' (very 475 seldom Qip\ Dp>). "^ h) So in poetic language as Indicative, as Q"!''. 'ChF\i he, it, shall be high. "^ "^ 6) After Vav conversive, and before words of one syllable, the tone is also drawn back upon the penultima, and the last > , > syllable takes Kamets-Khatuph, as Dp'l. ^7 Dp"*- 'tt- 't 'tt d) In Pause, however, the tone remains on the last syllable, as Jlbn. e) With a guttural or Resh, the final syllable may take Pathakh : e. g. "ID* 1. and he turned aside (from "1?)D)- -T- The full plural ending un Q!)) has the tone (cf. 472 of this §). II. NipJial.'] Anomalous forms are : Per/. DJni^J3J> y^ have 4JQ been scattered ; Infin. constr. ^^"^H- *' * III. Hiphil.'] Examples of Perf. without the epenthetic i : 477 Pi^1T\, thou lift est ; TlDt^T^; thou killest ; and even DDDn (Num. xvii. 6, &c.). In the Imperat. the shortened and lengthened forms UpT}, 478 > '"T nD''pil, both occur. a) The shortened Imperf has the form Qp'', as "ID'''), that he 479 may take away. '"^ '"^•' b) After Vav conversive the tone is drawn back upon the pen- ultima, as D"!'*); '\*E)''). and he scattered. VT- ' VT- c) The final syllable, when it has a guttural or Rcsh, takes Pathakh, as in Kal : e. g. ID"). ««c? Ae removed. 176 Verbs Ay in Vav. [en. 11. (Additional Remarks.) 480 IV. On account of the intimate relation between verbs Ayin Vav and verbs Double Atjin, it is necessary, in analyzing forms, to note particularly the {joints in which these classes differ. Several forms are exactly the same in both : e. g. Imperf. Kal with Vav co7iversive; Pile! of Ij; and Poel of yy. Hence it is, that they often borrow forms from one another, as in Kal, t^H, he despised (Per/, of t^3,» as if from H^l) ; HIOj he besmeared (for nto). T 481 In common with verbs yp, those of this class have in Niphal and Hiphil the Chaldee and Rabbinic punctuation, which sub- stitutes for the long vowel under the preformatives, a short one followed by Dagesh forte. This form and the common one are often both in use : e. g. jn^DIl, lo incite, Imperf. Jl^D'' (also JT'DH, /T'D'') ; "in-"), «wrf he shows the icay (also "IJl^) ; some- . .. . T i "T times with a different meaning, as n^jn, to cause to rest, to give i s. - . .. rest, TX^'^T], Imperf. TV^*^, to set down, to lay down: \w'^, to - . . _ ._ ^ I .^ spevd the night, to abide; "y^"^, ]''?D. to be headstrong, rebellious. Other examples: Niph. ^*)DJ (from SlO, not ^QJ), to be cir- cumcised; with a guttural, "I'l^J; Hiph. Ttil, to despise, ^Vy^*. 482 Verbs whose middle stem-letter is Vav moveable (i. e. sounded as a consonant) are, in respect to this letter, perfectly regular: e.g. Tin, to be ivhite, Imperf. mnN 1^1]). to expire, Imperf. ^')y^ ; particularly all verbs that are also H/, as H")^ ; ■P»^'. ~; • T T ilTA, to command; H'^'D, to wait, &c. * Here belong some forms of verbs Pe guttural with Dagesh forte implicilum, which have generally been dei ived from a false root, or been uncritically altered : viz. li^nm for I^^jim. ajid she hastens (from ir^lH) ; D^l, l^yPi]^ (from 101^, ZO^J^, to rush upon. G.). §6-] Verbs Ay in Vav, 177 Vocabulary. To be ashamed, '\l})3,, bush *. To despise, ^^^, buz. To understand, y)2., bun {also bin f ). To arise, Qlp, kum. To fix, establish, "|!)2), cun. To scorn, make a mock of, Vy^, luts. To get, obtain, p!)|3, puk, in Hiph. ' To place; to set on, QVli/> sum. To return, intr., y]^, shubh|. Wall, fence, n"^"TiJ, g'derah(w); gadar, to fence ^. To break down, y)3, parats. Fortress, "Ijii;^ (a), mibhtsar 483 (batsar, to cut off). Understanding, Jiy)^r\ (« t")* T ; t'bhunah (bhun or bhin, to discern). To found, *7D"», yasad. ~ T Rottenness, Hpl. rakabh. 't t Snare, ti^piD, mokesh (ya- kash, to set a snare). Guilt, UWi^} asham. T T Deceit, nQ1Q> mirmah (ra- T ; • mah, to cast). Therefore, ]Tby, i^al-cen. Congregation, Tll^, i^edah (i^adah, he appointed). Exercise 44. a) rviTV 2 : r\r\nr2 v-i ^^id nr^v vrrnrb'^ r\ii^ 1 484 T : IT • : JTT : • t ; v.- at i**: t t : j-t D^^^r^S) ^y^ir^ 3 :n:^ara wm pi3 y^^* "^d^ rM2:in:i a* T : J' T |T ; • '"T ;•• ' vat -jt t ; t ;v r\Sn'i2 \rii d^d'' niro 4 -. ab -i^^nn nh'V2^ hdiv AT :i" TV ' j-T I" ;• T • • : AT :t " > '. " A-" : jT T ' J • I r : - j • : v : DpHDi n'par^ niioy b'u n^K 6 : toiD^-'?^ u^mk 'vtt: at; - vjv-: — s. va" I • - r. .- * In Hiph. to make ashamed. t Same in Hiph., but also to make to understand : to teach. X In Hiph. to return, restore; in Piel, to lead back, restore. § In pi. gidroth or g'deroth. li He who fears (partcp.). 178 Verbs Ay in Vav. [ch. 11. (484) "'tr^pbD 'w^ D'-n 'y\r>r2 ddh riTn s -.u^t^ ^^1^ '••';;• T A- - 'j: ttv j- |t \ : j : nr^i'o uh'Dii ^b^^^ St\i y^2r\ ur\v rii^^^n 9 : jiio |T : • J* • : ••vv : A : - !• T tv j- : t vit •> >-T- I T J"T ; \" ATT 'a'T •••.;% i^9 ^3 D'in'? '^r^^^ D^'7:D^^^ nn'ii^sS D^n^ urh^ ^'^1b V ;t •• I I' V V • : • |T V <~ v;|v • : ■ ~ : I :^^nhmD J)J3^T ^'^''vv^ m^^-b^^ ^j 12 ■wyi'ob ' iv : : - •: ' av-:i- jt : a -It: • m^ih p'n:)m n^n Ji:;^ t^V nv^i^ nit:^ ^Q^^h 13 JTT : \ ; T- J"T »■.-•• < T a V - -VT^)^ K^ni "pni^n njiD jn:i^:j^ niri "^tji^k |T-:|- ) : V V T -;v -j)- >TT ; 'av : • <• : T - ' V V - V : AV;-.-; a': vv; • 'v;v; |- T V ) \ '. a't VV • -; b) 1. I will restore this silver. 2. We will place thy strong- holds for destruction. 3. Who founded the earth ? who esta- blished the heavens? 4. Shall men he established by wickedness? 5. They will assuredly return. 0. Return, my son : return, my daughter. 7. Do not set on bread for my brethren by them- selves. 8. Restore the money that-was-returned in your sacks. 9- Dust thou art, and unto dust slialt thou return. 10. And God shall be with you, and bring you back {Hiph.) to the land of your fathers. CiiAi'. XI. § 7. Verbs Ayin Yod, 1^- {?• ]''3' ^" discern. Paradigm : see Appendix E, p. 25. Short Paradigms. 485 1 Per/. fban \bln 2 Niphal | nfdihon iKal Inf. (•>//•. I 3 Impcrut. bin hibbon bin hibbon 4 Iviperf. yabbin yibbon 5 I'urtcp. ban nabh6n Past Partcp. of Kal, bun. § 7.] Verbs Ay in Yod. 179 Imperf. apoc. yabhen ; Imperf. c. Vav conv. vayyabhen. (485) Injin. absol. Kal, bon 5 Niph. hibbon. Normal Forms. (Per/. ban banah banta 486 Kal J Imperat. bin bi'ni [^Imperf. yabhin tabhi'ni t'bhinenah. a) These verbs have the same structure as verbs ^87 Ayi?i Vav, and then- ** is treated in the same manner as the T of that class : e. g. Perf. Kal shath [for shavath), he has set; hifin. shith; Infin, absol. shoth (/or shayoth) ; Imperat, shith ; Imperf. yashith ; Jussive, yasheth, with Vav conv. vayya'sheth. b) But the Perf. Kal has, in several verbs, still a second set of forms, which resemble a HipMl wdth the characteristic H elided : e. g. ^Jli^^i (similar to ''Jli^^^n) ; also B-DB, ili2''"l, thou con- tendest ; also -HIl'l. c) Often also complete Hiphil forms occur : e. g. Perf ]Un, DJn^rari; Infin. l^H (also V2) Imperat. X^lHi (also ^il) ; Partcp. y^ytZ (also ]3) so likewise'nng (also 11); U^'m (also ViW) V^2-'D, glittering; also in Perf Y2J. d) Moreover, as Passive we find a few times Hoph. Imperf. "l^^^ from T'l^, to sing-, Jl^T', from D'^t, to set. 1/ These Hiphil forms may easily be traced to verbs 1^, and 488 possibly, in part, belovg to that class. The same may be said of Niphal, \^2^ ; Pilel, ]y\'2.; and Hithpael, ]pi3nn (as if from V\3.)- These verbs are in every respect closely related to verbs ')^. Hence it is that we find several verbs used promiscuously. It If , , , as y^ and ^^, and with the same meaning in both forms, as "Jv 180 Verbs Ay in Yod. [cii. ii. (488) {denom. from 7v)> to spend the night ; Injin. also p^ ; U^'\^> to place; Injin. also DVli^ ; Imperf. □^';i^*' ; once U^W. In other verbs one of the two is the predominant form, as 7>]), to exult kT\^ only once, Prov. xxiii. 24). But few are exclusively ''^, as 21''"^, to contend : Jl"*^, ^o 5e#; \i/'»';^, /o rejoice. tf 489 The old Grammarians referred all these forms to verbs 1^, which it may, indeed, in some cases be right to do. ir 490 The Pdm. App. E, p. 25, is placed by that of verbs Ij;, to exhibit the parallelism of the two classes. The omitted con- jugations have the same form as in Pdm. App. E, p. 24. 491 The Imperf. apoc. is 13.''; with retracted tone it takes the form ^7 2l"1>. So with Vav convers. Dli^'^'), and he placed: ^ VT V T- l^'^l. and he perceived. ' V T- 492 As Partcp. act. Kal we find once p, spending the night (Neh. xiii. 21) ; Part. pass. U'^'lV or UiVy according to a various reading (2 Sam, xiii. 32). // 493 Verbs i^}^ scarcely ever suffer their K to quiesce, and hence are irregular only as verbs with Ayin guttural. Yet in the Per/. of the very common verb 7^^^, to ask, the feebleness of the J^ ~ T reduces the a under it to (-), and in a closed syllable to (-) and (— ), when the syllable is toneless, and no full vowel pre- cedes the ^ (just as in some verbs "'3) ; so with suff. '?J7^^lif, ^ri^rbM, ^ySi^t, 2 pi. UPhi^t; also in Hiph. (I Sam. i. 28). Vocabulary (exclusively >j;). Of this kind are : 494 To understand, \>2,. To exult, ^2). To pass the night, y^. To contend, plead, ^H- To smell, nn. To put, set, place, D^Z^* To set, put, r)'^^}- §r-] Verbs Ayin Yod, 181 Exercise 45. : rh'2Vi^ -I'-kpn n-i:ij^ nan"? v^pn r^r^ n'^D-in 2 ITT-:|- -'t- i-r'.\T at;- ' -'j — J' T tt;- ^Tsi nti^n'' D"T^^ a"? 4 : oijn D1^<"D;? nnn bi^ 3 ;a : ~ a" ~ : ttv a" |T • JTT • J* T ~ -:i- i'T T - J) 1 . Plead with * your mother, plead : for she (is) not my wife, nor (am) I her husband. 2. Joseph washed his face and went out t and said, set on bread. 3. I will make f your cities a wilderness, and bring your sanctuaries to desolation, and will not smell § your sweet odours ||. Chap. XL § 8. Verbs Lamed Aleph. E. g. J^ifD, to find. Paradigm : see Appendix E, p. 26. t t Short Paradigms. 3 Imperat. m'tsa himmatse" matstse" (none) hamtse" (none) hith- I Perf.^ 2 Inf. cstr. iKal matsa m'tso 2 Niph. nimtsa hiramatse" 3 Piel mitstse" matstse" 4 Pual mutstsa miitstsa 5 Hiph. himtsi" hamtsi" 6 Hoph. hiimtsa humtsa 7 Hithp. hith- hith- 4 Imperf. 5 Partcp. yimtsa motse" 496 yimmatse" nimtsa y'matstse" m'matstse" y'miitstsa m'mutstsa y'amtsi" mamtsi" yumtsa miimtsa yith- matstse mith- matstse" I matstse", matstse" | matstse Past Partcp. of Kal, matsu". Jussive (Hiph.) yamtse"; Imperf. c. suff. {Piel) y*matstseni, (Hiph.) yamtsieni. * '2l' t X^'^l, and went out. X To be rendered by ]J1J. § Hiphil. II i. e., the odour, your pleasant. 182 Verbs Lamed Aleph. [ch. il. Normal Forms. { Perf. matsa ma'tseah matsathi 407 1 Kal \ ' yimperat. m tsa m'tse "nan ♦ [Perf. nimtsa nimtse'''thah 2 Niphal -{ ^ , . _ , . ., -, \lmperat. himmatse himmatse "nan (The conjugation in the other forms is analogous to these.) if 498 The i^ is here, as in verbs )X^, treated partly as a soft guttural consonant [scarcely audible at the end of a word), partly as a quite inaudible (quiescent) letter. 499 In the forms that end with the third radical, the final syllable has the same vowel as the regular verb (e. g. N^b, i!^:^r2, i^r^D, K^m*!) ; but Pathakh before N is lengthened into Kamets, viz. in the Perf., Imperf., Imperat. Kal, in the Perf. Niphal, Pual, and Hophal. The ( t ) however is mutable, hence in the plural, •1N:^D\ 500 The Imperf. and Imperat. Kal have A after the analogy of verbs Lamed guttural. 501 Also before afFormatives beginning with a conso- nant (n, J) N is not heai'd [quiesces in the Perf. Kal, in Kamets, DJ^'^Q ; in the Pe7f. of all the other con- ^ T T T ^ " jugations, in Tsere, riJ tear). «aba. : Therefore, "{3"^^, :i?al-cen. Fear, ^^^'^^ y'reah; constr. To defile, miD, ta.me\ my^ (w), yare", to fear. j.^ assemble (in troops), i^a:i, • T T A path, T^y^Jl^, n'thibhah tsaba. T • ; (nathabh). To sin, ^^Z0^, kha^a. T T Exercise 46. a) :nnn vh rvd n^^nn w^ ^i^:iv"^:i mr\ 1 508 |TT J T ; >-'.", "AT : JT |- 1 at'; • ;t : T 1 -: • |TT ; • J" - : t : • t- 'bi^ ''^ip'i K-)p^< D^i:^^i^ nybi^ 4 : n':5ip ]r^r) n^i^ajn^ n^yn^ "rrira libr^i^ r\pi':i nni^i 5 -. uii^ ^:n / •: ' : 'a—-: j 'tt ; -j ; |TT /'•: r2 184 Verbs Lamed Aleph. [ch. ii. (508) >^;:ib 6 : vh^^ Dn>r)")iij^') t'' ''n^^^ ^mn^? : lost^^iD / • : V I" - -: a--- •• I : I : a" ;--; i ^i - : it : • -^3 it^fs:: DQh ''^^tDm :mrro ]iijn ps'^i D^n ^^^JD T A :- J" • : I > |T :i~ t ' viT- a-- jtt V": I : "AT •• : I : >• : ~ vit -:aT -: - : :n^ij ;:^'':a'?i^ U'V^';r\ my^ b^\^ i^nb"*'3 od'? ^vi |T 7* : ~ • t': a"t- •• :\. a- |- it jt t • |"T 'vjV -V T -lAT • J ••'j- T '<" - 'av :'t X- " V : •». '■••T-:i-: • ^, galui, as also in some derivatives. 515 The Infin. constr. has always the feminine form in n : hence in Kal, rtO^, g'loth ; in Piel, lyO^, gal- 16th, &c. 516 Before the afformatives beginning with a conso- nant (Jl, 3), the original ^ remains, but not as a consonant : it would properly form with the a the diphthong ai ; but this diphthong in the Perf. is first contracted into e (^— ), and then further attenuated into i, but in the Imperf. and Imperat. it is changed into the obtuse ^_ (e). Thus in Perf. Piel, from rs'hl\ (after JH^^ip) we get first /!'•'?]), and then, by attenuating the e into i, /I vi) ; in the Imperf. Piel, n^Y^ri. In the Passives the e is always retained; in the Actives of the derived conjugations, and in the Reflexives, both e and 7 are used alike (see 527, 531) ; on the contrary, in Kal (the most common species) we find only i. Accordingly we have in the Perfect Kal i, as rih^ ; * It is certain, however, that some verbs 117 originated in verbs with final H, this letter having lost its original strong and guttural sound, and become softened to d. feeble H- § 9.] Vei'bs Lamed He. 187 Perfects of the other active conjugations (in- (516) eluding the reflexive Hithp.) e and i promis- cuously, as rvj>^ and TVv^ ; Perfects of the Passives only e, as nh^ ; Imperfects and Imperatives always *•__ (e), as T V :^ T V : • Before the afFormatives beginning with a vowel 517 [u, I, ah), the Yod Avith the foregoing vowel usually falls away [^73 =z ^y2l, &c.] ; but it is retained in ancient full forms, particularly in pause, as IvJIJ (see 524, 530). Before suffixes also it falls away, as ^/II (see 539). The Yod disappears also in 8 Perf sing, fern., 518 where Jl_ is appended as feminine ending, as Jl7il. But this ancient form is become rare (see 520), and, as if this mark of the gender were not sufficiently distinct, a second feminine ending n_ is appended so as to form n/l/il. So in all conjugations : e. g. Hiph. Jl7jin, common form nn/^Il, in pause T\rv>^J}- The formation of the shortened Imperf, which 519 occurs in this class of verbs in all the conjugations, is strongly marked, consisting in the casting away {apocope) of the n_, by which still other changes are occasioned in the form (see 522, 526, 528, 533). The shortened Imperative is also formed by apocope of the n^ (see 529, 534). Remarks. I. Kdl.'] For the 3rd Perf. f em. the older and simpler form 520 Jl7ils from Jlvilj is almost entirely banished from common use. TT -; |T But with suffixes it is always used, see 539. a) The Infin. absol. has also the form iK"1> videndo. 521 188 Verbs Lamed He. [ch. ii. (521) h) As the Infin. constr. occurs also, though seldom, r\''!DV, nS1> as well as the feminine form HINI, '0 see. 522 S' The apocope of the Imperf. occasions in Kal the fol- lowing changes : fl) The first stem-letter most commonly receives the helping- vowel Segol, or, when the middle radical is a guttural, Pathakh: e. g. ^T for b^; ]2^X and he built; ^t\ let him look, for yp>. b) The Khirik of the preformative is also sometimes lengthened into Tsere (because it is now in an open syllable), as K1\ let him see (fr. Hi^"!). T T c) The helping -vowel is sometimes omitted : e. g. '2.'€^'^^ . r\'^^\ l^^V The verb nj^"l has the two forms' *K")^ arid i^l^'T, the latter with Pathakh on account of the Resh. d) Examples of verbs which are Pe guttural as well as Lamed He: ^V'^'^^, and he made, from TVDV^ 1^^' and he answered y from n^y. Sometimes the punctuation of the first syl- TT > 5. lable is not affected by the guttural, as in in'"T, yn'^\ '^TV (with Dagesh lene in second radical), let him rejoice. e) The verbs H^n, to be, and H^H. '0 ^/ye, which would TT T T properly form in the Imperf. apoc. '♦n^. ^rf, change these forms to >n\ Tf (y'hi, y'khi), because the Focf prefers a vowel before it in which it may quiesce. 523 The full forms without the apocope of H— sometimes occur even after Vav conv., especially in the 1st jjerson and in the later books : e. g. Hi^li^l. and I saw, twenty times, but not in ; V T the Pentateuch, H^^'^l, aud he made, four times. 504 The original > is sometimes retained before the afformatives beginning with a vowel (cf. 522, above), especially in and before the Pause, and before the full plural ending (un) V\—, or where for any reason an emphasis rests upon the word. Per/. VDTlt > ATT they look refuge ; Lnpcraf. V^3,' ask ye ; Imperf. ]V^^\ they T ; : : * increase, more frequently like "(Vni^'', flicy drink (cf. 530). §9.] Verbs Lamed He. 189 The Partcp. act. has also a/em, of the form H'^S'liJ, spying; 525 r\"y)B, fruitful J in the Plur. like J^Vr!i^^. The Partcp. pass. is sometimes without *», as -V^^J? for ''•Vyi'^j mac?e, •'^SiJ. It is but very seldom that the second syllable is defectively written. II. Niphal.'] The apocope of the Imperf. occasions here no 526 further changes (^2)^ from H^il'') ; yet in one verb j; guttural we find a form with (_) shortened to (— ), viz. PID'' (for na^). Similar in Pi'el, -)^J1 (from m^JJI), and in Hithpael, O^njiri (from nVlDD). - . . ... ^ . . III. Piel, Piial, and Hithpael.'] In the Per/". Piel, the second 527 syllable has Kkirik instead of the diphthongal e in the greater number of examples, which is therefore adopted in the Paradigm. Before suffixes Khirik is always employed, except in Pual, which always has Tsere C-^^). The Imperf. loses, after the apocope, the strong Dagesh of 528 the second radical ; hence Piel, lii''') ; Hithpael, ^ilJT^I. Less frequently is the Pathakh then lengthened into Kamets, as IJl^l, ')^^n^ (cf. 526). - ■- In Piel and Hithpael are found also apocopated forms of the 529 Imperat., as DJ for HDJj J'^o^'e .' 7njnn, feign thyself sick. Examples of Yod retained in cases where more commonly it 530 is omitted: Imperf. ''J^^D"7^. tvill ye liken me; !)DVDD''. they cover them. IV. Hiphil and Hophal.] In the Perf. Hiph. the forms 531 Jl v^n and Jl''7;in are about equally common ; before suflSxes the latter is used, as somewhat the shorter. In Hophal always "'_- . a) The Tsere of the Infin. absol. Hiph. is the regular vowel 532 (as in 7ZDpn) ; to this the Infin. absol. Hoph. conforms, as inn^lHJn. "" b) The verb ^Il"^5 to be much, has three forms of the Infin. : T T nUirTj much (used adverbially) ; il^-irTj used when the Infin. is pleonastic ; Jli3,"in> the Infin. constr. 190 Verbs Lamed He, [ch. ii. 533 The Imperf. apoc. has either the form Tl'', D3'', p'I^'"1, or I > : :~ : :" ' : : — (with a helping-vowel) 7^\ for which, however, is invariably substituted the form 7;)"», as 7;)'"), ")3''T. Examples with gut- turals : ^P'"). ?V^\ &c., which can be distinguished from the Imperf. Kal only by the signification. 534 The Imperat. apoc. has invariably the helping- vowel Segol or Pathakh, as 2nh for 2"]^ ni"}!! ; ^l^n for C|-|n, nS-IH; "porn for ribvji. 535 The Imperf. with Foe? retained occurs only in ]Vjh, from TT (Additional Remarks.) 536 V. In the Aramaean, where, as before remarked, the verbs J«i7 and H/ flow into one another, both classes terminate, in the Imperf. and Partcp. of all the conjugations, without dis- tinction, in |^_ or ">_-. As imitations of this mode of forma- tion we are to regard those forms of the Infin , Imperat., and Imperf. in H-^, more seldom ^-^ and '»-^^-, which are found in Hebrew also, especially in the later writers and the poets. Infin. ^^1. to be; H^y, opprimendo; Tl'^tUT]- Imperat. J Imperf. ^J^'', •T-; ' ; |T T T ' : — ^n^y ; Hij9/f. ^7^rT- very seldom "»_ takes the place of the final n - or pl-j as in iQ'*DD\ ^e will cover them; '^TI^'H, smite me. The 3 Perf.fem. always takes before suff. the older form Jl/Jl (see 518), yet with a short a, as in the regular verb : e. g. T T •)r^^3 for -inJl^S ; in pause '^^rSW- Vocabulary. To trust (in), (2) nDH, kha- 5ah (b'). To build, nJ2, banah. T T To stretch out, JltD^, na^ah. T T To multiply, illll, rabhah. To feed, n^"1, rai^ah. T T To babble, T\l^lL, ba/ah (comp T T (SaTToXoydv and blaterare). To befall, H^i^ (in Pual) anah. To see, ^^^"^, raah. 540 T T Piercings, Jli"1p"TQ. mad- k'roth (dakar). Sword, yi'n, khe'rebh. TAe world, 72n, tebhel, jaoefic (= t) oiKov^kvT], yabhal). Embryo ; unformed substance, D/ilj golem (galam, glome- ravit). Exercise 47. •IT -I-:- J--:|- V -: ^; rt- , ;..7 ; • ; riMt '^^ -"iSD^Din ^^D> •in'i^ ^■•'3 3 : n^t^^pD rKi n> 2y-)Dn:a D'''^n^^^ D^ii -ipi^ pn:i "'nH)'i:r 4 -. o^n j*T-: ' v; VAT j': :-: •.- \, j.. ix 192 Verbs Lamed He. [ch. u. § 9. (541) '^'^ ^i^br2 D^'Vti) ]M^'b:i pn-:^'? ni]i^''"i^b 6 :^^D^D V / |Tp . jT- • T : 'vat t ' J, — jv\ : I 1" ;- I h^n":! 8 : mbD") bin 'b"^:^ "^b noi^'ikb 2y^i^'ni^ i !)^*"l I ^d'?-) 10 '.xbtir\> niDin ninn p^ij-nx ^:^:i-in < T <• : T -ITT i: ; v: • ' A- ••• ': i :«\. IV T JT V v: AT\ ;'T i"T- vT\ ' :: ' -: ' ••• •• :^*D^ ]i3^ npi^ii >3 :?t:^i riy^v do':'d nnviri n 1" • ' ^ • 'tt : • I- - Av J -: • T :v. a--: i 6) 1. What God shall command, that thou shalt do. 2. As they have done, so do ye. 3. The waters increased greatly over the earth, and all the hills were covered which were under heaven. 4. Cow and bear shall feed together ; lion and ox shall lie down together. 5. Great are the things which my eyes have seen. 6. Ye shall not build houses. 7. Did not ray father build this house ? 8. Did 1 not build the house ? 9. In the building-of the city. 542 Write down the forms : I was. I will be. Be thou. To be. Thou wast. Thou (m.) wilt be. Be thou (/.). In-being. Thou (/.) wast. Thou (/.) wilt be. Be you. He will be. He will be. Be you (/.). She was. She will be. * Most recent interpreters translate the latter clause thus : the days [sc. of ray life] all of them were predetermined, and (= when) not one of them [yet was]. So Maurer, De JVette, Hengstenberg. CuUam refers, by anticipation, to ' days.' CH. 12.] Suffixes of the Verb, 193 Chap. XII. Suffixes of the Verb, The suffixes appended to the verb express the ac- 543 cusative oi ihe personal pronoun. They are: Singular. Person. Form* proper for the Perfect Tense. Forms proper for the Imperfect. 1 we(c.) ""•F '• ~ V '2 theeijn.) ?T, iw »a2^5e ^_ or ?[_ .y.orn?- 2 thee (f.) ^-■•••V-^T 1,.. 1.,, ,. 3 him in i — IT ^n i- 1" 3 her n rr — n- T T T Plural. n- T |V 1 us (c.) |T ^:- 2 you (m.) 1" 2 you (f.) 13- ^?- 3 <^em (m.) D- D-, poftici iD- |T ~ |T U—n—>poetichSr2- 1 •• 3 them (f.) V '^ V 544 Affixes of the Imperfect, when preceded by an Epenthetic Nun. Singular. 1 me (c.) >il_ t5_ for "(^i— 2 thee (m.) -rj- ,13 ^J- t' IV T IV ': IV 3 him 3 her !):]_ for !)n^- T|V T : I V 545 194 Suffixes of the Verb. [CH. 1 546 b) oi7 Perfect ivith Suffixes. As a general rule, a) the forms that end in a consonant, take the suf- fixes that begin with a vowel (called a voiveUof- union) ; the forms that end in a vowel, take the suffixes that begin with a consonant. c) The vowel-of-union for the Perfect is a (or a). d) „ 5, Imperfect ] e) „ „ Imperative J Whatever changes the afformatives undergo, are made for the purpose of suiting them to receive the pronominal suffixes. [ove). takes a) The 3rd sing. fern. ath or ath ah h) 2nd sing . fern. tt t •2nd plur. masc. tu tern for 548 Here observe, (1) the 2nd sing. fern, (which is derived from an old form (itlt) becomes identical in form with the 1st pers. sing., and is only to l)e distinguished from it by the context; (2) of the 2nd plur. fern, no instance is found with suffixes. 549 [The 2rd sing, f em. of the Perfect (1) draws the tone to itself, except with chem, chen, and then takes the forms that make a syllable without a union-vowel ; (2) with the other suffixes, it takes a union-vowel, but draws back the tone to the penult, so that they appear with shortened vowels.] View of the Suffxes to the Verb {E.). I. To THE Perfect. transit. Kal 3 f. sing. 550 Verb ara he has icritten ^?J?3 Suif. : sing. 3 m. 1 T T ; : i~ T : him or ^r^2jn3 — f. her |T T : T I- T : CII. 12.] Svffi xes of the Vey^b. 2 m. thee "^m' — f . thee ^^-n? 1. me '^^C? pi. 3 m. them °?'3? — f . them 1?-Q? 2 m. you ... , — . — f . you ]j??0? 1. us IT T ; ^from intrans Kal in the same way. 1) ia™, 2) ii . ,.. -. .... ._. -. e from the other forms, as Piel : Suflf. : sing.l 3 m. / 1) inr)!), 2, 3) Tjaris, "^idi^. 2 m. sing. 2 f . & 1 sing. renins ''-n^'O? — f. 2 m. — f . 1. pL 3 m. — f. 2 m. — f . 1. him innri? vr^nns thee (none) thee (none) me *>^r)3jn3 (none) (none) it;-; Just SO the sufF. to the Persons of all Verbal-stems : T : - • I- : - • &c. theyn them you you us 195 ''jrinns (550) So ^ ' 3 pi. (none) T I T : In the same way 1st and 2nd pers. plur. s2 196 Suffixes of the Verb. II. To THE Imperfect. [CH. 12. 551 transit. Kal, 3 sing. m. Verb : ah?^ Suff. : sing.l !)n3n3'' 1 * 3 m./ — f . 2 m. — f . 1. pi. 3 m. — f. 2 m. — f . 1. Tfanp^ 2 DDQjii)^ 3 3 pi. m. Kal Imperat. sg. ra. 3J13 V^'^ ^rv\2r\y if \ ^nnns ^r^yir^t x mnr^D^ uy\2r\y ]y2P\y ^y)2r\y !ii)nn3 T I ■ ■ : T nnns pn3 d::; •''^fj.?? nro^ uvut ^}!!?P I I" : T The suffixes to the other verbal pers. in the same way. a in the last syllable, :}r}T : 1- ^H^W ; 2. '^^iT^^]; 3. DD:inj\ r?::^"' = -'• l^Q^^ ; *3- DDro^^-e •••:-:• - : • i'-.it : • v-:i-: • in the last syllable, 2^2"^ * So also to all persons ending in the 3rd radical : ^JlDJ^j t So also to J)3J13n 2 plur. m. and 3 a. 2 plur. f., and to ''^n^n 2 sing. f. ; instead of which V3nDJl ' is '^Iso possible. X To the f. sing, and to the plur. like to the Imperf. CH. 12.] Suffixes of the Verb. 197 •^inriDN ^ara^ 3. i^^^rsy, DDnra^ rh^^r- (551) 2."'?rn'?Ii^"';' 3. DDn'^^V — * oV m in the last syl- lable, 2'r\yj niph.: 1. •ini''rip:; 2. ^jnTO^' 3. DDn^ni^ : with gutt. wrjt^\ u'2V^'t2'^y Exercise 48. •'yi^3"''3 3 t-'i-inD -JiK*L5nQi ^:i^v^ •'Jd^s nhnn 2 -t:\. I' -I"":!" y -r - \" a- ~:i" -a-:- v-.-v. T T .-:<;': r T a : ••• • t - : at •• j- -; 'iv : T : )•:; • ' V ; t : ' ;- : • — :v • V T ' V •• : >-t : JiDK'in 6 :''D>^ '':3n?2n^ Ktohn^ ^j^bVn pijirn^n 5 vv:v '•• r • • : i--:iv ; •• : —at ^t; ^:3j^:2nr) 7 :'':)a?niji tm^^u uhoys Ji'nrsn r^i*sn J" ; - : • 1" • I '■»":▼ \ T : a \ ~ t ; j-t iV':^^ '^^V'^ntn s ♦.i^^'pi^ ji^l^'D^ •'jb^Dri -l^•to^^^ n^>r>ii \mii2 '?T^:i3 "ijHDn 9 :/i>3-^ n^i^'^v n^'?^^ nnQiiri <.T T -:i" ' -.TV J" : - T |- • > T -; T : •• T at ; • : nnn:i nm ^yit^ Wv ^p nn^t^^n 12 :^:)dq nprr':'i^ jT •: - v: 'a-.-: • '4 : -v. t j- t -iv- ';-• T^^^ D'^^:2m tdh-^ dWS) ^1D'?^? 13 :'':dqd/i ]nn "•ji;?ii:^n ^1^^< D^ri^i^l d'^d^q ''^b^ijn u ^^ait:;^ >••- : A* T I : )" •:; • •:; • r • •<•• • - I t iTT «.•: VAT "-:: - ':•)■.• - -; 'i-.-'t;- • : inDD ]h^:^ pio n'?"^:^'' jiosnri ^^^'^^ 16 ^tohsd'' J..- 1^... I ^-r J--: ••. : -V. J- T|v:-: "ikb ":T")in 'ilD^b'im iny-1 r\r\^' ddh i:)^i^ 17 :C]1'?^^ 'vjv: • 1: A"" jv-: TT«. a- 1 - t';V ;- T •/r' -A- ••• : JT ': •«• w I S 3 198 Suffixes of the Verb. [ch. 12. '^Fmb n^i^n ^B^i D"'DDn nn"7 v^t^ ^y\\^ i^^r^ 20 T|T '- - ' ;• : - I 'av-; • T -V J :i • wiin'? 24 : r)y!y\ H\'ivni u\tbt ^b ^r\2n2 ^br', 23 I-. ,. . -|TT J •• I : A- • T '.K • : a- T <-: ^thVi:^'? DDii DnD^^ n-'^n'? iioj* n^^^ lo^p 'iv: I : w: rr-; i- T : Avv; 4": • : : 'v b) Translate into Hebrew — Thou hast put him (1, 1, v). Thou (/.) hast deceived rae. She instructed him. She inchned (1, 5, n, h) him. Thou hast despised me. Thou (/.) hast given him. They have forsaken rae. I have cursed her. Give him. Take him. He will pursue him. They shall find her. They shall call-upon me. To despise them. When he fled (Say : in his- flying). When thou buildest (Say: in thy building). When he prepared (Say: in his preparing). To deceive me. When he was circumcised (Say : in his being circum- cised). They that do (jp.) this. His slain. They that call-upon him. DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &c. (Literally, in Hebrew) 1. a) This boy. TAe boy /^e this. \,^q 6) The good boy. T/ie boy ^/ Who— to her r-°' b) All that I have. All which io me. i^ nt. like our * that,' is sometimes used as a relative. 12. Where. Which— there. 1, Whence. Which — thence. 248. Differences of Idiom, ^r. 201 13. a) From when, from where, as in Enj^lisli. b) He has fallen into the pit he made (= which he made) : as in English. c) At the time he did it : as in English. 14. The orphan and one who The orphan and there is no has no helper, helper to him, 256. 15. ]>>^ (257, end) =, virtually, the copula (in any tense) with a negative. Joseph was not in the pit. en-Y6seph babbor. 16. ]l}'^=, virtually, the copula, in any tense. It is in my power. yesh-Vel yadi. 17. Many verbs are in Hebrew followed by an accusative, where we must use a preposition. IS. Many verbs are in Hebrew followed (always or sometimes) by a preposition, where we should use the ace. only in English. To seek wisdom. bikkesh Z' . . . [as we may say *to seek after' a thing]. To rebuke a man. gaJ?ar b' . . . [to find fault with a man]. 1 9. The infin. absolute is used — 1) as an intensive, Thou shalt surely die. To die thou shalt die. 2) Sometimes after a finite verb it carries on the discourse just as if it were a verb of the same tense. Thou shalt weep and Thou shalt weep and to-mourn. mourn. 20. Meanings of the Perfect : The Perfect denotes, A (used absolutely) a) Past time, (1) as perfect, (2) as pluperfect. b) The present, (1) as a condition or attribute already long continued and still existing (just like odi, novi, memini, in Lat.) : e.g. yadai^Hi, I know ; saneti, I hate. (2) A per- manent or habitual action : Happy the man who walks, &c. (halach). c) The future, in protestations and as- surances; the event being contem- plated as done (e. g. I give thee the field, &c.). 202 Differences of Idiom, ^c. B (used relatively) d) =: imperfect suhj. (e ^. we should have been or should he [essemus'] as Sodom). e) ■=. iiluperf . suhj. (e. g. if he had not left, &c.). f) =futurum exactum, just as with us 'when he has washed awai/^ for 'when he shall have washed away.' C (with Vav conv.) g) =i future (aft. future, i. e. imperf). h) z=pres. suhj. (aft. imperf. in this sense), lest he should put forth his hand, and take, &c. i) =z imperat. (aft. imperf.). k) =z for past or present time, as pre- ceding perf. or imperf. requires. 21. Meanings of the Imperfect: The Imperfect denotes, A (used absolutely) a) The future. b) The present (especially of permanent states and general truths). B (used relatively) c) as subjunct. after particles meaning that, that not, lest. d) as optative. e) as imperative, the place of which it always supplies in prohihitions. /) as potential: = may, might j can, could. g) after az, then; te'rem, not yet ; h'te'rem, before. h) it may denote customary and con- tinued action, and (like Lat. and French imperf.) of extended repre- sentation. i) it sometimes denotes single actions, done and past, where the perfect might be e.xpected. This applies to poetry ; the use reseml)les that of onr present tense as employed in lively descriptions. HEBREW AND ENGLISH INDEX. 3J^ irreg. father. [App. B.] T "I^K io stray, wander, be lost. — ~ T to perish {) and yc of the per- son). Pie), to cause to stray, to disperse. — to cause to perish, to destroy. nUi^ /o be willing, inclined, de- T T sirous (followed by infin. with or without ))■ ''i^i^ poverty, misery. ^2,^^ to mourn (bv over). Hiph. to cause to mourn. Hithp. = Kal. pj^ c. (mostly f.), a stone. DIK, DilJ^ adj. pi. c^Qit* (8,c) T T red. plK (3, a) master, lord. Pi. d^di^? lords; ynsjn \3i^< lord of the land. ■^^^ Niph. to become glorious. ")ni^ adj. (l,b) great, mighty.— noble, excellent. DTli^ f. with suff. inni^ (13, a) cloak, mantle. 2T]i^ to love. Piel, partcp., a lover. il2TM^ f. infin. of the verb in^ : ■•■";- ^ e. g. nin'' ntp-nti^ ninii) to love the name of the Lord. — subst. love, beloved. — adv. delightfully. T»J^ (1, a) straitness, calamity, destruction. mi< Root not used. Arab, to TT howl. ••i^ wailing, interj. wo J alas! ho! (of threatening), ^l^^ (1, a) a fool = a wicked per- rfyjiji f. sing. (13, a) folly; sin, from obsol. bist. ]1^^ (6, h) nothingness, falsehood, vanity. — wickedness, iniquity. — adversity, calamity. I^A^ik (•2,b) pi. nmit*, treasure. T Hi^ irreg. brother. [App. B.] T "ini^ to stay, tarry. - T ini^ prep, behind, after (with sufF. nn«, cDnnx, &c.). prep, of place, after, behind. — of time, after, after that. I^ni^ (3, a) the hinder part; as T adv. backwards. 204 Hebrew and English Index. ^>J^ to hate, to he an enemy; -T partcp. ri« as subst. (7, b) ad- versary, enemy; f. ririw. y^i^ (6, i) nothingness. — as an adv. not, including the idea of the subst. verb to be (cf. mj^) ; tiJ^n ]'« there is no man, imD ]'« there was none interpreting. If a per- sonal pronoun is the subject of ^^^^,^ r ,,o N 7 I, the proposition, the particle n^r\^^^ f- (13, a) a sack or bag. fidelity. — truth, as opposed to falsehood. "IDi^ imperf. ip^j% -irj>4>] to soy, ~ T declare, mostly followed by the words spoken, constr. with Sn- ) before the person to or of whom any thing is said ; rarely with an ace. nOi^ (6, b) word, discourse. n^^ Kal not used (Arab, to meet; T T to be in good time). Piel, to cause to come, or happen. Pual, to befall. takes the verbal suffixes, ""ay^ I am, or was not, shall not be, ^jy^, ^zrw, nivvi, &c. When fol- foUowed by the dative, "h ]'n there is not to me, i. e. I have ^^^^ ^ ^^o) a ship, not, cnS ]'« they have not. j t- t; ^>^^ (1, a) man, Lat. vir.—hus- "^yt^ to breathe through the nose, band. — man, opp. God, animals | snort; to be angry (with -i). {homo). Before other nouns T)}^ to groan. Niph. to moan, denotes the qualities of men ; "J rra^< •©'« a faithful man. — any one. — each, IVi}i^ f- (13, h) tcoman ; female. — wife. lament, 'np^i^ f. cnstr. n;?]si a groaning, lamentation. '^'^2i^ (see xd^ii) man. — the common r\i^ only.— only, but.— just now.— people. PI. D^^:^, cnstr. >r:w, surely, certainly. ':)^^^ to eat. with sufF. 'ir:w, men; commonly used for 2'r\s the plural of \r'N. ^"^*^^ f. irr. pi. u%'\ woman, fe- T • male. — wife. [App. B.] C]Di^ to collect, to gather. IDJ^ to bind. — to put in bonds; nyt:hi^ f- (11, b) a widow. T T : ~ DhJ f. (8, b) mother. HDi^ (f. 10) /Ae/ore-r/rw, cubitus, prop, the mother of the arm. — a cubit ; rv2H2 tiM^four by the cu- 1 P'^^tcp. iirw prisoner bit, i. e. four cubits. HDi^ f- irreg. a maid-servant. \ [App. B.] I J^D^< f- (for n:p_>») with suff. inps T'Di^ (3, a) captive, prisoner. • T 5^J^ (for r|3Si = p]3^<) with suff. "Et* (8,d)7io.ve. — anger. Dual D'EW. the nostrils. — meton. /ace, coun- firmness, stability.— faithfulness, ' tenance. Hebrew and English Index, nSi^ to hake. TT mh^ to go, to be on the way. rni^ c. (6, c) pi. ninns!^ cnstr. and with suff. nin'is! loay, road, path. — manner, mode. "^I'i^ (6, c) length, of time and 20: space. yij»} f. rarely m. (6, a) with the art. psn, earth, land. "Tli^ to curse, execrate. Piel, to curse. nm to or become guilty, to i^')^ to enter, come or go in (with 3, ■?«, ), also ace), n^ ^0 despise, contemn. li)')^ to be ashamed. tQ to take as a prey, to spoil, plunder. ]'n3. to try, prove, test. inn to prove. — to choose (with acc. 3, )). nt03. to babble; part. nT2ii an idle T T talker. nZDH prop, to cling to, to rely upon, trust, confide in (ha, bv). transgress. Hiph. to bring the ! j^^r^ t^^,t^ confidence, security, consequences oj sin upon any one. Dti^ (4, c) guilt. T T "Tki^K to go straight on. - T nti^i^ happiness, blessedness; only V V in pi. cnstr. in the character of an interj. \r\^rt n^rsj the hap- piness of the man!=^ blessed is the man. With suff. ^ncs happy art thou ! vnrs!, ^nnc« for T|nTt'«, &c. lyi with suff. n:2 (6, a), but in pause lyi a covering. — cloak, garment. 7(121 Niph. to be troubled, ierri- - T fied. Piel, to terrify, confound. — to cause to hurry. Hiph. i. q. Piel. /Tinil f« fl shining, whitish scurf, sinking in the skin and having white hair. y^} y)^ to distinguish, discern. — to understand. P^ (6,h) interval. — prep, between. ^'3, ]ni— ]'a, V?'?— V? between — and; sometimes also whither — or. ^n prep- prop, cnstr. of yi (6,h). r\y^^ f- (10) understanding, dis- cernment. "liDH (Ij a) the first-born. 7^1 a«iv. not. — nothing. ''721 wajit; only as adv. not, with- out. ]^ a son. See irr. nouns, App. B. r\23, to build. T T 73;^ lord, possessor, owner. — hus- band. 1^3, to consume, burn up. — in- - T trans, to burn. ^"^2, to break. — to plunder. T 206 Hebrew and English Index. ^-KT I plunder, unjust gain. — gain, ")pll (4, a) coll. oxen, herd. •tt ")p3, pi. Dn;r3 the dawn, morning. It^pH Piel, to seek; with ace, to seek after, with ); n':r,]T.ii xc^j to seek the Lord. ^^^^ boundy limit, border. — ter- ritory. "l^il ^0 be or become strong. — T n^il (6, a) man = vir. — husband, — warrior. ")i3;i.n':iMl,b) adj. s^row^r. ni^a-l f- (10) 5^re»^//i. ■)3 C0771 (separated from the [ ^-^ (s, a) roof. I -^ j n:i (6, i) a kid. chaff) ; "i"i2 io separate. J>^")21 ^0 create, form, make TT 13. with suff. '-la a son. 113 /iai/. 7lJ) to be or become great, to grow. — to be great, exalted. 112) to wall, fence up. ni3 to fee J absol. or with h, "^^^ ;^;^r\ f. healing, cure. ~T T •• {whither), ]n, nso, ^32d {from ^^i^^ ^Q\fi(^Qcntile) nation; the Gen- tiles. whom), nn« {after whom). Jl»13 f- sing- (1.^) « covenant. TJl^ fo 6eno? ^^e A:wee, to kneel. Niph. to be blessed. Piel, to praise, bless God. Hiihp. to be blessed (^ in, through). ^13 f. (0, a), dual d^?"!3, A;nee. 1313 once nD^n f. ( 1 1 , c) « 6/.s5- '^ '« <^«^ ^-^ o^ doun.-to cut in ID Cl> a) sojourner, stranger, fo- reigner. l!)i) (1, a) a w^eZ/j. •^-lii) (-2, b), pi. 6th, lot. T n^ to shear, to cut off. mg two parts, divide. 12 (n;;3 f.) chosen, beloved.— pure, lU {6,^) piece, part. clear; also pure morally. D^2. (13, c) terrour, confusion; 7?^ 'o ^oU. — to roll, rush in (?? - T upon). Hiph. b:n to roll awaxj. mostly followed by pdnim (of q^) con], also; ca— C3 both— and; iace). I" S'H C2 S'n she also herself — yea, truly ; T^? although. — yet, nevertheless. 7DI\ i^ retribute, to recompense, bi^^ to redeem, ransom, recover. ~ T 311 (8, d) pi. D'22, ni, a back. ^Q3 to bound, limit. good or evil, with ace, bv, ^. — to ripen, to become ripe. — to wean. Hebrew and English Index. 207 /Dil c. (8), pi. D^Voa, camel. T T 7^"^^ (1> a) recompense. — good \yi (4, a) corn, grain; meton. T T bread, deed, benefit. \ - n^1Q2) f. (10) retribution, recom-\^'^^^ ^'-^ (l,a) revolution. -age, T : ' generation, pense: benefit. ! j^^^ ^^ ^ ^^^^^ 77*7 ^0 Aon<7 c?oww. — to be weak. ~ T 7"^ adj. Zow, weak, poor. D^ (for m«) 2, a. 6/oot?. — blood- ^Aec?, blood-guiltiness j in ])1. D^OTTiS TL''« bloody man, city. DDT ^0 6e silent. ~ T r\))1 f. (13, a) knowledge. pi, f. niri adj. smoZ/, Z^.in. ::^1J to cast out or m;?. Niph. ' -)pr^ /o ZArw^Z through, to pierce. to be cast out.— to be agitated, ^-^Ij /^ ^^^a^ (on), with the ace. ; tossed. ' -T with b9: metaph. to tread down 25D {l,h) a thief. pil prop. ?o cover; hence ^o j9ro- p (8. d) garden. I^il ^0 rebuke, with 3. n^l Niph. to be cut off. D")5, D"13 (6, a), 6one. D^il Hiph. to cause to rain. ~ T D'l)^ (6, a), pi. c. '•ptJj, rain, ^eor?/ shower. p^l ^0 cleave, adhere. Pual, /o cleave together. Hiph. to make adhere. Hoph. partcp. piip (is) cleaving. 1^1 to speak J to range in order. ~ T Piel, to speak. Pual, to be spoken. ^'\ph. to speak together. Hiph. to subdue. Hithp. to speak with. 1^1 (4, a) word, speech, command. T T — affair. ^2l\(^,h) honey. enemies, •rj-)"^ c. (6, a), suff. ^2yi (Dual, 2''3"j"i), a way. ti^Tl to seek, to inquire (especially - T q/'an oracle, the Lord). — to ask for, require : dt "in-j to require the blood (of any one). y2}1 to grow fat. Piel, to make •• T fat. — to anoint. — to regard as fat (an offering = accept it). Pual, to be made fat, be abun- dantly satisfied. rr. P]in to push, cast away. n^n f- (10) desire, lust. — wicked- T- ness. t2 208 Hebrew and English Index, HTT io bCy to exist, 'rr imperf. Kal TT ■ ' 3 pers. m. s. (he, it) shall be: Avith Vav confers, (he, it) was. Often = Kal tyevfTo, and it was so (that, &c.). *?D*''n (2, h) a large splendid build- T '• ing, a palace. — the temple. "!j7n to go, walk. Hithp. "rj^nnrr to go, walk about. 77)1 to shine. Piel {to make to shine =) to praise, and intrans. to boast. Hithp. to be praised. — to boast oneself. ]n, ■"in behold ! lo ! — whether Cm indirect questions). — if. r\yn, r\:i'n behoui loi with suff. ■•^an, ^32n, ^jsn. ^Sin (1 pers. Tp2nw) to turn, turn over. — to overthrow, ruin. ^prr to go around, to surround. Hi])h. of npj^ ■)n ph cnn (8) mountain. 2l"in to kill, slay. ~ T Din (related to tp-mioq) to break, — T pull down, destroy (both in Kal and Piel). r. JlMt pron. demon, f. sing., see rri. nt f- n«i, rarely ni, pron. demon. rn one to the other. With em- phasis, this same, very. Ty^t to be clean. ■?JT (n:} f.) adj. clean, pure. IDT to remember, recollect, call to ~ T mind. I^T, IDT (6, c). memory. — me- morial. 77t prop. = bn to pour out, whence -T partcp. Vr,"t squanderer, prodigal. nDT f- (1^) device. — wickedness. T • i;:3t to cut. Piel (prop, to divide; - T hence) to sing hymns, praises, with ) or ace. of the person ; 3 of the instrument. ]pT (5, a) adj. old; c^;;:'? eWer*. ^1T ^0 spread, to scatter. — to sow; vy\ y"»i yielding seed. — to plant. ^1t (6, a) 5eec?.— prop, and fig. = issue, progeny. P'2T) io twist, to bind. /^Tl (6) cord, rope. 7Dn to act corruptly. Niph. to ~ T be destroyed, to perish. 13n to bind about, to gird. — T in adj. (f, rrin) sharp. this. After the subst. it usually j ^T} d'^' '"^""7) '« ^^«**- has the article; when put be-L-^^^ (-^j) ^nstr. iin. with suff. fore it without an article, it is usually the predicate, -\yf] rx\ \ '''y^^, l^h c. '"iin, chamber. this (is) the thing; m-rn Vhis—\^'ir\ PiC'l, to make new, to renew; that, the one — the other; *?« m Uiih[). to be renewed. Hebrew and English Index. p7n to divide. > - T 209 ^'Vl (6j c) new moon. — month. Sin. 7^n to twist J to dance. T)^l[^ (6) part, portion, lot of land. Hiph. to shake. HQin f. (10) a wall. T ypT (6, h), pi. D^b;rT strength. — wealth. — virtue. J^tOn ^0 wi^^- — '0 stumble, fall. T T — ^0 mm, opp. to ^?^ to find, —to sin (3, ), b?). — to forfeit, with ace. NDn with suff. S^'Jir^, pi. c. \^'rn failure, sin. i^^^rr (Ij b) sinner. ni^ZSn f. cnstr. nx'^O s«w- — sin- T ~ D>sn pl. ¥«• DDn ^0 be or become wise. ~ T DDPT (4,c), rro^n f. (11, c), pl. TT ''^"• □^DDn, adj. wise. r\'iy2r\ f- cnstr. noDn, wisdom. T ; T " ■ ^ n^n ^0 ^e it'eoA:. — /o be sick. T T 77n to be wounded. Piel, ^ □n (8> a) adj. icarm, hot. T "IDH ^0 c?eA-ire, to covet. — T n^n f. (11, b) for rrarT> (en;) warmth, rage; cnstr. kh^math. TOn f- (10) heat,glow.—the sun. T — ^DH ^0 pi^y C'?). — ^0 spare (with if). Don ^0 ^^ warm. - T ]n (S, b) grace, favour. — grace, elegance, beauty. "TJ^n to instruct, to train up. — to co)?5ecra/e (a house, temple, &c.). Diin gratis, freely , for nothing. — T • in vain. — for nothing, unde- servedly. l^n to be gracious, mercifid, com- passionate. Niph. to be pitiable. Piel, to make gracious. Hoph. to be favoured. Hithp. to im- plore favour, mercy. S]3n to be or become profaned, polluted, or defiled. — to be pro- fane, ungodly. ^^n (5, c) profane, ungodly. ion Kal not used ; in the deri- wound. — to profane. Hiph. "jnn to loose. — to profane. — begin. — begin to be. Hoph. to be begun. U/Tl to be fat, stout, strong. — to - T dream. D^bn pl- ni, a dream. , "• ' vatives it denotes kindness and ?]|pn to pass by, to transgress. benignity. Piel, to change (as a garment), -jppy with suff. ^ipn (6, a) kind- Hiph. to change. i " •" Y^n to draw out. Niph. to be' ^^^^'^'^^V- J 7- ^ i:>-i / ^ . '^'^J:)n {-i,^) kind, benevolent, gra- delivered. riel, to draw out. — [ • t to deliver.— to strip, spoil. ! cious, merciful .—pious , holy. t3 210 Hebrew and English Index. HDn to flee for shelter; hence, to T T trust in (i). ")Dn to want, lack, be without. " T ")Dn adj. wanting, nbnrn lacking •• T understanding. — subst. want, lack. D'^JHJn dual (8, c) the hollow hands, •~ ; T the fists. YH)n (6), with sufF. '2prT, delight, pleasure. 1H)n ^0 6/m5A, be ashamed, con- founded. Hiph. fopw^ ^ shame. — intrans. to be ashamed. ^^H)n to search out, explore, in- - T vestigate. li^Sn Kal not used. Pual, to be - T set free, be freed. ■^jkH c. C5, c), pi. D' . , ni, en- closure, court. — village. "T'ijn enclosure, court. ■ T r]l^n (10) 5^a^Mfe. "^pn to search. ■^"in (6, a) (pi. c. >xpnn) sAer^, potsherd. ]^lp to plough, till. — to engrave. — to form, fabricate. — Metaph. to devise, machinate evil. Uti^n to think, purpose, intend (usually in a bad sense, to in- vent, devise). Niph. to be com- puted, reckoned, counted. Piel, to compute, reckon. — to think, purpose; to devise. Hithp. to reckon oneself. '^'Vtl to hold back. — to withhold. "TJ^rr to be or become obscure, dark. %'\l)H adj., pi. D'^tTT, obscure, mean. inrr (4, c) bridegroom. — son-in- low. Dun to be broken. — to be dis- mayed, confounded. ro. nilJO to slaughter, especially ani- mals, but also men ; to slay. n^ZO (G» a), with sufF. nnnTp, slaughter. — animals slaughtered, meat. y^n, n"in to be dry. — to be de- -T •• T solate, waste. 2lirT adj. f. nnn dry. — desolate. 3in f- (6, a) sword. ^T^n desolation. Qin Hiph. Dnrrrr to devote to 7estruction.-to devote to God, j ^\}^ '« ^' "'^ ^^^''"'^ ^'^«"- ]OtD to hide, conceal, especially in - T the earth. — to hide, reserve, is decided, decision, judgment.- \^^^ ^" /«5/e.-met. to perceive, Y^lin (l,b) diligent. Prof. Lee,, sharpened, instructed, prudent. to consecrate. Y'lnn (3, a) ditch, trench. what discriminate. C]1Z0 to tear in pieces, to rend. Hebreio and English Index. 211 to cause to bring forth. — to he- get. Hoph. to be born. "T^"* (6, a) lad, youth, child. rrh^ i. {12, -d) a girl. T ; - □"♦ a sea. T D''pV ^!0^ ^p;') see Dv. ]"'D'' (3, a) the right; i2'p; T <^e • ,. .,, , „ J I ^anc? of his right side, i. e. his sitions; Ti with, by; m accord- . ,, , , , •,, -, ^t ^= ^ '• n_5'A^ Artwd; also t omitted, the ■lj^\ 'lihi'' (l>a) ^^^e^> the Nile; pi. ons^ streams. t^Q^ /o 6e or become dry, to dry •• T up. Hiph. ^0 dry up. ^T (5, a), adj. nspy f. (10), c?ry. "T ^ ' T c. (2, a) hand. With prepo- ri^/i^ hand (f.). pj> fo 5McA;. Hiph. ^'^t} to give suck, to suckle. "TD"* to found. ing to the means of; y^o from, out of; Ts, T bii, Tb T bv, T at, on, by the side of; t b^;, 'T "jr- under the care or guidance of any one. ;^1> inf. c. ro3, ^0 /tnoz..-6. ac- j ^^l ^'^ "^^'"^^ ^^'^ ^^ ^^' ^^ ^° gM«ittferf M;i/^. Hiph. to make \ "ff^in (c. inf. with or without )). known, show, inform, teach. | pfgt (g, b), ns; f. (11, a), ad}, fair, '. ; '^'^* I beautiful. — good, excellent. DV with suff. 'pv (1, a), pi. c^n;, "»^^ '»3"' (6, k) beauty. a day. , • : -t: — »ik r r.r^s t . J SJ^i't imperat. h?2, inf. c. nx:? (2, d), nj'^^ f. (10), pi. D'3V, C?Ot'e. j '^TT ^ .. V » >' "^ to go out, go forth. Tn; (3, a), m;n; f. (10), or,ly, y^, ^^1 „„f used = 3?: to set, onfy begotten. -- solitary me: \ '; ,„^^ Hithp. 3s:nr, (o ,.( only one (.^: to belts'] one. , ^^ ''^^^^^ ^^,^-,^^^. ^^ ^n^Kal not used, (o «v«^-to ; ,(„„'<,^ ;„ ,(„„rf before. ' catise i'o ivait, hope. Hiph. ^o ! -^^s to form, wait. i " ^ HID'' (only in the imperf. ri!']) ^o - T be good, well; p ^o be better. Hiph. y^prj to make good, to do well. 1^'' wine. jy f. rny, 1 pers. 'rob^, to be able. "77^ to bear, bring forth. — to be- -T get. — Pual, to be born. Hiph. 5]p^ see F](?n. Yp'» to awake. -IP"' (4, a), mp;. f. (n, c), adj. 'tt ' ■ precious. J^"l> to fear, to be afraid ('> to fear, be anxious for). Niph. «"vi3 ^o be feared, ^y (5, a) constr. «i:; rwn; f. 212 Hebrew and English Index. (11, c) coxisir. r^^y, fearing, re- verencing. in'' to go or come down, descend. Hiph. Tiin to cause to go down; to send, bring, carry down. ni"' (5, a) the moon. ti^"T> to take, seize upon. Niph. to become poor. ^t^> inf. c. m^% imperat. 2v, rrn^, to sit, sit down. — to dwell, dwell in, inhabit. Partcp. itL'v in- habitant. nii/'' Root not used, to subsist, to T T be firm. ^"^^ to deliver, save. 'y^'^ to be straight, even, right. — • - T Piel, to make straight. — to direct. — to esteem right, approve. ■^'^'^ (4)j IT*^" f. adj. straight, "^'i)^ (7, c) uprightness, rectitude; ni;j'«n more than is right. Zlk^D to be pained, be in pain. •• T "»n>}3 said to be a partcp. of Kal, •~:t from -113 formed in the Chaldee manner (as nv, partcp. d^?;?) = piercing, digging through (sc. they are). Another rcadin2h^, dog. '\ 773 to complete. j - T 1 □•^3 lliph. D^brr, o^bn, to put to j shame, make ashamed. — to in- \ "733. 133 to be heavy. — to be\ jure, hurt. Ninh. to be put to shame ; also to feel ashamed. weighty, honoured, respected, mighty. Niph. to be {become. ]3 adj. upright; adv. rightly, nUo show oneself) honoured, renowned. thus. Hebrew and English Index. 213 DJ)3 to collect, gather. \ ^. - T nto (l,b), pi. c- ni, harp or : ;^^L,^ ^L, ^^^ ^ ^ g^ ^^^ p,^ ^,^^^^ ninib, /Ae heart. lyre. nD3 ^0 cover, conceal. ^^P3 (l,a)/oo;. ^iD3 (6, a), with suff. '5p5, silver. DJ73 (6, d), with suff. ioM, iD»3, vexation. — anger. 5]3 f. (8, d) the hollow, palm of the hand, hand; dual D'23, pi. niB3; — -joaw, spoon, dish; hollow. — handle of a bolt. "133 ^0 cover, overlay. — to cover ^.^i- . *"••, , - T ^ i n^l7 I. garland, crown. over, to forgive, pardon. — to ex plate. — to appease. "7^7 separately, alone; n^b, tjii^, i^;7, &c. /, thou, he alone. — hy myself, by thyself, 8fc. \20 (4, a) adj. white. \!a7 adj. white, "ny^h f- the moon. T T ; ^Zl/ to put on a garment, to he ~ T clothed. ^1^ A 12)^7 outer garment, cloak. JT13 perf. 1 & 2 pers. \7>i3, n"i3, to cut, cut off, cut down. Niph. to be cut off' or down. — to be di- vided, — to be destroyed. aV-'I) (6, a) lai7ib. 7li^3 to totter, stagger, stumble. ~ T Niph. to stumble. Piel, to cause Urh to eat, consume. ~ T Urh <^- (6, a), with suff. ^yyfi,food, meat. — bread. 1^7 to take, catch. — to take, -T choose, by lot. Niph. to be taken, caught. Hithp. to take or catch hold on each other, to hang together. ^ ^ J7 TT- u ^ ^ J. ^^ I "7^7 to learn. Piel, to accustom, to jail. Hiph. to cause to totter, ' - t to make feeble. — to cause to \ to teach. Pual, to be accustomed. stumble and fall. Hoph. to be made to stumble 3.J13 to write, engrave. trained, taught. TV2i7 why? adv. interr., from the TT perf. ) and no or ryo q. v. D^DS, r\}r\^ (13, c), pi. ni3n3, y^^ to mock, deride, scorn. Niph. an under garment, shirt. '^ilS f- (5,b), pi. mens, constr. nicns, suff vcn!!, shoulder. to stammer. Hiph. to mock, deride. >iy^ according to. ) with stat. nJ13 to beat.-to beat, break in \ cnstr. pi of peh. mouth (irreg.). ~7 , , r7p7 to take. — to take away, pieces. —to beat down, rout. j '-t |np7 (6), '^vith suff. 'np"?, taking '-•.• ' '■' 1 speech. — instruction. 214 Hebrew and English Index. t^pb a gleaning, prp to lick, lap. '\^'^h c. (3, a) tongue ; niD^Enn perverse, deceitful tongue. 7J^D (Ij a) strength; generally as an adv. greatly, very. 'y\'^'0 (6, a) pi. □'■}■^<♦?, ni"\i

    3 /o understand. n^lD ("2, b), pi. im and o/A, /or- tification, stronghold: ]}atsar, to cut. Pi)y^yi2 f- pl- (of ^'i?'?) choice, precious things. nni:irp (io)/e«r. 13,1Q (2. b) a large plain.— a T J • desert. — speech. 11D to extend. — to measure. — to apportion. Til*2 f- (10) extension.— measure PID strife. ZO^;^ ^o totter, shake; of the foot, ' ^^^b»p f- (10^ /w/nm, plenty, slip, slide. Niph. /o be moved t^P (7,b), pi. □>-, ni, 5nare; yakash (ay), to lay snares. Dir^ to die. J11Q (6,g) (/ea//^. V T ni2T(D («wd) f. (10) counsel.— wicked counsel. — prudence, dis- cretion, phn^ (9, a) sickness, disease. il^riD f- (of the preceding) id. "I'IDTO (l,b) want, poverty. "IpHD (2, b) inmost part. nDTl!2 f- (10) destruction, ruin. — terrour,fear. r\^'0 f. (10) couch, bed. T • D^ZOD only pi. DWTpp, ni'sr'i;^, T ; - ■ " dainty meat. "1Z0D Hiph. "»"^OT io rflin, cause - T or ^iyp rain; "??> w/)on. Niph. ^o 6e rained upon. D^Q pi. (from obsol. 'o), cnstr. ^■ and reduplicated ^p^o, waters, water. D^DD (2, b), only in pi. or dual, breeches, trowsers, or drawers, for the priests. — T i^bD to be full, filed. ikbi2 (l»a) fulness. shaken. lUuh. to cause to fall HDUID f- (ll,c). cnstr. nvho^ 7 ' T T : down. service, work. -)D^D (2, b) chastisement, cor- ^^^l^^ ^3 ,^^ ^^^^^^^y^.^^^^^^^ ^„ j^„^ ,-ec/io«. — admonition, warning. ! p^^^^^L,,^ and ri*^n':'0 f. (H , a & ■instruction. Heh'ew and English Index. 13, a) a war; from [lakham] to consume. D/Q to let escape or slip, to de- 315 Ti^D (Ij a) long and full upper garment, robe, mantle. W^i^ ((lual) boiuels. liver. Hiph. to deliver, to bring , forth. Niph. to be delivered; to I VVj^ a fountain, deliver oneself escape. Hithp. ^^^ to act perversely, treacherous- to escape. ^7D io reign, to be king; bv^ i over. '^bt2 (6, a) king. mbf^ f. (12, a) queen. T ; — .nO/D f". (1^ b), pi. ni'370, king- dom. — royalty, royal dignity. D^nip^^D the jaws. npbD, npbr2 (.2, b), only Dual D^np^/ tongs. — snvffers. "nilZ Root not used; Arab, to give. — T nnjD f. (12, b) gift.— tribute.— T ; • an offering to God; especially a bloodless offering. ]Q, as a prefix -o with dag. forte, sometimes also without it, when the next letter has Sh'va, es- pecially when the letter is Yod, which then becomes quiescent, poet. '?p, \3p, of (a part taken from or out of a whole).— /rom. TTDQ ^0 mia:, mingle. WD to flow, melt; to faint. Hiph. — T to cause to faint, make faint- hearted. ID^Q to be or become little. ly ; n of the thing or person. \VD (for n^yn) purpose, only in ]ypb, with suff. ^?yob, ^:vn';", prep. because of, for the sake of, — conj. in order that. nn^D f- (10) cave, cavern. TT : TWVD (9> a) it'or^' (of an artificer). — labour. — deed. — work (the fruit of one's labour). ^"ID to find. T T niiiO f- (1^) « commandment > T ; • n!iD f- (10) unleavened bread. li^'^pQ (2, b) owy ^Ain^f sacred. — holy place, sanctuary. DipQ c. (3, a), pi. niQVPj jO''"C6'. — habitation, home. — town. 1*p('2 (3, a) spring, fountain. ' T n^pLj (9, a) purchase. — possession, wealth (in cattle). ^^^"^Q (9>a) a seeing.— sight. — appearance, countenance. n331/D f- (Hi a) chariot, war- T T ; V chariot. (IDIQ f- (10) deceit, fraud. lO^p. t^yp, pl. D>t?.n (8). .maZ/- ^^^^ ^^^^j^ .. -^^^^^^^ ^ ^^,.^,^^^ ^ hence, a little, few. - ness m^m lit. as a little; nearly, al- most ; shortly, soon. companion. i^B'^D remedy, deliverance. 216 Hebrew and English InSex. 22^'m (S, a) hill, rock, strong | -73^ with suff. n:: before, in the place. — refuge. presence or sight of. ripJ2 to draw.-to draw out, pro- y^^ j^f, c. .^i,, nrs, to touch (with long. Niph. to be protracted, delayed. Pual, jjrotracted, de- ferred. JlTfl^Q (1, b) destruction, ruin. — snare, trap. 33^D « ^i/iw^' down, couch. 7li^0 /o rw/e, Aaye dominion {bv over). "IDti^rJ (2, b) a watching, guard- ing.— a watch. — observance, rite. rrSOm f- (I3, a) a watching.— place of watching, post, station. — a keeping — observance or per- formance. — a charge. mo to touch, feel. Piel, to grope. Hiph. to grope. ^JHD adv. when^ 'nob, ^no ij? how 1, ^a, 7y). IIJ f. to flee. -T ■^nj to flow. — to shine, be bright. "in^ (*^>a) stream. — river. TT T!)J ^o depart, flee. tlD'^2 f- slumber. 7nj ^0 obtain, acquire a possession, to possess. — to obtain by in- heritance, to inherit. — to divide for a possession, to apportion. Hiph. b^^2^ to cause to possess, give as a possession. — to cause to inherit. *^^n^ f- (12, d) the act of taking })ossession. — inheritance. iDn^ serpent. long? ■•np-nnx after how long? pi/ID (pl. c^l-^no, f. npiDD) adj. H^^ to stretch out, extend sweet; neut. sweet, sweetness; V^^ to plant, pleasantness. ^^U: (3, a) prpphet. I021J Hiph. 'dr\ to look. — to be- hold. /I1 a)» pl- C'?^, ni^?, darkness, chiefly of clouds — thick cloud. 1^^ to work, labour; to till, cul- tivate; to dress. — to serve, work for another. 12)? (6, a) a servant, slave. 12^ to pass over. ■)^J7 a region or country near a river or sea. — a side . nnrr? from the other side; "iirn on the other side. IV (^>s) « witness, partcp. of ni-. m^ to go or pass by. T r ni^ (ll,h) assembly, congrega- tion. — a private party, a gang, faction. — family, household. — swarm of bees. ^^V Iliph. to cover with darkness. 2:\^V> 3:)y. 2:iV (once with suflr. T r\ T\ 'aas") a musical instrument, n Jlute or organ. 1)V> IV ^^^^- ogain. — again and again. — besides. — yet, still. C]l^ to cover with the wings; to cover with darkness. li^ (l,a), pi. ni-iiy, skin (of man or heast). T;j; (8, d), nw f. (10), adj. strong. ^y, Vy (B, c) strength, might, power. 3TP to leave, forsake, desert. r\'l]^ f. help. niOP to surround. Piel, T.2y to — T crown. TlllDV f' crown, diadem. TT -: ]^^ (6, h), dual d;:"?, eye. "T»J^ f. a city. /V (v^o\). constr. of V? 2, a) pi. c. ••bx*, with suflf. ^by, ?|^bi\ vVr, &c. prep, upon, on, ove'-, above, against. — of the objects, means, instruments by which any thing is efl^ected ; by. — of norm, rule, standard and cause, d wit bv after the manner of Melchi- zedek ; "n^y'TS in this manner; no-b^ wherefore F — at, by, near; with. — with idea of motion, to the question whither F upon, down upon, to, towards. — fre- quently i, q. bw, ) markinor the dative, to, for. — conj. though, although. — with other particles. — "?i-3 according to. rnV '° 9^ or come up, to ascend. T r — to arise of the dawn. — to spring or groio up. nbv (0, b), a leaf. V r fi^V' "I'lV (^> ^)> pl- C':ir, nijir- j rh^b^ ^- ^^'ork, deed, doing, action iniquity, sin. (of man, in a bad sense). Hebrew and English Index. 219 77^ Kal not used ; i. q. hh^ to roll; ~ T hence to repeat an action, to do habitually or effectually. — with 'l, to affect painfully. UV' D^c. (8, a or d), pi. c'Qr»' a^ooi-' ~ T people, nation; most frequently of Israel opp c^ia gentiles. "ID^ to stand. - T 7Qy to toil, labour, travail. ~ T 7^^ labour, toil. — travail. — sor- T T row. — -fruit of labour. — mischief, iniquity, sin. p'Oy to be deep, unsearchable. I^V (^- Q- ^'?) prop. name. '2,'X^ (4, b) cluster of grapes, ^y}^ (8, f.) ; rp:3? f. adj. afflicted, distressed, poor, needy. ■)3y (4, c), pi. c. nnci", o?z<5^, dry T T Yi^ CT'^a), with sufp. >2v, pi. c>!J1S c. "'^% free, n^y ^0 travail, suffer pain. 2,"^^, y^)? (6> b) labour, travail. — paw. lijp^ adj. (7, h) perverse, false. 2.1V (Arab, to be black) to become dark or dusk. 2,1V ^' (^' ^) evening. W)1V ^^j- (^' ^) crafty, cunning. — prudent. ^1^ Pl- C'^P-' cnstr. ^ip?'! scatter. '••T • : p^3 (fornxj!,irreg.)'«0"'^-' '^r'^''?^? •• • . ^ i moM/yi fo mouth.— aperture. — ]i)pV to convict of perverseness. { ^dge.— part, portion.— word ; u2 220 'cp according to the ivord of, in proportion, according to; "irw *D^ according as, even as (and i^'N omitted), so as, so that; 's"? in proportion, according toj 'B bi- according to the word or com- mand; also according to. n^D (6, a), pi. c. ^jbc, brook, stream. 79 prop, a turning to, a regarding ; hence "]5 as conj. lest, for fear that, lest haply. n^B f- (10) corner. T ' U^T^B pi- pearls; others, red corals. ^^v?\(6, a), with suff. >ri?B. a wound. Hebrew and English Indeae. D"^D fo give, distribute. Hiph. to cleave, divide the hoof. ni^"lS Pharaoh {king), the title of all monarchs of Ejjypt down to the Persian invasion. Y13 to break, tear down, demolish. p"1D to break, crush. ' -T ii?"lS i. q. c^D to break bread, with "7p9 to visit. — to examine. Niph. to be missed. — to be visited, punished. Piel, to muster. Pual, to be mustered, numbered. Hiph. to set over, appoint. Hoph. to be set over, hove the oversight of. DH^pS pl- (of i?D, 1 , b) com- mands, precepts. "IS) « young bull, bullock. ni3 f- for ms (10) young cow, TT "' heifer. 115 to separate. Niph. to be se- parated; also to separate oneself (p, Vyp from any one). Piel, b to give or distribute (it) ^o. — to spread: e. ^. a garment; to spread abroad (metaph.). tOti^D to strip or put off a garment. - T Piel, to strip, pillage, plunder. Hiph. to strip a person. — to strip off a garment. Hithp. to strip oneself. rrJ^^D f. with suff. 'rit;B, pl. ■D'Pi^B,flax. ''JID (6, i), pl. D;nB, simplicity, folly. — simple, inexperienced, ig- norant. njlS to spread out, &c. In Piel, T T to deceive, seduce {=. aTrnra'w). nriD to open. — T ^JID suddenness; rnc adv. sud- denly. JIB f- (8> e) /)fece, crumb, morsel. ^. pliJ younger IV^ {^y ^) ^ stepping, going- step, pace. ]H)!i to hide. — to lay, treasure up. 13iJ only imperf. ib^> to turn. - T "I'lBii (pi- □"IS?) 6ird; especially a sparrow, 'yy^ to tie or bind up. — to shut up. — T ■)2i (8) ad], strait, narrow — subst. adversary, enemy j distress, ad- versity. (11^ f- (10), for r^^'2, female ad- T T versary, a rival. — distress, ad- versity. Y'Pp to collect, gather. "l^p to bury. So also in Piel. -'t "l^P (6, a), with suff. nip, though in pause ii;?, pi. nnn;:, nV, se- pulchre. ]V1'[) to separate, consecrate. — to be sacred. Piel, to consecrate, hallow. ^ilp adj. (3, a) holy. — set apart, 't sacred, holy; of men, saints. ^1p (6, c) holiness. — holy place. ^\^'p to wait for, hope in. t't b^p (l,a), pi. ni, voice. W\p (once perf. c^^I^) to rise. HDip f. (10) height. Twp Kal not used. Niph. to be T 't jnade light of, to be despised; partcp. despised, mean. Hiph. to make light of, to despise. Xhp (3, a) shame, contempt. 77p to be light. — to be lessened, abated. J^^p Piel, to be jealous. Hiph. to provoke to jealousy. T^^lp f. 0-2, h) jealousy.— envy. T : '• "nip to form, create. — to get, ob- tain. — to buy. — to possess. r\2p (9, b), pi. D^Dp, mp, reed, v't * ^ ^ cane. — sweet cane. — stalk (of wheat). niVu f- tt dish, charger. tt': Yp (8, b) end, limit (of space, time, condition, or circum- stances). nijip (9, b) end, limit. v't flikp f- (ll»a) end, extremity, y^p (3, a) a judge. — leader, chief . — prince. Cj^ip to be angry, wroth (Hs "?« of the person. Hiph. to provoke to anger. Hithp. to become angry. 'y^T) to cut down, reap. - 't T'ikp (3, a) fruits cut down, har- • 't vest; hence, time of harvest. Ji^np to cry, call out. t't 2inp to draw or come near. u3 222 nip ^ce. bb'^p' ^^^^ c^Vpn;:, ankles. ynp to tear. yip (pl. ^'Vy) rags. Y"1p to close, press together (the lips or eyes), to wink, &c., de- noting fraud, cunning. Hebrew and English Index. 2nh (6, c) width, breadth. □n"l f- (6, d) , pjy-^ ^^.,7 (prop. fern, adj.) from breeze.— breath: metaph.r(7ni7y, ' folly — spirit, soul. — mind, spi- rit, disposition. — wind. QT) to be high. 3ni '0 ^c ^r become wide, large. - T Hiph. rn-jH to make wide, en- large. nSn to hang down the hands. — 1 to decline. — to sink down. — to * relax, abate, to desist. Hithp. , to relax oneself, be slothful. D3"1. VB^ fo tread, trample upon, > Hebrew and English Index. 223 especially of water, to trouble it. Niph. partcp. ^•sr\i troubled, made turbid by trampling. Hithp. CE'irin to humble, submit oneself. n^*l to delight, take pleasure in. ]iiJ"l (3, a) delight, satisfaction, acceptance. — object of delight, acceptance. — will, pleasure. — good-will, favour, grace. ^p") (4, a) rottenness. J7t^1 to be wicked. Hiph. i"\p-in ~ T to declare guilty , to condemn. — to cause mischief. — to act wickedly. V'^"^ (4, a), rr3?"ih f. adj., wicked, T T ^ ^ = J^ti^") (6, a), with suff. \S'&\, wicked- ness. "nV^"^ ^- (cnstr. nriin, no pi.) wickedness, ungodliness. )^. t. im {1,2.) flesh. V'^'y'tjy « week. rW^lt oath. ^Uti^ to be or become satisfied, - T filled (p, a of the thing). Hiph. to satisfy (]p, ^ of the thing, b of the person). ^^'l^ abundance, plenty. T T V2^ (cnstr. V2t, f. d^itlO 5etJe». Dual, a^nwip sevenfold. J7^^ ^0 5M;ear (oaths were usually : ~ T confirmed by seven victims). ' Niph. rsir: to swear, with 2 by, )to. ' ' i ■^^^ to break, break in pieces. — - X to buy or sell corn. Hiph. to cause to break through. — to sell (corn). Hoph. to be broken, afflicted, distressed. "IH^ more commonly "U'ij (6 b), in pause "ii^i, from "12^, a break- ing; sorrow, vexation, calamity. j destruction. — grain, corn. n!2^ to rest from labour. Niph. to cease, have an end. Hiph. to make or let rest from labour. — to make to cease. D^^ c. (cnstr. nixd, with sufF. T - Sr\yp; pi. nin2"c)j c?ay of rest, sabbath. :i:\t to err. "71^ (dual D]-w, cnstr. '•it) the breast. ^lUJ to treat with violence, to op- press. — to attack, invade. — to plunder. — to {lay) waste, destroy (e. g. a land). Niph. to be laid waste. Piel, to spoil, waste, ruin. Pual, pass. Hoph. to be spoiled, laid waste, wasted. TVW (9, b) plain.— field. VT t^XI) evil, wickedness. — evil, ca- ', T lamity . — worthlessness, vanity. ^•Iti? to turn, return — to turn away from. — to cause to return, bring back. — toresfore. — Hiph. tocause to return, to bring back. — to turn away (anger). — to return, give back, restore. Hoph. to be brought, led, given back, returned. "iW (l,a), cnvf, an ox.— herd of oxen. ZOnti^ io slaughter, kill (animals). 2?24 Hebrew and English Index. ^)V to laugh, abs. — "rsi to smile \ abide. — to dwell.— to dwell (in), "^ " to inhabit. upon. — "7^^ "j to laiujh at. Piel to rejoice. — to sport, play. in^ to be black. — (denonj. from j ~ T [ inip q. V.) prop, to do early ;\ hence to seek early, diligently. ; Piel, to seek early, also diligentty. -yn^ (3, a), n-jTO f. (10) adj. black. inti^ (6, d) the dusk of the morn- ing ; hence dawn, morning. P\T^^ Niph. to be marred or spoiled by rotting. — to be corrupted (morally). — to be laid waste. Piel, nnuj to destroy. — to cor- rupt, pervert. Hoph. to be cor- j rupted, spoiled. "1^^ ojicer, overseer or magistrate. 3^;^ to be grey-headed. n2'^]V f. (10) grey hair. H'*'^ (1, a) speech, discourse. — complaint. 221^ to lie down; especially to lie down to sleep or to rest one- self. n3\l; to forget. - T ]>3tir a knife. Etym. doubtful. 73'^ to act wisely, prudently. ' ]D^ (5, a), f. r\pt\ pi. ni:3;p, in- I habitant. — neighbour. nb]D, "bjl) to be quiet. T T T T mpl^ f. (cnstr. mV^, no pi. abs.) quiet, prosperity.— carelessness, negligence of God. H/'^ to send. In Piel, to send ~ T forth = to excite {it), php (2, b), pi. n\:r^)v, a table, '^b^ Hiph. "rj'bOT to throw, cast C?N into, 2, br» upon, p from ; vpii behind him, i. e. to despise), b?^ to plunder, spoil. /7^ (4, a) spoil, plunder, booty. D7t£t to be entire, i. e. sound, safe. — to be at peace. Piel, cVr, cSp to preserve, keep uninjured. — to complete.— to restore. — to repay. — to requite, recompense. U)bu} (3, a) health, welfare, pros- perity, peace. Ui) there. T Dp (7, a), pi. niQir, a name li^^ Hiph. to destroy. — to de- stroy (i)ersons, nations). Niph. Piel, to act wisely. Hiph. to' j)ass. of Hiph. look at. — to be or become iii- \ "^f^^ only pi. D"p\r (cnstr. 'ar, with telligent, wise, or prudent; to act wisely, prudently; and to make prudent, to teach. byV, byD Cin pause Vd^) regard, suir. "^'Oc) heaven, the heavens. TIDV to shine cheerfully. — to be glad. estimation.— intelligence, under- r}*-}p ^^>^^' ^^"^ ^- ^'^J Joyful. standing. ]3ti^ to lie down, to rest. — to rest, nUt^'V (12, b) joy, rejoicing, mirth. JDi^I^ to let go, remit (a debt). — ~ T to throw down. Niph. to be thrown doicn. D^!!2I^ heaven (cnstr. •'qi^', pi. m.). nbO'V f. (12, b) a garment, a mantle. nV^r^t, nVf2t f. (10) news, ti- dings. — information, report. y^t^ to hear. — to listen (with ace. — T bii, ), 3 to any one). — to hearken, obey. Pie!, to cause to hear, to summon. Hiph. to cause to hear or be heard. "1^^ to keep, watch, guard. — to ~ T preserve, protect (with ace. s, b«, hv of the object, with I'D from or against). — to keep. — to keep, observe (ace. bit, b^). ^^ c. (8,b) a ^ooM (prop, and fig.). — ivory. i^^''l} to hate. T T ^ ^ year. p^ ^0 sharpen, e.g. a sword ; partcp. ]i:\c sharp. ^VV i"^- ^^) ^ hair J collect, hair. T •• nSJ'il^ f- (11, a), dual c;nEiri, pi. c. T T - • • ninciy, lip. — speech, words. — language. — brim of a vessel. — shore of the sea ; bank of a river. nS)"i^ Kal not used; to pour out. — T nnSli^ f- (12, b) female servant, handmaid; L&t.famula. t^H)^ to judge, administer justice. — T — to condemn, punish. — 'Ctp a judge, ruler. Hebrew a7id English Index, 225 ]^E)''S)ti^ a serpent, adder. TT3ti^ to pour out. — to shed. Niph. to be poured out. Pual, to be shed. Hithp. TjEn'cn to be poured out. S]3*^ to creep. 7p^ to weigh. b\)p i.'^y a), pi. c. 'hj:%\ a shekel. t]p^ Niph. (prop, to bend for- ward in order to see). — to look out. Hiph. to look. Ipl^"] (6, a) lie, falsehood. Ipp [ shakar, to lie. T'^'\D (l,b), only pi. branches of a vine. P|n'^ ^0 Swrn, consume. 1£}1^ (6, c), pi. D^^n^', roo^. '^Jl^ to plant. — T pfl*^i^ ?o &e s^t7/, to rest, to abate, of waves, of strife. nihJD f- (10) desire, will. "I^h (6, f.) /or»/i. n^i^ f- (10) a chest.— ark (of Noah, built in the form of a chest). — the ark in which Moses was exposed. nX^2D f- (10) a coming in, being T stored up. — income, profit. — pro- duce, fruit j trop. result. r\y^2D f. (10) understanding, pru- dence. 2.26 Hebrew and English Index, (IDIDnjl only in pi. perversity, I Tp^n^ frowardness. \ --.^^^L « , scholar. rhn^D f. (13, a), with suffJ' ^'^: -; ' ^QD io take hold of. — to hold. Dpn to be completed, ended. — to cease. 'n'^nin, expectation, hope. JlilDin f. (13, a), but pi. ninpin proof, rebuke. r\2V^r) f- (11, b) abomination. — abominable act. D^DD (3, a) perfect. — whole. — upright, sincere. n^BV'^r) f. pi. (from np'^in 11, a) ^^ ^- ^?'? (10) adj- whole, per- swiftness. —wealth, treasure.— \ feet, sincere, honest.— suhst. in- brightness, splendour. tegrity. lTy\r\ f. (10), instruction, direc-^p\ or '[yS only pi. n^sn, pn Am^c Hon, precept. — law. — manner. ' serpents, sea monster; others, TT'^^PS f. help, deliverance.— pur- \ jackals. pose, enterprise.— counsel, wis-'^iirs 'P'ie\:^^r\ to abhor. —to render abominable. Niph. to be ub- dom. horred, detested; to be abomi- nable. DTID f. (c. suff. 'nm' ^j^rinri' vnnn. rrnnn. ^lynnn^ Drrnnn) prop, what yy, "'■,'■', r 7 , nipn f. (lO) expectation, hope. IS below. — adv. below, beneath.— , t'; • prep, under. — instead of. — m! return for. — on account of. — be- cause that, because. i^T?r\r) only pi. n^^iibno diseases. (The?c words were omitted in their al[>liabetical place.) jyh^i^ Strength. ]')T}r} (1> b) pi. DV, ni, suppli- ' ~. I ^1'?^^ intimate friend ; leader, cation. ' - ENGLISH AND HEBREW INDEX. A. Abominable, ^yr\2 (partcp. Niph.). Accusation, HJIO^- All, ^3 (prop, a subst., 8, d, T usually followed by Makkeph). Anger, C]J^. Anoint, ^D^ (propr. to pour out). Ark, •|n^^/^nn. T T •• Assuredly (the Hebrew idiom is by the repetition of the verb in inf. absol). B. Basket, ^D- Be, been, nTI- See 522, e. Bear (= give birth to) 17>. -T Bear, to, 21, 2M- Before, D")tO (before, of time); '>J37 (before the face). Best. See Goon. Better. See Good, and 193 sqq. Bind, T):i. Black, ninti^, int. T T Bless, "TTl^.- To bless oneself I (Hithp.)." Blood, Q1. 1 T Born. See to bear. Boy, lb\ -^^l- Boys, bn^>. •t ; Branch, "12^^. Bread, UVO' Breadth, irT). Brethren, DTfSt. Bring, J^i^ (to come; Hiph. cause to come). y]1l} (Hiph. to bring again, back, return, restore). Broken-hearted, to be. Niph. of 12't (with or without lb). - T Brother, ^^*. T Burn, C]'n';i; ; Ip** (to burn slowly, steadily). \Bury, 12p^. j But, '^2, ^^. 228 English and Hebrew Index. C. Camel, ^D-1 (pi- c^p3). T T ' Child, l'?^. Children, U^y^, DH^^ • T • T ; Choose, -inn, nin. - T TT City, -TV- Cities, Q>"iy. • T Clean, to be or become, "intD- Clean, adj. ■^1^Z0• T Clothes, "7^3. C/oMc?, ^AicA-, 3p (v). T Cluster, :^^, Vot^Nt. Co//ee^ yip. Come (down), *7")'». — T Command, TVi*^ (Piel of m^, obsol.). Commandment, T\W2- Compassion, have, 7Dn (/^)« Covenant, D^'l^,- Cover, nD3- T T Covet, non — T Cow, niD; ")iii^ oa?. T T Create, ^^■^l• TT Crown, "ins ; IT (an ornamental border round the top of the altar). Cry out, to, p^t (^vith S). Cursed (partcp.) "l^li^. T Cut, 7113. — T D. Daughter, J121. Day, DV. Days, Wl^^ Death, rWO (6, e). VT Deliver, 7^^^ (Hiph. to cause to - T deliver). Desert, to, ITV- Desolate, to make, 3111 (to destroy). Destroy, ^0*^ (utterly) ; 13^^ (in Hiph. = to cause-to-perish). Destruction, rmriD- Devour, 73 J^. - T Diligent, "IMD- • T T T Do ^roorf, to, 310^. - T Door, Pibl. Dream (verb and subst.), D^H- ~ T Dry (land), ^::^2^ T T — Dry (dry-up), ]ni''' - T Dj/5^ "13^. Cry out or a/o«./, to, i^y^ (to ^^^^^^^ ^^^ (to sit, dwell, abide) call). Curse, "n^^. ]3I^ (to rest in, inhabit, dwell with). English and Hebrew Index. 229 E. Each other (often translated by * a man his fellow,' ' a man his brother,' &c. From each other: * a man from his brother,' &c.) rv}'^ bxr2 t'iji' Earth, yiSt. Eat, bDl^'. ' Enemy, 2^")^^- Evil, j7n, n;^"i. T T T Eye, ]«'y. Eyes, U'^yV- Face, D''J9 ipi-) With b in the ■ T cnst. form, ':pb, before (implying rest); also ';E'p, before, from be- fore (implying removal). Faint, P''^ (faint, tired). Faint, to be, C]^"! (to be fatigued, tired). Faint, to make-, DDDj in Hiph. ~ T — ^T (to tire, weary). -T Fall, ^3J ; b22 (to wither, decay). -T - T Fat, a^rr. Father (irreg.) Q^J. Feed, T^^l. T X Field, nir. F»7/, K^Q. Piel of male". Flee, nin, "nj. — T — T Flesh, y^2i' Flock, ]ik*l Flood, b')2r^- Fly from, to, n^B; "TIJ (=flee). Fool, bDD, '^^DD^'^ni " -r T • : T T For, "^S. Form, to, "^^^''. — T FoMKc?, to, ID^; 113 (to make firm, fix : e. g. the earth). G. Garden, p. Gardens, □''^21. Garment, H^D^, i;!!. Go^Aer, ynp; D^3 (to gather into a house, or place of se- curity). Girl, n"T^> Girls, m^l. Give, ]r)y ' Give -forth, to, ]rii (e. g. the voice). Gladness, 7^21 • Gforj/, -7U3. Go, ^br\, ^3. Goo/, T^. Gorf, D^ibN; '^Nt. Goorf, nitO-'* Grape, ^jy. Gra55, Kl^l; Tiin (dry grass). 230 English and I Grave, ■•^R: Great, ^ii|, "^T^- Great, to be, Vi5. Grow, bli. ~T H. Hand, T. T Hand, right, ]'»0\ Hand, left, bikO'V. Hands, Q^T^. Hate, U2V^ •'T Head, ^^^1. Hear, ^^2^. Heart, 2^7- Heavens (singular not Height, nijip. Hell, b^m. Herb, liiirj;; ^^t^•T (a tender grass). Hide, to, ]3iJ. ~ T Holiness, t^lp (6, m). Honour, 11^3. Honour, to, 1^3. Honey, I^^^'l (6, r). House, J1^3,. ziow, r|>^jJ, nrj. How /onr/, >J-|:: 1^. ~ T • •• Hypocrite, CjiR- used), green. I. In, prep. 3, prefixed. Sts *^ : e. g. to trample in (= to) the dust. Increase, n3."l- T T Inhabitant, 'y^!)^ (yashabh, 5,1). Iniquity, "JINt, y\V' Joy, r\nr2V, \w't- T ; • T K. Keep, ^J2t' - T Kill, 7lOP ; tOrr'^* (to slay as a - 't - t sacrifice) ; H^ZO (to slaughter). ~ T Kindle, pTlp (to kindle itself = to be kindled). King, TJ^Q. To he made a king, Hoph. of r]b^. Kings, U'Dbr2- Kingdom, HD^^!^- Kingdoms, Jlo'l^.tDO- Kiss, ^t\. Knee, -^J-j^. Knees, D^3121 i^^i/e, Jl^D^}.p; r?;;^ (a knife). Know, ^IV Knowledge, p{^'^. Lamb, i^33. Lament, "730 • English and Hebrew Index, 231 Land, Y•n^^. Large, ^T]^, bi:\' T T Law, m^n. T Leaf, rhV- V T Learn, ID/- - T Leave, to, ^T^. Length, •?J"^^^. L«>, no. TT -E'i/"'?, D'^^rr, pi. (the life, applied to God and man only.) Like, 3 (as prefix : before mono- syllables and barytones often 3. See rule). Lion, nnst. Little, ]tO*p- Lo, -(n. Look, to, Hhil; MJ (Hiph. to T T - T look into, investigate). Lord, r^T\''• T ; Lord, my, ''^'7^^ (pi. my Lord, T —J applied to God); ''^*7^^ (sing. my lord, applied to man). Lords, W'P'i^' Love, to, 2r^t^- ~ T M. Man, D"T^^, V'i^, ^iJJJ^- T T v; Master, fHi^. Men, U^lV^i^ (the men of a family). Mercy, IDH. Mix, "^JDD.' Mock, \^b ; ^^b (to deride). Money, ^D3. Mother, OJ^. Mount, Mountain, "in. Mouth, HD. cnstr. ''3 (irreg.). Multitude, 2.1 (= number, nu- merousness). N. Naked, D^*)V- T JVame, Qt^ (pi. rn'O'p). Neighbour, ^H; D"!V"^. Nest, ]p ; pi. kinnim, cells. Night, nb'>b; n";;ij (evening). No, i^bi'Ti},c{. 257, end. iVo rwaw, ]l}^i^ ]>^^. Number, to, IBD- - T o. Ofl^^, jrnt^. To fake an oath of - T a person, say : * to en use-to- swear (Hiph. of nir) any one.' Observe, "}0I£;. Offer, nip. " -'t Offer-sacrifice, to, nnt. OZf/, ]pT (of a man). To be so many years old, say : ' was a son of so many years.' Open, to, nJ13- Or, IK. Overthrow, to, TQ*^ (to destroy). - T Ox, 'Vit; Ipn (horned, tame 'tt x2 cattle). 232 English and Hebrew Index, Part, ^^n. People, UV- Perish, 12^. Pervert, to, C]7D- Place, D^pD. ' T Place [a man'] over, to, Hiph. of Plant, to, ^[01 Plunder, to, bbll), ]]2- ~ T -T Prisoner, 1^D^^• Proverb, btf2' T T Prudence, PTO'lV- T ; T Purge, "^33 (cover, expiate). Queen, HD^ItD- Q. R. Rain, I'^mr}. Recompense, to, u7^' Red, D^^^. T Require, ]^1^. ~ T Restore, ^W- Righteous, p'»'7j{. Righteous man, p'^'^)^. River, ")nj. Room (= chamber), "lirf. Ruler, b]i))t2 (partcp. from ma- shal). S. Sack, /^^;np^j^. Say, -iQhJ, i:n. Scorn, Y')'?. Scorner, ^7- Sea, D^ See, /ol HN^n. Seed, ;?^t/ " iSeec?, /o bear; to seed seed, ^^t Seek {for), ^r^. - T Separate, TIB. -T Serpent, ^jll T T Servant, T^y. ~ T Shadow, 7VJ. Sharp, "7pf ; f. H'lrT. S/sear, Tt:). -T '••T • • T Silver, V^03- Skin, lij;. Smite, HDH (Hiph. of to). Son, ]2 (irreg.) ; '^2 (poetically). Song, -^^p. Sow, to, ^")T. Stalk, n2p.^ Stand, lOj;. ~ T Statute, p^n. Statutes, D''pin- Steal, :i::i. English and Hebrew Index, 233 Stone, I^J^, Stones, W^^t^. • -J- — . Strip, ZOlif^. To strip oneself, " T Hithp. Strong drink, l^t^r. Strong-hold, I'^^O- Sword, jiirr. Take, Tlpb; l^b (to conquer, take by force). Take an oath. See Oath. Take captive, to, Jl^l^- Tell, i:)l -lO^^, nY"! (Piel of -T - T •• • dabhar). Temple, ^D^rt. T " Thick cloud, 2^. T Thick clouds, 0'^2V' Thief, 2!1^. Threshold, V^'Q. Together, "in^- Tongue, ]'\t>b- Town, ^>y. Trample, D^l- - T Treacherous, "T2I21. Treasure, pDZOD, H^^D, ]prr. Treasure-house, ")!^'i<^. T Tree, y^. Trust, to, ntOn ; l^i^ (Hiph.) to cause to believe, put faith in. Truth, r\f2^' V. Verity, mi^. Very, n')^' Vessel, >b^'. Vessels, Q^73 ; cnstr. '•'?!) (irrej?.). Vineyard, D"l3. Virgin, ilbM12' Voice, ^Sp. U. Understanding, T^Ti^D- T : Unpunished, ''p^. Unpunished, to be, r\p^ (inNiph.). Utterly. SeeToDESTROY(utterly). W. Walk, irSn. f^asA, ri- Write, 2ri3. Wisdom, (IDDrT- Withdraw, P]Di^ (to bring home, Y. collect). To be withdrawn, taken __ away (Niph.). ^^«^' H^^' D''Q'- away (Niph.). Woman, ^li^^*. Fear5, D>3;^. Ahram, D")Il^< (the exalted father). Abraham, UH^yt^ (the father of T T ; - a great multitude). Adam, Qlh? (earthy). Amorite, "'ib?^- V T Babylon, 7^3,. V T • T Elie::er, nTj;>bi^. PROPER NAMES. Jerusalem, D^ti^Tl^- Jew, n^n\ Joa6, asv (God the father). T Joseph, C]DV (increasing). Isaac, pHT- Ishmael, ^hJ^Qt^^V T ; • Israel, bi^l'V. T Halleluiah, ri''"^77n (praise ye T ; — the Lord). Ham, QH (hot). T Hebrewess, Tl'^l^^. ■J. . . . Hebrews, D^IQ^. Jacoi, 3pj;> (a detainer). Jehovah, ilirf- T ; Jeremiah, ^H^'D'^'^ (exalted of God). Zion, I^^J Midian, ]nrp. 3/ofl6, 3^^VJ (of the Father). T Noah, nij (a comforter). Rebekah, Hpn")- 5ion, ]j^V^. Solomon, riij?^!}- APPENDIX. A. Table of Declensions. Gesenius (who is followed by Hurwitz, Stuart, &c.) divides the Hebrew Nouns into 13 Declensions, or rather arranges them under 13 Paradigms, which we here add for reference, though it will not be necessary to enumerate all the variations and exceptions in so elementary a work as the present. Observe — o) That all feminines without a distinctive feminine ending are inflected like the masculine Paradigms, except that they generally take their pi. in 6th (TY)); Q"!!!, sword, pi. D^Il")n, constr. Jli^^n (khe'rebh, kh'^rabhoth, khar'- T~: :~ bhoth). With the suffixes the stronger abbreviation then remains : see the Feminine Paradigms. b) Grave suffixes are those which have always a strong accent or tone. Such are most suffixes of 2nd and 3rd pers. plural, whether joined to the singular, as D3, ]J, □H, ]!!, but not D_, *!Q1, or to the plural, as Qp>_, ]2-, Drf-, ](!''-. but not iD"'-- The other suffixes are called light. c) In the plural the light suffixes attach themselves, without exception, to the status absolutusj the heavy or grave suf- fixes, to the status constructus. Arrangement of the Declensions.'] 1. Monosyllabic and dis- syllabic with immutable vowels. 2. Monosyllabic with mutable (t); and dissyllabic with a similar vowel for ultimate, and im- mutable vowel for penultimate. 3. Mutable (t) or (••) for penul- timate : immutable vowel in ultimate. 4. Dissyllabic with (tt) or (t- )• 5. Dissyllabic with mutable (.. ) for ultimate : mutable (t) for penultimate. 6. Segolates or dissyllabic nouns, with accent on penultimate. They are derived from an original monosyllabic form with Pathakh. 7. All with mutable (••) for ultimate: and immutable vowel for penultimate. Also some monosyllabic nouns from n'*'/- 8. All that double their final consonant by dagesh when augmented. Q. Jl- final. 10. il— final preceded by an immutable vowel. 11. H- final preceded by mutable (x) or (••). 12. Feminine nouns chiefly derived from the segolate forms 7^3, /V^^ /V^- 13- Segolate nouns formed by the addition of the feminine ending n_l. — To the examples in the Paradigms add : misge'reth {enclosure), igge'reth {letter), masc5'reth {wages), 1 The Declensions Absol. Consfr. Light suff. Heavy svffix. I. {horse) S. DID DID V^D DDDID P. D^P^D ^P")D ^P^D DD^p^D II. (eternity) S. P. • T i ^b')y III. (overseer) S. 1>PD "f^pD n^pB °?TP? P. Dn-pD TP? n;pD oin^pB a. (word) S. "^?1 -in-^ nn*! D?"!^l IV.^ P. b. Dna^ '?.?7 -T ; Q?"?.^! (wise) S. DDn 2?l! 'P?Q 3?p^n P. DpDn ••DDrT •'DDH nyby^ a. (old man) S. P. b. (shoulder) S. 1P_! ^^p;. 'm D??P! °??.pi v.i '^O? '^O? P. /lisriD r)iH)ri3 c. (co7irt) S. "•"ffC^ "i^'n n-^n DD")^*rT P. Dnjn n^^rr ni;rT ... .. . - ' a. (kiv(/) S. P b. • T : - T ; \ (book) S. "IDD nap n?P DD-)9p P. DnSD '"]?? nsp ' DDnsp c. (snnctunn/)S.\ D^'^ip • t't: '^"ip: 1 °9^7P, Absol. Constr. Light suff. Heavy suffix. Dual absol. Meaning. sus 5usim suse «usai 5U5'chem' sAsechem' yoma'yiin {two days) i }>61atn i>6]amim :^61arn i^ol'me i?61ami :i^61araai i?6lamchem' i^ol'mechem' .-It; V nielka- kha'yim {pair of tongs) pakid p'kidiin p'kid p'kide p'kidi p'kidai p'kid'chem' p'kidechem' sh'bhu- rayim {two weeks) dabhar d'bhar d'bhari d'bharchem' ' D^lj? {wings) d'bharim dibhre d'bharai dibhrechem' c'na- phayim khacham kh'cham kh^chami kh^chamchem' 'D^l^n {hips) kh^chamim khachme kh*chamai khachmechem' kh-- '' latsa'yim zaken z'kan z'keni z'kanchem' DOn^ {thighs) z'kenim zikne z'keriai ziknechem' y're- cha'yim catheph cetheph c'thepoth cithphoth khatser khHsar khnseri khnsarchem' khnserim khnsre kh^tserai kh"tsrechem' me'lech me'lech malci raalc'chem '3:^';^!} {feet) m'lachim malche m'lachai malcechem' rag'- la'yim sepher sepher siphri sTphr'chem' q;^?? {double) s'pharim siphre s'pharai siphrechem' ciph- la'yim kodesh kodesh kodshi kodsh'chem' {loins) k°dashiin kodshe k''dashai kodshechem' moth- na'yim Dual Constr. 3 1 ,q;3 (cSnp he). 2 ,^-,n (k hSltse). 3 ^n(rag le). - ,..-,^ 3 (mSthne). The Declensions ^ A Absol. Constr. Light suff. Heavy suffix. (a youth) S. > * "^i?.^ '1^1 D?l^^ p. Dnyj ""^^^ '^y^ °?'?^^ 6. (perpetuity) S. m5 n^\j ^n>': Q^rr^*? P. • T ; '^n^: - T ; f. {work) S. bvB i '^^?r ^t^-^?r VI. P. •> '?^.?r '^y? °f!?% g. {death) S. V T DID ••iiiD DDiliO P. D^JliO '0'^ ^niD DD^rivj h. (oZiW) S. n;? •^1! '-07 DD/1\T P. ym '^7 '•07. Dym i. {fruit) S. >n|) np "•nfj °?P.3 {gazelle) S. >2ij P. 'a. {enemy) S. ^'.^ ^:.^ '?'^^ °??!^ P. D^n^j^ '?'^ ^n^i< DD^3\S VII.. b. {name) S. Dt Dt^ ''P^ DDP'^ P. n^Dt jiiD^!^ ••Jiioir uyn^bt ■a. ^5ea) S. P. y T D! '?! ddq: d^d: '?- '^! °??! VIII., b. (mother) S. P. 0^ c. (statute) S. pn ■P7 ^P7 DD|?r7 IX. P. (seer) S. nrii nyh P. D\in '}p "jn Dyjh of Nouns, Absol. Constr. Liight suff. Heavy sujjix. DumI absol. Meaning. na'i^ar n'i^arim nai^ar na^'»re nai^Ti n'i'arai nal^archem' na 'rechem' na-* i^4ayim {pair of sandals) ne'tsakh netsakh nitskhi nitskh'chem' n'tsakhim nitskhe n'tsakhai nitskhechem' po'ral po:^al p6i^°ii poi)°l'chem' p'^^alim p ^le p'^alai p6r°lechem' maveth moth mothi moth'chem' mothim mothe mothai mothechem' za'yith zeth zethi zeth'chem' 'D^Tjr (eyes) zetbim zethe zethai zethechem' i>enayim p'ri p'ri piryi pery'chem' u^'vb (cheeks) ts'bi Ikhl- ts'bhayim ya'yim oyebh oy'bhim oyebh oy'bhe oy'bhi oy'bhai oyibhchem' oy'bhechem' mo- (pair of scales) shem shem sh'mi shirachem' z'nayim shemoth sh'moth sh'mothai sh'mothechem' yam yam yammi yamm'chem' ^D;si^ {nostrils) yammim yamme yammai yammechem' appa'yim em em immi imm'chem' ' ^'J^V {teeth) immoth immoth immothai immothechem' shin- khok khok- khiikki khokk'chem' na'yim khukkim khukke khukkai khiikkechem' khozeh khozeh khozi khoz'chem' kh5zim kh5ze khozai kh5zechem' O JAL Con. 5 ^Vv-j (ua2?^le). 2 ,,,j, (jTene). 3 'si^jo (moz'ne), " 'p.v< (SppS). * ---• (shiniie). Feminine {mare) S, Absol. Constr. Light svffix. Heavy suffix. X. npiD JipiD Dpjnp-iD P. niDiD niD^D ••jniDiD D.TjiiDID a. (year) S. r}yD r\yp '^IV 0?0^^ P. b. {sleep) S. • T n\yp '^liM XI. r^y:) nyp '-0?^ 090^'^ P. Jii5t^ ii)yi) ^0^^^ DH^'riiji^ c. {righteous- S. ness) ^ r ^ a. {queen) S. ^ii^ ns^o ••jnp^o DDJ12)Sp P. b. {reproach) S. /ioSd "jHO^Q DH^JloSp XII. nsnrr r)3"in ''jnDnn - • Y P. JiiBSn : V Dn''hiS)"irT c. {waste) S. J^?in nnnn ^n^yn V • ~ * T P. tt; nin-in - ; T Dn^jiuSn a. {sprout) S. J^P^^I' -np^i'' 'm' DDnp^v XIII., P. b. {skull) S. jiipiiv ••jnipji^ • ; T ; V DH^riip^V • : : T : \ P. : : \ : : \ '^iyht>i Noims. AbsoL Constr. Light suffix. Heavy svffix. Dual absol. Meaning. susoth 5usath 5U56th susathi susothai susath- chem' t shanah Bhanim sh'nath sh'noth sh'nathi sh'nothai sh'nath- chem' t • - T : s'pha- tha'yim (lips) shenah shenoth sh'nath sh'noth sh'nathi sh'nothai sh'nath- chem' t tha yim (corners) ts'dakah ts'dakoth tsidkath tsidkoth tsidkathi tsidkothai tsidkath- chem' t malcah m'lachoth malcath malchoth malcathi malchothai malcath- chem' t yarca- tha'yim (sides) kherpah kh'raphoth kherpath kher'photh kherpathi kher'pho- thai kherpath. chem' t rikma- tha'yim ( double embroi- dery) khorbah khTabhoth khorbath khor'bhoth khorbathi khor'bho. thai khorbath- chem' t y6ne'keth yone'keth yonakti yonakt'- D;jn!?^p (cymbal) yon'koth yon'koth yon'kothai chem' t m'tsil- tayim gulgo'leth gulg'loth gulgoleth gulg'loth guigoiti gulg'lothai gulgolt'- chem' t 1 •- : \ : n'khush- ta'yim (double fetter) Dual Constr. ' TlCiD (siphthe). * \ni?S (panne). ^ ^n3T (ySrc'the), + The distinction between light and heavy suffixes ceases in the plural of feminine nouns. B. Table of Irregular Nouns. Meaning. 1. Irreg, Noun. Constr. Plur. Constr. With Plural. suffixes. Father 21^ T abh abh, -bhi abhoth abhi, abhiv, •bhichem. &c. Brother T akh ''khi akhim akhai, 'khi- chem, &c. Sister Pi)ni} iikhoth ■khayoth akhyoth akhyothai. Man 1 ish 'nosh ishini *nashim anshe ishi, &c. Woman T • ishshah esheth nashim n'she ishti, &c. Maid T T amah •maholh amhoth House ji;^ bayith beth Ijatim batechgm, &c. Son 1? ben ben- banim b'ne b'ni, bin- chgm. Danyhter DB bath banoth b'noth batti, &c. Day DV yom ■ yamim y'ml Vessel ^^? c'li celim cglyi, cS- ly'cha. Lion n^? «ri "rayim Kid '7^ g'di g'dayim City "IT * i^r i?aritn Water D'P_ mayim mayim mh Mouth V peh pi pi (my^), picha, piv, &c. Head I:^^i-l rortsh raashim «<5 * * * .Tg * S5. n. ' "i p' ^ n n^--^ H X ^ a -F 9^1 o 1 * "s * ."% <-;: a -^ H 9j lO nj J3 f^ *2 & .x§ j^ r^ 9: J3i 9 J-^ "b J^ 9 j-^ 's •"■ * * . IS ifc .Toj * .'kL * $ ..^ * •s H /ii: •io n>j-.^ hi ■§ h>^ n^ •"■d nv:-)rf •5 a, .9 r3 9: -^ 9= 9' 5P 9 -^ 9 -:c S '>^ j^ V^ j-^ ^ -^ ^^ J= ■*' ■?v H < * « * b; ^ lO fol ni is r:< Ti3 n lOJ S .n 9: n: l2 9: .>^ .j-^ D=J ^•1 J^ 3rt J' -:<: ^ CO J-^ ;5 ^-v '^ § * r:.| # * )i^ * * l;;? s n^ o nl To nr JCt rii :z; r^^ r- i i:^Dp^ 2 cm. Dj^^S^P* Dn^;ppp urh^^p Qi?"?^!? 1/ \^%\^ IJ^'PPPiJ ]p\b'^\> l^f^ii 3 c. '^?,. •''^^i?i> ^%\) •ly^ij 2. Inf. {constr.) bbp* ^^ijn* bv^p* "^^p* Inf. (absol.) bS'^p* (^^^I^:) bbpT}* bbp: bbp* 3. Imp. (Sin^r. m. bbp* ^^W}* b\£p* /. '^Pi?* 'bi:}pr\* >'^Dp* P/ur. m. •i^ipp ^^^rr ^bb\l (none) /. ^^"p'^i?* n:^^pn* T : •• •- 4.Imperf. (Fut.) Sinn. 1 c. •propi;^ '^^IJ^ "^^i^^. ^^i^^^ 2 1 7». ':'bpri ytOijn b\^pr} ■ b]^pF\ V- "hv^pr}* '^Pif^* ')^?f}* 'b^^prs* 3 cm. %p>; "p^p^/ %?::!' %p\* V 'pbph i '^[opn ^^?p}* b]^pr\ Plur. I e. bb'p;i i y^Di^j ^^^\l^ ^^?^ 2j™. ^bipph ! ^b'i:;ipr) ^b'^pr} ^b'^prs 1/ T :, ': • i T • •• 't • r^phpn* 3,™. ^tJiop^ -iTtpp;^ ''^%?1 •■^"^^P? u- ni'^ropr^* !^j'?'?P,-n* nj'^LDp.-yi* m'rVicJ?* 5.PTCP.ac/.^I3p« 6./>.'?iroij* ^9pr ^?>l^^* ~ b^p^ 10 r/ the Regular Verb. serve as models for the rest.) 1. Perfect. Sing. 1 c. KAL (1). NIPHAL(2). PI EL (3). PUAL (4). ka/al'ti nik^al'ti ki/^al'ti kii/fal'ti 2 (m. ka^al'ta nik/al'ta kif^al'ta ku^al'ta \f. ka/alt nik^alt ki//alt ku^^alt 3 I'm. ka/al nik^al kittel kuttal {/• kanah nikflah k\tf\a\i kntt'lah Plur. 1 c. ka^al'nu nik/al'nu kittal'nu ku«al'nu 2 cm. k'/altem' nik^altem' ki«altem' ku^/altem' \f- kValten' nik/alten' ki«alten' ku^alten' 3 c. ka^'lu nik^'lu kitt'lu kutt'lu 2. Inf. (jconstr.) Inf. (^absol.) k'/6l ka^ol hikka/el fhikka^oH Inik^ol / ka«el ka/^61 ku«al ku//6l 3. Imp. -Stn^. m. k'tol hikka^el ka^fel P/wr. w. km kiM hikka/Ti hikkarm ka^'li ka/riu (none) / k'/ol'nah hikka/el'nah ka^el'nah 4. Imperf. (Fut.) Sing. 1 c. 2 fw. V- ek^ol ekka^el -ka«el «ku«al tik/ol tikka^el t'ka^el t'ku^al tik^li tikkani t'ka^'li t'ku^rii 3 j m. yik/61 yikka/el fkattel y'ku^al [f- tik/6l tikka^el t'ksitiel t'knttal Plur. 1 c. nik/ol nikka^el n'ksittel n'ku^al 2 rm. tiki'lu tikkar'lu t'ka//'lLi t'ku/flu V. tik/ol'nah tikka^el'nah t'ka^/el'nah t'ku^/al'nah 3 fm. yik/'lu yikka^'lii y'ka//'lu y'ku/flu V- tik^ol'nah tikka/el'nah t'ka^/el'nah t'ku^/al'nah S.P.axcP. {- 11 t. ko/el I 55. kaMl/ mkm y3 m'ka/^el m'ku«al General Paradigms 1. Perfect HIPHIL (5). HOPHAL ((i). HITHPAEL (7). Sing. 1 e. 2(m. \f- 3 Cm. V- Plur. 1 c. 2 Cm. 1/ 3 c. rh^pn 'b'^p7\* nVippn* •ij^Dpn Dn^ZDpn v: -•;. ]n^^pn ^"^^ippn ''rhhpr\ phhpr\* rtopn '%PJ^* rhiiiipn* T ; ': T ^^"pppl^ DriSropn ... . - 1 . T in'^ropn V : - ': T •i^ipprr ''Pb^^pm pbhpjyr}* pbi^pjy} ' %PPT n^LDpjin* ^^bhpm upb\!hpm ]P%pP\} ^bv^^pm 2. Inf. {constr.) Inf. iabsol.) 'p-'^pn* 'p^tDpn* 'p^pn* b\$pm* 3. Imp. SiM^-. m. ^?PlT* •"^^^pn* nj^iDpn* (none) b*^pnr\* ^b\^pPT} r^fyhpm* 4.Imferf.(Fut.) Sing. 1 c. 2 rm. V- 3 rm. V- riur. 1 c. 2 rm, I/. 3 rm. I/- ^>^p^j b'i!^pr\ ")'^hpP* ^'ppr >bp^ ^^>^ph ^^^?5p^ ^'^'^Pl ^Dpij ^^pJl '"P^P^* h6p} ^bu^pp : : T T^f?hpp nrropn* i T : - ': T 1 b\2iPn^ .. _ . ... ^Lppjnri ^'^LppoJi* b\2fpr}P\ "^'^pj?? r^p^^pn'p 6. Partcp. 12 •^^ppo* *?IOpD* 'P^^PJID* T ': T ..!-.. of the Regular Verb, 1 Pt^owppt HIPHIL (5). HOPHAL (6). HITHPAEL (7). Sing. 1 c. hik^al'ti hok/al'ti hithka^al'ti 2 rm. hik/al'ta hok^al'ta hithka^al'ta V hikfalt hok^alt hithka^alt 3 Cm. hik/il hok/al hithka«el [f- hik^i'lah hokriah hithka^'lah Plur. 1 c. hik/al'nu hoktal'nu hithka//al'nA 2 Cm. hik/altem' hok/altem' hithka/Zaltem' If- hik^alten' hok/alten' hithka«alten' 3 c. hik/i'lu hokriu hithka«'lu 2. Inf. (.constr.) hak/il hok/al hithka//el Inf. (a6so/.) hak/el hok^el 3. Imp. Sm^r. m. hak/el hithka«el PZwr. m. hakfi'ii hakri'm (none) hithka/rii hithka/riu /. hak/el'nah hithka^fel'nah 4. Imperf. (Fut.) iSin^'. 1 c. 2 cm. ak/il tak/il ok^al toktal ethka//el tithka^el tak^rii tok/'li tithka/rii 3|m. yak/il yokfal yithka^el I/- tak/il toktal tithkaf/el Plur. 1 c. nakdl nok/al nithka//el 2rm. takri'lu tok^'lu tithka^/'lu V. tak/el'nah tok/al'nah tithka«el'nah 2 Cm. yak/i'lu yokriu yithka/riu V- tak^el'nah tok^al'nah tithka^/el'nah 5. Paktcp. makdl mok/al raithka«el 13 Verb with First Guttural (cr^). E. Verbal 1. Perfect. Sing. 1 c. KAL. NIPHAL. 1 HIPHIL. 1 • :--.-;|v 1 HOPHAL. • :-r:iT 2 rm. I/- ' ~ . • 1 T 3 im. ~ T ' ■^'P;^^'^ * '^"^vh* ' '^^t\l* V mr2v T : IT npyr rrrhvT] T : ,:)T Plur. 1 c. ^T^h:^ •1:7^1;:^ ^nhvp^ ^^IPy.T 2 fw. Drnpr ^•(^^ip^i^ Djniparn ar^ioijn V- l^TP^.* I^IPJ^I^^ IJplP^i'i l^iPJ^'l 3 c. Tbp* .. X •• n\p;;r7 : t:it 2. Inf. {constr.) i\pj7rT* — T^l T Inf. {ahsol.) liDV -TiQ;;:: "T'Di^rr* ' .1 ■ 3. Imp. Siwt^. 7/i. iby* ^^^Tp^rr' "ip:rn* P/wr. m. '7'PV ■n;* Tpif"* l-^- ■^'^i'j;^ , ■^P^b I'^vr^ — t '1 T P/«r. 1 c. '^^k- ' lio "^'pvX ipio^ 2 rm. : - |- : |T •• n\pi^.in : t;it 1/ mi.o^ji T ; •• T •• T ; - t:|t 3 in. 1 •np^V ^ : 1 r" 1 • 1 1 ^"^P^'r I/. njiDyn mipyn n:)7iyn n:)7rjOT Pap TCP. act. TQV pass. "TlQy 14 • ~;i~ T t:it Paradigms. Verb with Second Guttural (/> KAL. NIPHAL. PIEL. PUAL. HITHPAEL. - T T -:iT ^:mhp ''P\^hpi i^^ihp} ^'npT} irip"]^ T : mp T -\-)Jl* "^i^or^* mp* •• T • -:iT • T : - T • T : -T (none) n^pnniirr uup^ \:ir\pp\ \6np^* mprs ^np} T ; - : • Ionian •• T • T : - T • 1 T : - T • r : - T : T ; - T : ; |T ; • •• T 15 T : • ^1??* ij-jn^* TjnajiQ* Veub with Third Guttural (r/^). Verbal KAL. NIPHAL. PIEL. 1. Perfect. Sing. 1 c. ^r\r6^ ^rrijt} '>r\rm} 2 fm. pr6t T ; ~ T U jj^n'pV* r\r6ty rin^V* 3 j m. *n^^ rbt) 'rhti* ) V rrbt T ; 1 T rrht Plur. 1 c. ^T6t ^T6m ^yiitl 2 1 m. ursrbp o^n!?'^? uprii'^ I/- ]nrhv \^'n^V^ ]r\rf2t 3 c. Tht^ rht 2. Inf. (constr.) ri'?!?^* rhT Inf. {ahsol.) - T vhty rht* 3. Imp. /Sin^. m. rht* nVfn* rht* /. ^rht ^rhtr} 'vht PZttr. w. •in'p'y^ ; 1 T • m^t /. T : - T • 7[Tht T : — 4.IMPERF. (FUT.) Sing. 1 c. 2 [w. rhm rhtr\ J 'O^i^-^ * ' 1 T • 'ubt'rs 3 [m. rht]'' rhw]* lijt^* rhth rh^^r} rhtr\ Plur. I c. r6t) r6m rht} 2 rm. ^rhtr\ ^rhtr\ ^rhtrs I/. r^T^tr}* n:nfejj) r^Tiytr) 3|m. Tht] linV^"^ rht] 1/. njnbV^T** T ; - T • T^Thtrs* Paetcp. act. rh''^ 16 • pass, rrh^* nj?;^^* ' Verb Double Ayin, y^ (d). Verbal Perfect. KAL. NIPHAL. 1 > > Sing. 1 C. ^jinp >jii2p: 2 cm. mp* Jiizp jn'inpr ^202 3jm. np* nor ~ T V. n2D* T - T - T Plur. 1 c. ^:)iip 5)iiiipj 2 Cm. Drii3p Djniapi {/• ]^^2p IJ^^^^P^ 3 c. ^:ip •12p^ 2. Inf. {constr.) 2b* 2pn* Inf. (absol.) T niDH* 3. Imp. Sin^. m. nb* 2pn* /■ ••no* ^npn* P/ar. w. =)2D i3Dn /. T V \ T V - • 4. Imperi'. Sing. (FUT.) 1 c. r 2bi9i 3D^< - V 2 1 m. nbn 2br} 2pr) U •"nSn* ^npn* ^2pji« 3 im. 30^* ib;* npy V- nbj-n 2br\ 2pr) Plur. I c. 2D2 T 2b: npj 2 rm. T ^2pr) inpn 1/ nrziDn T . \ : n32Dn ^^2'2Dn* TV-' 3 j m. po; inp^ ^^2p; y- n2'2pn* r^pur) T V - • P ARTCP. OC/. ^2^ D ;?«**. 3120 3pr 18 Paradigms, Verb Double A YIN, _j;;; (d). HIPHIL. HOPHAL. POEL. POAL. ^jniipn •'Ji^ip^n '•rinn'iD ^J131iD riupn* riiip^n* jnna'^D rinniD jii^pn jn^^p^n mniD mniD npn* npin* * ^^"^^^ * iiniD* T •• •• T - nnniD T ; T ; ^:i3pn ^:iip^n •i:32iD •mi'D Djniipri □nnpin V • — Djnin'D ]ri^:ipn ]r^i2pin iriiiniD iraiiD •inpn •i3pin ••jnniD miD npn* •• T 1^^T\* nniD nniD •• T nniD ■ •• T (none) un^D (none) !)2pn •m^D nripn* T : •• ^P? np^^^ ^^''^^ na^D^^ nor) •• T np^ii • 2^^DP^ >2pjn* •.npiri* •'^iniDii '2TVr) npy(np^) npv*ap;) in^.b> 22^6] ap^ 2D^r\ nniDiji an^Dri no: •• T ^^I'l^iJ aniD: •• T ^2D^r\ •uniDr^ ^nn^DJi TV- : T V - T ; •• : T ; - ; J)Bp^^ ^:ihv m'^D^ ^22r€] TV* ; TV- T : •• : mnn^Dri npD* T 2yDD aniD.p 19 z Verb Pe Nun, ]H) (n). Verbal 1. Perfect. Sing. 1 c. KAL. NIPIIAL. HIPHIL. HOPHAL. •^Piph ••r^ti^ln • : -\ 2 Cm. Dth r^t^'^n r^ir^lin {/• Dt:\: Dt:\n Dtan Sfm. tt^:i:i mr ^^:in* iDun* Plur. 1 c. (regular) nm2 T ; • T • • limn 2 cm. Dr\m: UDp^r} Dr\mn \f- ]r}m2 ]^P^^ ]i^p^n 3 c. ^m^ W:^n : \ 2. Inf. {constr.) ^P}* man f'-in* mn* — \ Inf. (absol.) T T • ^_^rT* 3. Imp. (Siw^. m. i:^^* ••T • ]£}^r}* PZwr. w. W2i :iT' (none) / T ; - T ; "T • r]2ph 4.1MPERF. (FUT.) Sing. 1 c. 2 rm. *^|^ ^i;;^ - \ V. ^t^r) '^'■?^ 3 cm. Plur. I c. m2 (regular) mPi tn2 mil - \ 2 cm. mn ^uJ'^r) : \ L/ T ; - • T ; •• - T : -\ 3 rm. ^1:^:1^ Wh ^m' V- T : - • t^y T : •• - T : -\ Partcp. act. Z^^h 20 pass. I^^IJJ T , Paradigms. Verb Pe Aleph, ^i^ (a^). KAL. NIPHAL. HIPHIL. HOPHAL. b2)} b-ytj^T ^?^^[]* ^7^\l' Like the Verb Pe Guttural, in Paradigm, p. 14. bbi^* ^Dj^n ^Oi^n "pDj^n b^Dii T bDi^n T •• • :i '?i^?* .. T .. "bDi^ ^bDiji ETC. ETC. (none) ^Dj^* ^^5^^ "»bDi^;n b^ik^* ^D^^^* b'^Di^;^* b^i^'^* bDik^ ETC. ETC. ETC. ^b^iin n^bhi^D ^bDik'^ nf-^hikD act. b^i^ pass. ^.i:jk 21 Tv:iv > tt:it Verb Pe Yod, ^ D, orig. 13 (y). Verbal i. Perfect. KAL. NIPHAL. Sing. 1 c. '^i^^hs: 2fm. jnn^i: [f- m-^i:) 3 Cm. ~ T * 2m* if. (regular) T : Plur. 1 c. ••in'l^i:] 2 cm. nnit'^^ [f- ]n2t-2 3 c. UVJ\2 2. Inf. {constr.) ^^t % lb] 2tir}* Inf. {absol.) T 3. Imp. Sing. m. at{^* ^T.* •• T • /• '?P ''py. '>2t^n ' I It* Plur. m. up j)^-i> : IT* /. T : ~: T : - T • 4. Imperf.(Fut.) Sing. 1 c. 2rm. 2pr) 2t)n •• T • L/. '^P^. >pyr) '^P^J^ 3 I'm. ^^r ]D'v\* 2tV* L-^- ^p^ i:^Tri ^Plh P/ur. 1 c. ^p?. ^T? 2tri 2 rm. ^^^Vf:} Wi^-^ upin 1/. r^nhn nx'Tji r\2yh\n arm. "Wl "•^^T. ^upv l/- nppr} n::^i;ri npihn Partcp. ac^ :i'^ ])ass. 2TD'^ y:}S:* T 22 Paradigms. Verb properly Pe Yod, "'j) (y). HIPHIL. HOPHAL. KAL. HIPHIL. '^r\2,tSr\ >jpn^in ••rin^^rr miihn nai^^n DntD^n r\ztiSn r)2'^-irT r^nzD^n yt\n* n^^n* - T y]yr\* T • (regular) r^ybr^ T • •• annt:^in DJ^n^in Dr^niD^n irin^^'iH innii^irr 1^?^? ^i^i^in ^yp^r^ ^^'^'\] y^^Ti* n'^^n* yy :i^r5^n* -yt^n, 2,trsr\* T ^^'•?* 3^in* n^: ^!??* Cnone) T ; •• •' a'-^ij* 2'v:^^i^ ntD^^^ yu^'ik n^^ijn ni^^ri yyp^ y\yr) u-iyiri '^y^B •^yyrs 'ybr\ ^'•i;^^* ^t^'^* nio^>* y]!^>>* n-'^iri ymr\ nro^ri yv^'rs n^t^ij ym^ nro^i y^'^ ^y^t'^P) in-^in •inrp^r^ ^y^yr\ r^^2,ij^r\ nn^iji mn^^ri r\:iy^'r\ U'-l^^V •la-^-v •inrp^. •')n"'LD^^ T : •• T ; - r^^y^'rs :rt\}2* n"2;i/^* 3 ^'?'9 23 z Verb Ayin Vav, yj (v). Verbal KAL. NIPHAL. HIPHIL. HOPHAL. i. Perfect. Sing. 1 c. ^1 'ry\b\p:i "•JiiDprr ^r^ppn 2jm. zrm. 'dp; ri'iQpr niDipi Dpi* jniDpn* Jiiopri Dpri* riDpjn rippjn ' bpj)r{* 1/. T 't nop:* T P. .. Plur. 1 c. •i:ipp 1^?P •iJiDp; DJniDpi ]jiiDpi •i:iopn DriiDprr iniDpri ^iop_in Dnppin 1^PP_^^ 3 c. Dp* Dip* •iDipj •'''^'P'7 •iop-in 2. Inf. (constr.) Inf. {absol.) Dpn* D'lpn* Dpn* Dpn, Dpn* Dpjin* 3. Imp. Sing. m. DP* Dpn* Dpn* Plur. m. •IDp 'iy\pr\* •iDprr ^iDpn (none) /. n^^P* DpK Dpn njjpprr nyopT] 4. Imperf. (FUT.) Sing. 1 c. 2rw. DpJ^ Dipj^i DpJ^ Dp_1i^ Dp>1 I/. 3 rm. P/«r. 1 c. 2 rm. Dpj^ D^pj •loip/i ' T •'Dipjji* Dip;* D^^pn Dip: ^'^'\pF\ ''?'P^ Dp>» Dpj;i Dp": •Tt:pri '• T Dp_V* Dp;1D Dp_^: •T::piji 1/ nropj;^ r\ydpr\ r^:^pr\ njpp^ri 3 rm. nyppi;^* ^^Sp\ r^i^pr) nippji'r) Partcp. act. Dp* 24 y;a5S. Dp* Dp:j* ' T D'P?* dp;::* Paradigms, Verb Ayin Yod, 'V (v). PILEL. PULAL. KAL. NIPHAL. '•riD&ip ••ilipDip ^r\y2. ■ ^rii:!)!^ riiirjip jnrjDip TODip 'DDip n?2Qip HDQip T • T T •iJ^Dip DJiijQip Djniri DJiiraJ ^QQ'lp ^'Diy\'p T ^^-2. T DQip DDip ]i:irT DDP V2,* ]i2n (none) as Dipn njDDip DDipri DDipri DDiph DDipj ••QDipn DDip> DD^pri DDip^ ■ T pa; as Dip; mpQipn n^D^ipri r]TT2r\ TV • ; ^Qp^p> JiDDip^ ^JU^ n^DDpn n^?pDipjy^ DD^pD i nTT3jn* DQip^ 25* GC^]a* pass. I^ia* 1^33 Verb Lamed Aleph, iO (a^)- Verbal 1. Perfect. Sing. 1 c. 2 Cm. V- 3 Cm. V Plur. 1 c. 2 fm. V- 3 c. 2. Inf. iconstr.) Inf. (absoL) 3. Imp. Sin^r. m. /. P/wr. m. 4.Imperf. (Fut.) (Sm^. 1 c, 2 j m. V. t P/ur. 1 c. 2 im. L/. 3 rm. V- KAL. • T T T T T T T V T ; T ; • T • ■ T V : • NIPHAL. •• T • Partcp. ac/. K:ib /^"s*. K^2iD 26 •• T • •• T * : |T • T V T • T V T • PIEL. T ; • R5fP W^DD Paradigms. Verb Lamed Aleph, x"? (a^). PUAL. HIPHIL. HOPHAL. HITHPAEL. • •• \ ^jiK^pn ^jixi'DJin K^jipn Kiipjin T : \ T • : • ur\m^ Dii^^^iDn DJ^^^^^D^ ur\^iunT\ iriRjfD ]r\^'^U7} 1^^?^!? l^RiipjirT •ihi^i^prT : : \ ^^^^prl^T Nifpjin i^m Kijprin (none) (none) : ~ : • T V ; - njRL^pjpn* R:iD^^ N^iJQi^ K^iDi* KiiQni^ K^^DjR i^i'onn ^^ii2r\ ^>^^^Dr^ ^^^^i^il '^mr^nrs ^'W. m'^n] i^iirjr^ ^':i'Dr\ ^<^:^^l K^iDnn ^<:iQJ ^^^:iD:l k::;dj N^:Dn:i : \ : •li^^^pr) : : \ •iN^priij) T V : - T V : \ ^i<^^D> •IK^^iD^ •ik:jq^ •li^^jDn'' T V ; - T V : •. T V - : • R:iQD K^:iDD ^<^DD XiiDno 27 Verb Lamed He, r\b (h). * Verbal KAL. NIPHAL. PIEL. Sing. 1 c. • T '^'^^^ W^^ 2 (m. rvbr jrb:iy JT-?il* \f- n'b^ r]'b::i2 n'^bn 3| m. n^f rtb:i:* nb^* 1/ nrbr T ; ; • r^nb^* T ; • Plur. 1 c. irbil •ly"?:^ i:'^ji 2 rw2. nn'^b^i Dn'b:!i2 DJT'Pil V- IJi^^^ii ]n'^b:i2 in''^-! 3 c. T .1^^: iV^ 2. Inf. (constr.) ni^Ji* r^^b}r^* rrbr Inf. (absol.) T nb:^: riV| 3. Imp. 5in^. wi. n"?])* n^iin* n^r /. '^a» >^5n* '^r P/wr. m. i^j ^b^ii T • 1^-1^ /. nybs* T V T • T V - 4.Imperf. (Fut.) Sing, 1 c. 2 rm. nbin V — : If- ^•^JD* ^^iin* ^■pjj^* 3rm. If- Plur. I c. nb^2 nb:i2 2 rm. ^b'^n ^b'in T • 6'^r\ U nyb:in nr':'3n nr^jn 3 fm. ^^^: ^bT i'?:^ If. T V ; • nyb-nD* T V T • TV-; Par TCP. act. rh^ V 28 * pass, ^-br T nippr Paradigms. Verb Lamei ) He, n"? (li). PUAL. HIPHIL. HOPHAL. HITHPAEL. • •• •• ''lyb^Ti • "IT •-ri^rin JT^H* n'^^:in* jT^:n* rr'p-inn* ma r)'b:in ji^':'jn ji^^iinn ri^r n'?:in* nb:\n* n-'iinn* nnW ■>■::• nr]'?:in* nn'piinn* •ir^ii !ir'?:in ^ybian •ir^iijnrT Dn'bin DD^'^jn un'b:in DJi^-Jiinn ^T^il in^^:in ]r\'b;i7] iJn\>'.^rirT •I'^jn : T ^^iriii rybi\* Jii'?:in* rifen* jii^iinn* n^;in •• : T rt-'lJin* n':':n* n^iinn* ^':'jii* ^'>':inrT (none) ^^:n (none) ^•JiinrT T ■•• . - •^/'^^-O*?* n'?:)?* ^^:l^^ n'p^hJ n'piijnj^ rhin nb:in n':':in rh:\nr\ ''^in* ^^•)r^* >^:in* 'b^nn* rhT* r6T* n":?:)^* n-'in^* n'7:in n'^iin n'piinh rT'?:^ n"?:!: n'?:): n^iijn:) \ : i^:h • T ^b'^np) nrV^n nT'?:in ™^'?jn nrVii^nn 6t l^r •i'?|ii> T V •.. : T V : •- T V : T HT^Iiiri* ••• \ : n^:.'^* ^^^?* n5^i??* CLASSICAL WORKS by the Rev. T. K. ARNOLD, M.A. Arranged under Numbers for l)^ogre^si\e Tuition. LATIN. Edition. Henry's First Latin Book 9 (Second Latin Book, and Practical Grammar 5 \ First Verse Book 4 (second Part, with additional Exercises :. 1 rHistoriae Anfiquae Epitome 4 I A Second Verse Book (being Mr. Rapier's Introduction, care- < fully revised) 2 I Eclogae Ovidianas 7 I Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition, Pt. 1 8 /-Cornelius Nepos, with Critical Questions and Imitative Exer- I cises 3 ) ViRGILII iEvEis, lib. I.— VI 1 j Eclogae Horatiana?. Pars I. (Carmina) 2 I Eclogse Horatianae. Pars II. (Sermones) 1 Practical Introduction to Latin Verse Composition 2 Selections from Cicero, with English Notes. Part I. (Orations: the Fourth against Verres; the Orations against Catiline, and for the Poet Archias) 1 Part II. (Epistles, arranged in the order of time; with accounts of I the Consuls, events of each year, &c.) 1 EcLOG^ HisTOiuciE; or, Selections from the Roman Histo- rians. Caesar, Sallust, Livy, Curtius, Tacitus 1 '-Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition, Pt. II 3 f Longer Latin Exercises, Part 1 2 ) Part II 1 (Grotefend's Materials for Translation into Latin 2 Ellisian Exercises (adapted to the Practical Introduction, Part L) 1 GREEK. The First Greek Book 2 Practical Introduction to Greek Accidenf-e 4 Greek Prose Composition 7 . . Pt. II 1 Greek Construing 1 Greek Grammar for the higher forms 2 Elementary Greek Grammar The same, 'with an Account of the Greek Dialects 1 The Dialects separately 1 The Olynthiac Orations of Demosthenes, with copious Notes and (Grammatical References 1 The Oration of Demosthenes, on the Crown, on the same plan... 1 Homeri I lias, lib. I.—IV., with Critical Introduction and Notes 1 The Ajax of Sophocles, with Entrlish Notes 1 The Pliiloctetes of Sophocles, with Englisji Notes 1 HISTORY AND ANTIQUITIES. Handbook of Unman Antiquities... \ (.,,,,,.. _..^ 1 Handbook of (irecian Antiquities j ^'> •'••'>*■^; j Handbook of Ancient Geography and History \ 1 Handbook of Medi.Tval Geography and Histt ry > (PiiTz) 1 Handbook of Modern Geography and Hi>tory ) 1 Handbook of (ireek Synonymes (Pillon) 1 The Athenian Stage; a Handbook for the Student 1 Copious and Critical English-Latin Lexicon, founded on the German- Latin Dictionary of (Jeorges [by the Rev. T. K. Arnold and the Rev. J. E. Riddle] 2 Classical Examination Papers English Grammar for Classical Schools The First German Book Key to the Above German Heading Book Handbook of (Jernian Vocabulary The First French Book Key to tlie Above [by M. Delille] Handbook of French Vocabulary A First Classical Atlaa RIVINGTONS, ST. PAUL'S CHURCH YARD, & "WATERLOO PLACE. STAMPED BELOW AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. a m ^^ APR 2 19iS: f^OV 11 ia;m RFC'D L ffCV2 4 /a;o **>yy ^'^'^22 ? ,4rM >«- ;^ J?^ ^V^ Ci. 2£JHr ^> 4fe ' ^-'tp LD 21-100m-7.'33 251093 x>